OnScreen
for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards
with Assistive
Technology
Version 1.80
User’s Guide
OnScreen: for Windows; On-Screen Keyboards
with Assistive Technology; Version 1.80; User’s
Guide
IMG Real World Press
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
Website: http://www.imgpresents.com
To report errors, please send a note to ts@imgpresents.com
IMG Real World Press is a division of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
OnScreen, Version 1.80, 5/7/2013
Copyright © 1993-2013 by Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Production/Editing/Composition/Indexing/Publishing: IMG Real World Pre
Notice of Rights
All Rights Reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of the publisher. For information on obtaining permission for
reprints, excerpts, or other uses, please contact ts@imgpresents.com
Trademarks
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and My-T-Soft® are registered
trademarks of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Any other product name, service, or company identified within the book is
used for informational or editorial purposes only, and with no intention of
infringment of any trademark. No such use is intended to convey
endorsement or other affiliation with this book.
Notice of liability
The information in this book is distributed on an "As is" basis, without
warranty. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this
book, IMG Real World Press shall not have any liability to any person or
entity with respect to any loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused
directly or indirectly by any information contained in this book or the
product(s) described. The publisher takes no responsibility for any errors
or omissions.
ISBN 978-0-557-95776-7
Table of Contents
Part I. Getting Started................................ xii
1. Quick Start .........................................1
2. Getting Started ...................................7
OnScreen User’s Guide ................7
Using this Guide .........................10
What is OnScreen? .....................13
Why do I need OnScreen? ..........15
Features.......................................17
What You Need...........................21
Installing / Un-Installing OnScreen
22
Starting OnScreen.......................28
Licensing Information ................29
License Manager ........................31
Tutorial and Standard Settings....42
OnScreen Setup ..........................44
General Information on
OnScreen Setup .......46
Commonly Asked Questions ......51
Customer Support.......................60
Product Catalog ..........................63
Part II. Using OnScreen ..............................69
3. OnScreen Panels...............................71
General Operation ......................71
Tool Bar Panel and Keys ............73
Control Panel and Keys ..............76
Keyboard Panels and Keys .........79
WordComplete / Action Panel ....81
Windows Control Panels and Keys
89
Macro Panels and Keys ..............95
Calculator Panel..........................97
Quick Help Panel......................100
System Information Panel ........100
Touch Panel ..............................101
4. OnScreen Menu..............................103
OnScreen Menu ........................103
5. OnScreen Setup..............................116
v
OnScreen Setup - Overview .....116
User Options.............................121
Edit Word Lists ...............133
Word List Assistant.........138
Keyboard Scanning Settings
157
Basic Appearance .....................179
OnScreen Appearance ..............182
OnScreen Panel Selection
Dialog Box ............191
Operation Options...........193
Interface Settings ............202
Key Options ....................205
OnScreen Special Handling
Dialog Box ............211
OnScreen Panel Motion
Dialog Box ............218
OnScreen Size Selections
Dialog Box ............219
System Information Display
Dialog Box ............224
vi
Basic OnScreen Colors ...225
OnScreen Colors Dialog Box
228
OnScreen Background
Colors Dialog Box.234
Enhance - Visual
Enhancements........236
Fonts................................239
Sounds ......................................243
Select Keyboard Layouts..........256
Keyboard Layouts &
Windows................266
Advanced Notes on
Keyboard Layouts .268
Build-A-Macro .........................283
Information on Advanced Macro
Editing.............................291
Add-A-Macro Dialog Box
292
Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box
293
vii
Document Macro Dialog
Box ........................295
Document All Macros
Dialog Box ............297
Documentation File Save
Dialog Box ............298
Macro Key Dialog Box ...299
Macro Panel Dialog Box.302
Macro Zoom Dialog Box 307
Macro Select Dialog Box313
Active Window Dialog Box
313
Basic Mouse Buttons................315
Configure your Mouse Buttons 318
Select the Cursor and Icon........325
Exit OnScreen...........................327
6. OnScreen Logon Utilities...............329
OnScreen Logon Utilities
Overview.........................329
OnScreen Logon Utilities for
Windows 8 ......................330
viii
Windows Logon Setup
Options ..................333
Configure Start Screen
Options ..................335
Setup / Configure Logon
Utility ....................339
Configure Automatic Logon
for Windows ..........355
Part III. OnScreen Technical
Documentation .................................359
7. Advanced User Notes.....................362
Advanced User Notes &
Information .....................362
Final Release Notes ..................364
Important User Notes ...............371
Technical Notes ........................373
Application Notes.....................375
Windows Developers ................381
About this product ....................383
Customer Suggestions ..............389
ix
8. Files & File Notes & Installation
Information ...............................392
OnScreen Files & File Notes &
Installation Information ..392
Installation Information ..412
Deployment Information.420
9. Operation Notes .............................427
OnScreen Operation and Release
Notes ...............................427
EGA Users................................427
Year 2038 Limitations ..............428
Windows Menus .......................429
Keyboard Notes ........................430
Build-A-Macro Notes...............435
Memory ....................................449
Command Line Options ...........450
Build-A-Board Support ............467
OnScreen Button Display .........469
OnScreen Setup | Configuration |
Special.............................471
Windows Notes.........................472
x
Sounds (Advanced Notes) ........474
10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)....................484
OnScreen Initialization File
Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI) ..........484
11. Error Messages and Numbers ......679
OnScreen Error Messages ........679
Index............................................................689
xi
Part I. Getting
Started
General information
about this guide, the
product, installation,
and getting started
(how to get OnScreen
running).
Chapter 1 - Quick Start contains details on
the fastest way to install & begin using
OnScreen
Chapter 2 - Getting Started has more
information about this guide, OnScreen
features, Installing / Un-Installing, Licensing
Information, Standard Settings, using
OnScreen Setup, Commonly Asked Questions,
and information about Customer Support.
Chapter 1. Quick Start
Install OnScreen
There are various ways to obtain IMG
software, including (but not limited to):
•
Web based / Internet download from IMG’s
web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)
•
Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMG
Product Disc
•
Download ISO image file and burn IMG
Product Disc CD / DVD
•
USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installed
from USB media web download)
•
Single file install (from local network /
internet / other media)
•
IMG on-line account
Chapter 1. Quick Start
Note: IMG Software is built by product and
major version with minor releases. There
is only 1 unique build, but can be
packaged / delivered / obtained in various
ways. When unlicensed, the software acts
as a demonstration / evaluation copy, and
operation will be limited in length or
run-time or capabilities. Once licensed
(typically via License Key and Serial
Number, or OEM / Company-wide /
Enterprise licensing), the software will
operate with no limitations.
Recommendation: The quickest and
easiest method for obtaining IMG software
is to download the current version from
IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm).
Download, then run the file to install. Test,
review, play with, and verify the software
meets your needs and requirements.
2
Chapter 1. Quick Start
When ready to purchase, go to the IMG
License Manager, and click on the
"Purchase License Now" button. If working
on a machine without internet access, use
the Standard or MSI single file download,
or use a Product Disc option. Separately,
purchase the license for the product
directly on the website - once you have
your License Key and Serial Number, you
can install and license the software.
The following outlines a standard retail
Product Disc based install. For other options,
refer to notes and details available at the
source. In general, the approach is to install the
software, then license the software. The
Product Disc Installation Assistant provides an
easy way to accomplish these two tasks.
•
In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - the
3
Chapter 1. Quick Start
AutoRun feature will load the Installation
Assistant - you may Install a licensed
product , Install other product demos, or
view Release Information. If you have a
Certificate of Authenticity, enter your
License Key, Serial Number, and Name to
Install and automatically License.
•
If AutoRun is not enabled:
•
In Windows, Click on the Start Button
•
Select Run
•
Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (or
E:SETUP if CD/DVD drive E:, etc.)
•
Press (ENTER) or click on OK
•
In Windows Vista / 7 / 8, you may not have
the Run Option - select Computer, your
CD/DVD drive, and open Setup
•
Answer the questions and follow the
instructions on your screen
4
Chapter 1. Quick Start
Warning
Server Installation
(Terminal Server /
Terminal Services)
Note:When installing
on a server, for proper
operation, you MUST
install the software from
the Control Panel |
Add/Remove Programs
icon.
Note: You may also Un-Install OnScreen
by running SETUP.EXE After OnScreen
has been properly installed. (OnScreen
Setup will ask you if you wish to
Un-Install.) This has been provided as a
convenience to the user. It is
recommended that you use the Control
Panel | Add/Remove Programs Icon to
remove OnScreen.
5
Chapter 1. Quick Start
Start OnScreen
Click on the Start Button, and open the Start
Menu.
Select (All) Programs, then Select OnScreen.
The OnScreen menu will have selections
corresponding to the icons in the group. Select
OnScreen to begin operation.
The OnScreen Welcome will automatically run
after install. The Tutorial and this manual can
be used to learn all the features and capabilities
of OnScreen.
6
Chapter 2. Getting
Started
OnScreen User’s Guide
Version 1.80
5/7/2013
A Utility for Windows
Information in this document is subject to
change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Innovation
Management Group, Inc. The software
described in this document is furnished under a
license agreement or nondisclosure agreement.
The software and documentation may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of
Chapter 2. Getting Started
this agreement. It is against the law to copy the
software on any medium except as specifically
allowed in the license or nondisclosure
agreement. The purchaser may be allowed to
make a back-up copy. No part of this manual or
guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying,
recording, or information storage and retrieval
systems, for any purpose other than the
purchasers personal use, without the express
written permission of Innovation Management
Group, Inc.
This manual and product represent over 20
years of on-going development, testing, and
support. There are numerous legal, license, and
cross-license agreements associated with the
end product. Licensed users of the software are
one of the most important aspects of the entire
process that brings this manual and product
8
Chapter 2. Getting Started
into existence. Please be respectful of all
parties involved.
Trademarks:
Microsoft Windows is a trademark of
Microsoft Corporation.
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and
My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Patents:
This product was produced under U.S. Patent
No. 4,725,694.
Copyrights
OnScreen Copyright © 1993-2013 Innovation
Management Group, Inc.
OnScreen User’s Guide Copyright ©
1993-2013 Innovation Management Group,
Inc.
9
Chapter 2. Getting Started
All Rights Reserved. Software Subject to
Restricted Rights.
Using this Guide
This guide is a comprehensive collection of
details, notes, and information about
OnScreen. Portions are incorporated within the
product itself, and it is also available in various
forms (e.g. printed, on-line, PDF, etc.).
Important User Information
This guide is for users who are familiar with
Windows, its basic concepts, and how to
operate within Windows. If you are not, the
information you may need to fully utilize
OnScreen and this guide may be limited. You
may wish to review Windows help, tutorials,
and other available information on using and
10
Chapter 2. Getting Started
operating Windows before continuing using
this guide.
Product Versions
In order to address various customer needs and
requirements, there are numerous versions,
customizations, and special releases available.
This guide is created from a single source, and
can contain references and information about
other versions, capabilities, and features that
may NOT be represented in the version you are
using. In some places within this guide, there
may be mentions of other supporting software
that are part of the IMG family of products.
•
Build-A-Board - customizable keyboard
layout generator with support for multiple
platforms
•
CrossScanner - complete Windows access
from a single-switch (for users who can’t
11
Chapter 2. Getting Started
use standard input devices)
•
Joystick-To-Mouse - enables point and
click operation within Windows from a
joystick or gaming device
•
Touchright Utilities - right-click access for
touchscreens and other pointing devices
Specific notes for these and other products may
be found within this guide.
Conventions used within this guide
Note: Notes and other additional
information will be indicated in this way
12
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Warning
Special and other
important details to pay
close attention to will
appear this way
What is OnScreen?
OnScreen provides on-screen keyboards,
buttons, and utilities that allow any pointing
device to operate Windows 8 without the need
for a physical keyboard. Numerous user
options, enhancements, and Word Completion,
allow an individual to type, write documents,
compose e-mail, browse the web, and
accomplish any other common task effectively
and easily.
13
Chapter 2. Getting Started
OnScreen Software is intended to provide all
the functionality of a keyboard without using a
keyboard, thus allowing the user to remain on
the primary input device at all times. OnScreen
is also a very useful tool for quick Macros and
Windows commands. OnScreen has various
screen sizes and its option panels can expand
and retract dependent upon your requirements.
OnScreen has incorporated all kinds of large &
small features and capabilities based on actual
user input and requests.
Note: OnScreen is available in many
forms, by many names, and can trace its
history back to My-T-Mouse, originally
introduced to the world at Fall COMDEX
1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the Computer
Dealers Exposition, was the premier trade
show for everything happening in the
computer industry - My-T-Mouse was
featured as one of the highlights of the
show in a program called "Computer
14
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Chronicles" (a well known series that ran
from 1981 through 2002). You can find this
archived video [Computer Chronicles Fall
COMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive
(http://www.archive.org)). There are
versions that support Windows 3.0 / 3.1,
Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows NT,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows
Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Embedded
versions (NT/XP/7 & Windows CE), and all
Windows Server versions. Other operating
system & platform support can be found in
Build-A-Board, the next generation of the
My-T-Soft software.
Why do I need OnScreen?
OnScreen is intended to give the user all the
functionality of a keyboard without using a
15
Chapter 2. Getting Started
keyboard. Because the software is a
user-interface enhancement, and a functional
replacement for a physical keyboard in many
cases, the software is used throughout the
world for both simple and complex tasks...
My-T-Mouse is... (the original)
My-Typing-Mouse - The Software That Make
Your Mouse a Mouse That Types!
My-T-Pen is...
My-Typing-Pen - The Software That Makes
Your Pen a Pen That Types!
My-T-Touch is...
My-Typing-Touchscreen - The Software That
Makes Your Touchscreen a Touchscreen That
Types!
My-T-Soft is...
My-Typing-Software - The Software That
Types!
16
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Features
•
Seamless operation from Mouse, Trackball,
Touchscreen, Pen, or any other pointing
device
•
Microsoft Windows 8 Compatible
•
Options for interfacing with specialty and
assistive technology pointing devices
•
CrossScanner Support - includes tight
integration with OnScreen and cooperative
operational features
•
Key Magnifier option - 3 sizes available,
enlarges key for easier identification
•
Key Highlight option - visual indication of
key pointed to
•
AutoScroll - for larger sizes (larger than
screen) automatic scroll into view
17
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Scroll Control window for CrossScanner /
Touchscreen users
•
TurnAway add-on for Head Mouse users
•
Text-To-Speech (Windows
98/Me/NT/2000/XP) Option
•
Text-To-Speech - audio feedback of key
pointed to, with Repeat option
•
Text-To-Speech - Speak word typed upon
WordCompletion
•
Text-To-Speech - Setup & Speak window echo what has been typed
•
Word List options - Now supports whole
sentences and spaces between words
•
Word List options - International Word lists
•
Word List options - Manage & Save Word
Lists
•
Word List options - Read in and process
18
Chapter 2. Getting Started
external documents & files to add to current
Word List
•
Keyboard Scanning - operate OnScreen
entirely from a single switch (mouse button
(left-click))
•
Keyboard Scanning - Complete
customizable approach for panels,
rows/columns, and keys
•
Workstation / Network Logon Options
•
Developer Tool Kit and Extensions
•
Developer examples of integrating into
existing applications
•
Show & Hide Keys
•
Selectable Sizes
•
Realistic 3D graphics
•
Infinite Sizing
19
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Support for Build-A-Board layouts completely customizable user interface
•
11 panels, individually selectable, or create
your own with Build-A-Board
•
Great for editing - Quick & Easy!
•
Special Windows Short-cut Keyboard Power Users Dream!
•
101 & 104 key layouts
•
Multiple Keyboard Layouts with ABC
Layout for Non-Typists
•
International support - numerous keyboard
layouts from around the world
•
Create Macro Keys & Panels
•
Specific Key & Key Combination Enable /
Disable
•
Attach Executable programs to Keys & Key
Combos or Window Activation
20
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Includes the Calculator with Calculator Tape
& Send Feature
•
Time & Date Display
•
Memory, Disk Space, Resources status
Display
•
Completely Configurable for all of your
needs
•
Color-code Panels for easy identification
•
On-line Quick Help for First-Time Users
•
Minimizes to a Button for convenient access
•
Once you use it, you won’t want to live
without it!
•
Keyboard not required (Just Say No... to
your Keyboard.)
•
End-user and Developer Support
21
Chapter 2. Getting Started
What You Need
To run OnScreen you need the following
equipment (hardware requirements):
•
IBM 80386 or higher or compatible
•
200 mb hard disk space available
•
32 mb memory or higher
•
Windows 8
•
EGA or higher resolution monitor, VGA or
SVGA recommended
•
Any Windows supported pointing device
Installing / Un-Installing
OnScreen
There are various ways to obtain IMG
22
Chapter 2. Getting Started
software, including (but not limited to):
•
Web based / Internet download from IMG’s
web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm)
•
Shipped CD / DVD physical media - IMG
Product Disc
•
Download ISO image file and burn IMG
Product Disc CD / DVD
•
USB Flash Drive (pre-installed or installed
from USB media web download)
•
Single file install (from local network /
internet / other media)
•
IMG on-line account
Note: IMG Software is built by product and
major version with minor releases. There
is only 1 unique build, but can be
packaged / delivered / obtained in various
23
Chapter 2. Getting Started
ways. When unlicensed, the software acts
as a demonstration / evaluation copy, and
operation will be limited in length or
run-time or capabilities. Once licensed
(typically via License Key and Serial
Number, or OEM / Company-wide /
Enterprise licensing), the software will
operate with no limitations.
Recommendation: The quickest and
easiest method for obtaining IMG software
is to download the current version from
IMG’s web site
(http://www.imgpresents.com/demo.htm).
Download, then run the file to install. Test,
review, play with, and verify the software
meets your needs and requirements.
When ready to purchase, go to the IMG
License Manager, and click on the
"Purchase License Now" button. If working
on a machine without internet access, use
24
Chapter 2. Getting Started
the Standard or MSI single file download,
or use a Product Disc option. Separately,
purchase the license for the product
directly on the website - once you have
your License Key and Serial Number, you
can install and license the software.
The following outlines a standard retail
Product Disc based install. For other options,
refer to notes and details available at the
source. In general, the approach is to install the
software, then license the software. The
Product Disc Installation Assistant provides an
easy way to accomplish these two tasks.
•
In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - the
AutoRun feature will load the Installation
Assistant - you may Install a licensed
product , Install other product demos, or
view Release Information. If you have a
25
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Certificate of Authenticity, enter your
License Key, Serial Number, and Name to
Install and automatically License.
•
If AutoRun is not enabled:
•
In Windows, Click on the Start Button
•
Select Run
•
Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (or
E:SETUP if CD / DVD drive E:, etc.)
•
Press (ENTER) or click on OK
•
In Windows Vista / 7 / 8, you may not have
the Run Option - select Computer, your
CD/DVD drive, and open Setup
•
Answer the questions and follow the
instructions on your screen
26
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Warning
Server Installation
(Terminal Server /
Terminal Services)
Note: When installing
on a server, for proper
operation, you MUST
install the software from
the Control Panel |
Add/Remove Programs
icon as Administrator.
Note: You may also Un-Install OnScreen
by running SETUP.EXE After OnScreen
has been properly installed. (OnScreen
Setup will ask you if you wish to
Un-Install.) This has been provided as a
convenience to the user. It is
recommended that you use the Control
Panel | Add/Remove Programs Icon to
remove OnScreen.
27
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Starting OnScreen
Click on the Start Button, and open the Start
Menu. Select (All) Programs, then Select
OnScreen. The OnScreen menu will have
selections corresponding to the icons in the
group. Select OnScreen to begin operation.
The OnScreen Welcome will automatically run
the first time you load OnScreen.
The following icons will also be available in
the OnScreen group:
OnScreen Welcome - Opening Welcome,
access to tutorial, documents, product
OnScreen - runs OnScreen!
OnScreen Setup - Configuration options
28
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Licensing Information - Displays current
license status of OnScreen, allows instant
licensing
Text-To-Speech - Speak and Setup
Licensing Information
OnScreen uses the IMG License Manager to
manage the licensed use of this product. If
unlicensed, the product will run as demo (i.e. a
demonstration version). In the demo
(unlicensed) mode, OnScreen will run for
about an hour (or 250 keystrokes), and then
exit, displaying the license manager
(announcing that it is unlicensed). You may
restart OnScreen up to 100 times (the
demonstration period limit). After the
demonstration period is over, OnScreen will
not operate unless it is licensed. For extended
29
Chapter 2. Getting Started
evaluation and testing purposes, please contact
IMG Customer Service for an evaluation
license. Once licensed, the operation will not
be limited in any way.
The most common methods of licensing are
electronic (web/e-mail based) and by
certificate (Certificate of Authenticity). In both
cases, there will be a registered serial number,
and a license key made available once a license
has been purchased - these need to be entered
into the IMG License Manager to activate a
valid license. For further details, refer to the
IMG License Manager.
Note: There are numerous license
schemes (including OEM, site, &
enterprise licenses) available to meet the
needs of all our customers. If you have
any licensing questions, please contact
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
directly.
30
Chapter 2. Getting Started
License Manager
In order to License OnScreen, the correct
License Key and Serial Number must be
entered into the IMG License Manager, along
with some text for the Customer (and optional
Company) text areas. The License Key and
Serial Number can be found on the Certificate
of Authenticity, or in the Software Unlock
Codes e-mail.
OnScreen License Manager
31
Chapter 2. Getting Started
- Authentication
The License Key and Serial No. entries are a
matched pair, and will work together to unlock
the software. The Customer entry is required
(i.e. some text must be entered in the Customer
text area), but is not part of the license unlock
process. The Company text area is optional,
and will be shown as the Source when the
product is licensed.
32
Chapter 2. Getting Started
To quickly and easily license the software (on a
system that has internet access), simply click
on the "Purchase License Now" button. Once
connected to IMG’s website, you will be asked
to enter billing information and payment
information. Once paid, your order will be
processed, and you will receive a confirmation
e-mail and a separate e-mail with license
information. Once the order is fully processed,
you can then click the "Retrieve Purchased
License" button to automatically license your
system.
System ID Note: The System ID is used
to accurately match the Product and
Version you wish to license with the
License Information provided. If the
system you wish to License does not have
Internet Access, you can use the Copy
System ID to Clipboard to accurately copy
the System ID to the clipboard (which can
be saved in a text file or other document
33
Chapter 2. Getting Started
and moved to a system that does have
Internet Access).
Note: The "Retrieve Purchased License"
uses a unique identifier to automatically
license your system (which is only sent if
the "Purchase License Now" is used). If
you try this on a different system, or after a
system update or re-install (or after a
change to this unique ID), the software will
not license automatically. You will either
need to enter the License Key and Serial
Number, or go into Additional License
Options (see below) and use your Order
Confirmation Number and Order E-mail to
retrieve the license.
Important Note: Be sure to save and/or
print your Order Confirmation number
34
Chapter 2. Getting Started
(with Order E-mail), along with your
License Key and Serial Number in case
you need to re-license the software in the
future (Operating System Re-install, hard
disk reformat, new system, etc.)
Certificate of Authenticity Note: For
Electronic Licenses, and Certificate of
Authenticity can be retrieved on IMG’s
website:
https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/account
This requires a valid License Key and
Serial Number. Once entered, you may
view a PDF of the Certificate, or download
the Certificate of Authenticity PDF file (for
printing or saving).
OnScreen License Manager
35
Chapter 2. Getting Started
- Additional License
Options
The Additional License Options section has
tools and options to Enter or Paste Evaluation
or Other License Information; Request and
Retrieve Evaluation Licenses; Support Options
to View and Delete (Reset) the License file;
and a mechanism to retrieve a Purchased
36
Chapter 2. Getting Started
License by entering the Order Confirmation
Number and the Order E-mail address.
Often, interested parties want to review or test
the software without the demonstration license
limitations, and to accommodate this, IMG
makes available Evaluation Licenses. These
Evaluation Licenses are fully functional
licenses, but with a date limit (when the
evaluation date has passed, the software will
return back to the Unlicensed, Demonstration
mode).
Evaluation Licenses may be requested at the
Product Download pages on the website, or by
using the Request / Retrieve Evaluation
License button here. Note that all Evaluation
License requests are reviewed, and Evaluation
Licenses must be created by IMG personnel
(generation is not automated).
An Evaluation License sent via e-mail contains
a block of text that has the license details for
37
Chapter 2. Getting Started
the License Manager. When sent via e-mail,
the text can be copied and subsequently pasted
into the text area here (Paste Text from
Clipboard), then saved to enable (set) the
License Information (Save License Info).
Alternatively, if an Evaluation License is
Requested, then after processing, it may be
automatically Retrieved directly by clicking
the Request / Retrieve Evaluation License
button. Please refer to any additional
information provided by the messages shown
when using this approach.
The View Current License File
(LICENSE.LIC) button will load the file
LICENSE.LIC from the installation folder.
This file contains the actual license information
for the product, or the license information used
to validate a License Key and Serial Number.
Note: Because an Evaluation License
38
Chapter 2. Getting Started
uses this same file, the Delete (Reset)
option should be used if Licensing the
product after using an Evaluation License.
The Delete (Reset) License File
(LICENSE.LIC) will remove the existing
LICENSE.LIC, then copy the file
LICENSE.ORG to LICENSE.LIC (both in the
installation folder). The file LICENSE.ORG is
the "as shipped" license file, and should be the
License File when using a License Key and
Serial Number to license the software.
Note: For License Purposes, using the
Support Option to Delete (Reset) the
License File is essentially the same as
un-installing, then re-installing the
software. Because this option is quicker
and simpler, it is the preferred approach to
resolve any license issues. Note that
39
Chapter 2. Getting Started
manually copying the file LICENSE.ORG
to LICENSE.LIC (in the installation folder)
performs the same operation as this
option.
The License Retrieval Option will retrieve
License Information from IMG’s Website for
electronically purchased licenses. The Order
Confirmation Number and Order E-mail is
required (which appear on the Order
Confirmation page provided after successfully
placing an on-line order, and are provided
separately via an Order Confirmation E-mail).
Note: For Retrieved Licenses (via Retrieve
Purchased License, and via the Retrieve
License Support Option), License Key and
Serial Number information is processed
exactly as if this information was directly
entered in the Authentication area.
40
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Therefore, all issues that may affect
licensing also apply to these automated
options (e.g. License File status, User
permissions, etc.)
OnScreen License Manager
- Licensed Display
41
Chapter 2. Getting Started
When properly Licensed, a screen similar to
this will show the License Information for the
product. The display of this indicates that the
software is Licensed.
Note: Evaluation licenses also show this
screen during the days that the Evaluation
License is valid.
Tutorial and Standard
Settings
The OnScreen tutorial explains each of the
panels and keys available. Following is a
description of the standard settings for
OnScreen and a brief description of the panels
that are initially displayed. The tutorial and
42
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Section II of this manual will explain each key
and panel in detail. The OnScreen Tutorial may
be run from the OnScreen Welcome window or
by selecting Tutorial from the OnScreen Menu.
Settings in the standard configuration
Left Mouse button (or pen or touchscreen tap)
is set to press a key. Right Mouse button (if
supported by touchscreen / pointing device
driver) is for opening the OnScreen menu.
The following panels are initially displayed:
The OnScreen WordComplete / Action
Panel
The WordComplete / Action Panel provides
frequency sorted word completion candidates
based on letters typed, along with other action
buttons & control keys.
The Keyboard Panel
With a document or input window open, a left
43
Chapter 2. Getting Started
button click on any key on the keyboard panel
acts exactly like pressing the corresponding
key on the keyboard.
The OnScreen Tool Bar
The Tool (top) button when clicked will open
and close the WordComplete / Action Panel (in
Basic Mode).
The middle button will pop-up the OnScreen
Menu
The bottom button will minimize OnScreen to
either an icon or a button as set in the
configuration.
OnScreen Setup
To run OnScreen Setup:
Open the Start Menu, Select (All) Programs,
44
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Select OnScreen, then select the OnScreen
Setup icon in the OnScreen Program Group
Menu.
OR
From OnScreen, click the OnScreen menu
button on the tool bar and click OnScreen
Setup.
OR
From OnScreen, open the Main Macro Panel,
and click on the button labeled "Setup"
If OnScreen is running while you are selecting
options from the following setup screens it will
change to the new settings immediately after
you click OK to save the changes. You do not
need to restart OnScreen to configure it with
the new settings. On each screen you may also
choose to click Cancel to exit without saving
the new settings.
45
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Once you have created a configuration that you
wish to keep, you may wish to save it so
OnScreen will re-open in the same
configuration and screen position. To save a
configuration or position, open the OnScreen
Menu, select Current Settings, and select Save
to Save Current Settings (and/or Select
Position, Save Current Position). Once saved,
OnScreen will always open in the saved
configuration until another configuration is
saved.
General Information on
OnScreen Setup
OK
46
Chapter 2. Getting Started
The OK button will save all your changes.
CANCEL
The CANCEL button will ignore any changes
you have made, and restore your previous
configuration.
Pull-down Box
47
Chapter 2. Getting Started
This is a Pull-down Box.
Radio Button
48
Chapter 2. Getting Started
These are a Radio Buttons.
Active Application
The Active Application is always identified as
follows:
1. It has the input focus (the blinking cursor).
2. The Caption (Window Title) bar is colored
in the highlighted color.
Cursors
This is a Cursor.
Icons
49
Chapter 2. Getting Started
This is an Icon.
Check-Buttons
These are Check-box Buttons.
Panels
50
Chapter 2. Getting Started
This is an example of a OnScreen Panel.
Commonly Asked Questions
Compatibility
1. Does OnScreen work with all Windows
Applications?
Yes.
51
Chapter 2. Getting Started
2. Does OnScreen run in DOS?
No, OnScreen is a Windows Application,
although you may operate DOS applications in
a DOS Window. For example, try the DOS
Macro Panel to see the command prompt in a
window.
Display
3. OnScreen covers too much of my
Window. What can I do?
a) Resize and/or reconfigure OnScreen. b)
OnScreen can be minimized to a button, and
will reside in the upper left corner of your
active window. This way you can quickly open
the OnScreen window when you need it. c) Set
your second or third Mouse Button to "Look
Through OnScreen." d) Work with Developer’s
Kit to allow on-demand display
4. Why doesn’t OnScreen open the way I
last closed it?
52
Chapter 2. Getting Started
OnScreen always opens and first displays with
the settings that are saved. To assure that
OnScreen opens the way you desire, configure
OnScreen and then Open the OnScreen Menu,
Select "Current Settings" and then Select "Save
Current Settings" from the pop-up Menu.
OnScreen will now remember these settings
and open with the current configuration. You
can also save the Screen position where
OnScreen first appears by Saving Current
Position from the OnScreen Menu. Note that
the Developer’s Kit allows extrenal control of
settings If there are pre-defined configurations
& settings that are controlled externally via
another application, then this may override the
default action of the software. Check with your
system administrator for more details.
5. OnScreen Interferes with my
application’s Display. What can I do?
Some Windows Applications do not handle the
53
Chapter 2. Getting Started
screen display properly, and don’t expect any
other window to be displayed over the
applications’ window. Since OnScreen can
display over any window, sometimes a display
conflict can occur. Refer to the Advanced User
Information .
OnScreen Operation
6. How do I view the Cursor in the
Magnifier?
The Magnifier Cursor indicator is Set On in
Setup-Configuration-Panels.
7. When I press a key on OnScreen it
doesn’t do what I expect (or does nothing).
What is the problem? Usually this occurs
when the key pressed on OnScreen actually
does nothing in the active window, or what you
didn’t expect - verify this by using your
computer’s actual keyboard. Remember that
only one window can be active at a time, and
54
Chapter 2. Getting Started
the active window receives all keyboard and
OnScreen keystrokes.
8. Why doesn’t the pause key work?
Due to the nature of the Windows operating
environment, most applications can not stop
the operation of the system in an acceptable
manner. OnScreen actually does send the
proper Windows Keyboard Events, but most
applications ignore this key.
9. Why doesn’t the Print Screen Key print
the whole screen?
The Print Screen Key on OnScreen captures
the image of the Active Window. Maximize the
window by pressing MAX on the OnScreen
Windows Control Panel, and then use the Print
Screen Key.
10. My Macro doesn’t work properly. What
is the problem?
55
Chapter 2. Getting Started
The Keystroke macro feature is relatively easy
to setup and use, however doing complex
keystroke macros can be tedious. First, verify
the keystroke combinations and sequence by
using OnScreen to perform the Macro, then
verify that the sequence is exactly the same in
the Macro entered. Also, when working with
Alt, Control, and Shift keys you must be extra
careful that the down and up keystrokes
correspond properly to the way the application
expects the keystrokes. For example, to do an
[Alt]-F you must use [Alt-Down]F[Alt-Up]. It
may be necessary to use lowercase letters
instead of uppercase to work properly within
certain applications. Note that a OnScreen
Keystroke Macro character represents a
Key-Down, and Key-Up sequence. Finally,
make sure that the Caps lock is in the same
state as the Keystroke Macro recording. Also
see notes in the Build-A-Macro section, and
Advanced User Information.
56
Chapter 2. Getting Started
11. Why does OnScreen Move its position
for certain windows?
OnScreen senses the active window. When the
active window is a certain type of window,
OnScreen will act in certain ways, as
configured in the initialization file. For
example, OnScreen moves off of Windows
Dialog boxes, so the information required by
the application is not obscured by OnScreen.
All of these settings can be modified, but a
certain level of understanding of Windows is
required. Refer to Operation Options and/or
Advanced User Information .
Memory
12. How Much Memory does OnScreen use
while running?
This depends on your screen display colors
(16, 256, etc.), and the current OnScreen
configuration. Normal operation requires less
57
Chapter 2. Getting Started
than 100K RAM. If OnScreen runs slow or you
have memory problems see "System Memory
Note" in the Advanced User Notes.
13. Is OnScreen a TSR (Terminate and Stay
Resident)? [the original product was released
so long ago that this was once a commonly
asked question - it is left here for perspective]
OnScreen is a normal Windows Application.
Nothing stays resident once OnScreen is
Closed.
International Operation
14. What do I need to do to operate
OnScreen with an International Keyboard
layout?
You must select the desired keyboard display
for OnScreen and then set the proper keyboard
layout in the Windows Control Panel for
proper operation.
58
Chapter 2. Getting Started
15. Does OnScreen Translate?
No.
Input Devices
16. Can I Operate my Computer without a
Keyboard?
Yes, but special BIOS may be required. Most
systems allow your computer to boot-up
without a Physical Keyboard - sometimes this
isn’t intuitive, and may require settings for
errors rather than the keyboard. As long as
Windows is automatically started, you may run
OnScreen on a system without a keyboard.
17. Does OnScreen require a Mouse?
No, but OnScreen does require at least some
type of pointing device that emulates a mouse
to the extent that the user can move the cursor
and click on at least one button. Most
Touchscreen and Pen drivers support this type
59
Chapter 2. Getting Started
of interface. Contact your touchscreen or pen
manufacturer for more information on
compatible drivers.
18. Does OnScreen require any special
drivers?
No. OnScreen works with all standard
Windows drivers supplied by all well-known
touchscreen manufacturers / dealers.
19. Does OnScreen operate with pens,
joysticks, touchscreens, digitizer pads, and
other pointing devices?
Yes, as long as they truly emulate the mouse
cursor movement and mouse button clicks.
Contact Innovation Management Group, Inc.
regarding My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®,
My-T-Touch® & My-T-Soft®.
60
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Customer Support
OnScreen Software is backed by a support staff
trained to provide you with fast, courteous
service. Over the years, IMG has astounded
individuals at the quality of it software and its
support. So that we can continue to focus our
resources on development and providing
high-quality products & support, we do
appreciate your assistance in reviewing the
help, manual, and support information
available at our website to see if the problem or
question has already been addressed. However,
if you need assistance beyond what the manual,
tutorial, help files, and on-line support database
provide, please contact IMG Customer Service:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
61
Chapter 2. Getting Started
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
To open a Technical Support case and create a
support ticket, please refer to
https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/support/tech
Please provide, or have the following
information ready when you ask for assistance:
•
OnScreen version number, update level.
•
Registered serial number (or if running
demo)
•
Make and Model of your computer.
62
Chapter 2. Getting Started
•
Windows version number, any Service Packs
or major updates.
•
A description of the problem.
•
If possible, a list of the steps required to
recreate the problem.
•
If you have seen an error code, record and
report the number.
•
Additional information may be required,
such as monitor type, type of pointing
device, amount of RAM in your system,
other software running (anti-virus, spyware,
virtual machine, etc.).
Product Catalog
Innovation Management Group, Inc.’s
Products
63
Chapter 2. Getting Started
Commercial Division
Products...
Indestructible Keyboards & Indispensable
Utilities!
My-T-Soft® Build-A-Board
The Ultimate Tool for creating and modifying
On-Screen Keyboards, buttons, and Panels.
My-T-Soft Family, plus Cross-Platform
Support
My-T-Pen® for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for Pen
Based Systems
My-T-Touch® for Windows
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for
Touchsreens
My-T-Soft® for Windows
64
Chapter 2. Getting Started
On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for any
pointing device
My-T-Soft® TS for Terminal Services
On-Screen Keyboards for Terminal Server /
Terminal Services
TouchRight Utilities
Right Click Access for Pens & Touchscreens
Assistive Technology
Division Products...
Enabling Tools for Special Needs
AT Accessibility Suite
IMG’s Assistive Technology Software with site
license options
Joystick-To-Mouse
65
Chapter 2. Getting Started
The Software That Lets You Run Windows
With A Joystick!
My-T-Mouse®
The Software That Makes Your Mouse a
Mouse That Types! Indispensable & Utilities
for any Mouse or Trackball
OnScreen
Special Features for disabled & impaired users
Word Prediction / Word Completion / Window
Control / Scanning
OnScreen with CrossScanner
Complete control of Windows from a single
switch! Support for Keyboard, Mouse, Joystick
interfaces
SmartClick
Operate Windows without the need to
Press/Click a Button
66
Chapter 2. Getting Started
The Magnifier
Area and Full Screen Magnifier, Cursor
Locator, Visual Aids
WordComplete
Word Completion, adaptive word prediction,
Word List Management, etc. Type Better, Type
Less - we do the rest!
For further information...
Contact your Local Software Dealer
or
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
67
Chapter 2. Getting Started
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
http://www.my-t-mouse.com
http://www.my-t-pen.com
http://www.my-t-soft.com
http://www.my-t-touch.com
http://www.onscreen-keyboard.com
http://www.build-a-board.com
http://www.joystick-to-mouse.com
http://www.themagnifier.us
For International Contacts, please see Web
Site...
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and
My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
68
Part II. Using
OnScreen
Description of how
to operate and
configure
OnScreen.
Description of how to operate and configure
OnScreen.
Chapter 3 - OnScreen Panels contains
general operation information, along with
specific information about each of OnScreen’s
panels.
Chapter 4 - OnScreen Menu outlines the
various options accessible from the OnScreen
menu, and provides details on sizing,
minimizing, saving, and closing OnScreen.
Chapter 5 - OnScreen Setup details all of the
configuration options and dialogs available to
configure and setup OnScreen.
Chapter 6 - OnScreen Logon Utilities covers
the specific options available for using the
logon utilities that enable using an on-screen
keyboard when logging onto Windows.
Chapter 3. OnScreen
Panels
General Operation
All features and actions within OnScreen are
performed by moving the cursor / pointer over
the desired button and single clicking the
selected button. OnScreen may be repositioned
on the screen by clicking anywhere on the
background (anywhere that is not a button) of
OnScreen and dragging it to the new screen
position.
OnScreen can also assign a secondary button
(if supported by the hardware driver) to move
OnScreen. See OnScreen Setup Help for more
information on how to change your Mouse
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Button Assignments.
Themes
Themes use different key images and
backgrounds to create a wide range of looks to
the OnScreen layouts. The available themes are
based on the ThemeList, which lists
sub-folders that contain images and details on a
particular theme. You can change the current
theme to the next available theme via the
Advanced Features menu, or (if in use), the
Touch Panel. To modify, add, or get more
detailed information on Themes, refer to the
Initialization File entries for Theme,
ThemeList, and ThemesFolder.
Note: The Themes capability allows for
custom painting, so a wide-range of looks
and customizations can be accomplished
using low-level display features via a
separate DLL (Dynamically Linked
72
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Library). These affect certain built in
features and display capabilities when in
use.
Tool Bar Panel and Keys
OnScreen may be configured to operate in a
Basic or Advanced Mode, which changes the
functionality of the Tool Bar. In Basic Mode,
the Top button opens and closes the
WordComplete panel (which also toggles
WordComplete functionality such as
punctuation & capitalization options). In
Advanced Mode, the Top button opens and
closes the Control Panel, which allows
complete control of all OnScreen panels,
sizing, etc.
73
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
The Tool Bar can also be closed, but this is
intended as a developer / integrator function.
From the Current Settings | Panels menu you
may individually select panels to open and
close. There is also a manual override,
available in Panels. When this is enabled, a
3-click (1-2-3) click combination will toggle
the panel - if opened, it will be closed - if
closed, it will be opened. The original design
created the Tool Bar as the one panel that can
never be closed, and it is handled differently
than the other selectable panels. Allowing it to
close creates certain usability issues, and in
certain cases the Control Panel will be
modified to offer other options when the Tool
Bar is closed. If the Tool Bar is closed, resizing
and certain other actions will force the Tool
Bar open.
74
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
The Menu Button pops up the OnScreen Menu.
It allows you quick access to some of the
frequently used options as well as the ability to
run OnScreen Help. In Advanced Mode, you
may also save your current configuration &
screen position from the OnScreen Menu . For
further details about menu differences between
Basic and Advanced mode, see OnScreen
Menu.
The Minimize Button minimizes OnScreen to
an icon or a button, based on your current
75
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
configuration.
Control Panel and Keys
The Control panel allows you to open and
close all OnScreen panels. Click on each key to
76
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
perform the toggle action. Blue (highlighted)
letters indicate an open panel, black letters
indicate a closed panel. OnScreen also
indicates the open panels by latching (or
showing as depressed) each panel button. See
ControlPanelToggleButtons setting in the
Initialization file.
Click on the Tool Button to activate the Control
Panel when in the Advanced Mode (in Basic
Mode, this panel is not available.)
Keys & Functions
Kybd: opens and closes the alpha keyboard
panel
Edit: opens and closes the edit panel
Num: opens and closes the numeric panel
WordC: opens and closes the WordComplete
(Action [Act’n]) panel
SzUp: steps up the size of OnScreen currently
displayed If the Tool Bar is closed, this button
77
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
will change to become Tool. If Tool is clicked
on, the Tool Bar will open.
SzDn: steps down the size of OnScreen
currently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed,
this button will change to become Hide. If
Hide is clicked on, the Control Panel will hide.
If the Control Panel is the only button panel
opened, this button will change to become
Swap. If Swap is clicked on, the Tool Bar will
open, and the Control panel will close.
Help: opens and closes the Quick Help panel
Info: opens and closes the System Information
panel
Win: opens and closes the Windows Controls
panel
Macro: opens and closes the Macro panel
Calc: opens and closes the Calculator
Exit: exits OnScreen and Closes the OnScreen
Window
78
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Action Panel note: The Action panel is
made available when WordComplete is
disabled in OnScreen Setup | User
Options. The "WordC" button is re-labeled
as "Act’n", and the panel toggle button
operation remains the same, but instead of
the WordComplete / Action panel, only the
Action panel is used.
Keyboard Panels and Keys
When you click any of the keys on the
Keyboard (Alpha) Panel, Edit Panel, and
79
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Numeric Panel, they will respond exactly like
the corresponding keystroke on a physical
keyboard. In order to type with OnScreen,
another window must be the Active
Application and have the input focus. Windows
typically indicate where typed characters will
be displayed by the Caret, or text cursor. This
usually is displayed as a flashing bar, although
other shapes may be used.
To use combination keys i.e. Shift, Alt, or Ctrl
just click on that key. Your cursor will change
and OnScreen will display which key is
currently locked. For example, if you have
clicked on the Alt key, the cursor will have the
word Alt visible. The lock will be released
after you click on a normal key, i.e. A-Z keys.
You may carry more than one combination key
at a time.
On some international layouts, the right-most
Alt key is treated as the "AltGr" key. When
80
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
pressed, this key acts as if both the Ctrl key and
the Alt key have been pressed, and the cursor
will indicate this combination state. This
additional state (e.g. Ctrl & Alt keys both
pressed) allows access to additional letters and
keys.
There are numerous layouts available for the
keyboard panel, accessible through OnScreen
Setup, Keyboards - See OnScreen Setup Help
for information on available panels and how to
change the current keyboard layout.
You may also select from some pre-defined
(included) Build-A-Board custom layouts. To
create your own layouts, you will need IMG’s
Build-A-Board.
Keys may be programmed with commands or
Macros. See Key Options in Setup and
reference the OnScreen Developer’s Kit for
more information.
81
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
WordComplete / Action
Panel
WordComplete
The WordComplete Panel provides a method to
complete words as they are being typed,
greatly increasing words-per-minute typing
82
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
speed. This also is used as an enable/disable
option for the various WordComplete options
available in OnScreen Setup | User Options
when WordComplete is enabled. Options such
as "Automatic I Capitalization" and
"Automatic spaces & Capitals" are only
enabled when the WordComplete panel is
open. During normal operation, if you need to
type web addresses, e-mails, or other input that
uses periods or other punctuation, you may
wish to close the WordComplete panel
temporarily to disable these automatic
WordComplete options, so typing can occur
uninterrupted.
WordComplete / Action Panel
When the WordComplete panel is open, the
Action panel is automatically included.
There are 3 sets of 5 buttons:
The leftmost buttons are the WordComplete
83
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
control buttons (Undo, Suffix, More, Buffer,
Clear).
The middle column is the WordComplete
Completion buttons (words based on the letters
in the WordComplete buffer sorted by
frequency). Some or all or none of the buttons
may have words in them dependent on the
Word Lists, and the letters in the buffer. The
Completion button colors may be set within
OnScreen Setup.
The rightmost buttons are the Action panel
buttons (Back, Size, Select, Move, Arrange).
See Action Panel below for descriptions of
these buttons.
WordComplete control buttons
Some of these buttons may either be enabled or
disabled when appropriate (there is extensive
logic to aid the user when the WordComplete
Panel is in use). When disabled, the button’s
84
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
text will appear "grayed" or dimmer than usual.
Undo - selecting this button (when enabled)
will undo the last WordComplete Action. Note
this only affects word Completions and
Suffixes, and should not be confused with the
Undo options in other applications.
Suffix / Words - This button will take on
different meanings based on where the user is
regarding completions. If Suffixes are enabled
(in User OptionsUser_Options_Dialog_Box ),
then Suffix will appear during character typing.
Prior to a Completion, the Suffix button may be
pressed to display available suffixes. The label
will change to Words, to indicate that the
completion buttons can be toggled back to the
Completion suggestions if no suffix is selected.
Note that after a completion (if Suffixes are
enabled), then the suffixes will automatically
appear.
More - This button will display additional
85
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Completion suggestions (if available), or
additional suffixes. Once through the list, the
More button will display from the beginning of
the list.
Buffer - This button displays the current text
being typed, and indicates the text being used
to select the Completion suggestions. When
KeyAssist is enabled, the # symbol is shown to
indicate that KeyAssist can be toggled Active
or Inactive. When Active, KeyAssist places
small numbers (1 through 5) on the
WordComplete buttons, and the number keys
on the Keyboard panel (i.e. 1-0) are replaced
with 2 sets of keys labeled 1-5 (and colored the
same as the WordComplete panels). These
keys allow the user to quickly select a
WordComplete candidate from the Keyboard
panel without having to move the mouse cursor
to the WordComplete panel.
86
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
CrossScanner note: During
CrossScanner operation with
Text-To-Speech set to Speak
WordComplete words (CrossScanner
Auto-Speaks), selecting this button will
restart the automatic step through
announcing each displayed completion
candidate in the WordComplete buttons.
Clear - If selected, this will Clear the Buffer,
the Completion suggestions, and essentially
reset the whole WordComplete panel.
WordComplete Completion Buttons
These 5 buttons will take on the best
suggestions based on the letters in the Buffer
button (from the characters being typed by the
user), or these buttons will display suffix
candidates (if Suffixes are enabled). The logic
used is slightly different for a single character
vs. more than 1 character, but essentially the
87
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
frequency of use is the determining factor for
the order of words in the list. Each time a word
is used (or a new word is added to the list), its
frequency is increased by one. When
KeyAssist is enabled and active, these keys
will be numbered 1 through 5, indicated with a
small number on the upper left of each button.
Note: Suffixes are contained in a "-.TXT"
file, and may be modified by the user
(contained in the OnScreen installation
directory). Suffixes are not sorted.
Action Panel
Action Buttons
Back - This button acts as the Back Space. It is
conveniently located on the Action panel as a
secondary method for undo-ing a character that
88
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
is typed. Note: This button does not support
"typematic" type operation.
Size - This will cycle OnScreen through 3 of
the most popular sizes, and automatically
arrange the current window.
Select - This will select from the current open
windows, and select the next window and
make it the current active window, and size &
arrange the window.
Move - This will move OnScreen to the top or
the bottom of the screen dependent on
OnScreen’s current position.
Arrange - This will Size & Arrange the active
window. If there are child windows (windows
contained within the main window), these
current child window will be maximized.
89
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Windows Control Panels and
Keys
Click on each button to perform the action
described. The keystroke equivalent is shown
in the [brackets]. Page 1 - Windows Controls
Desktop Panel
MENU Opens the control (system) menu of
the active window. [Alt][Space]
90
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Prop Properties / Opens the Context Menu (if
available) [Shift][F10]
NEXT Go to next window and restore window
size. [Alt][Tab]
Yes Yes answer. [Alt][Y]
No No answer. [Alt][N]
Tile Tile the windows/icons. [Shift][F4]
FIND Switches through all open windows.
[Alt][Esc]
RSTR Restore the window to its former size.
[Alt][Space][R]
CLOSE Close the active window. [Alt][F4]
MIN Minimize the active window (to an icon).
[Alt][Space][N]
MAX Maximize the active window (full
screen). [Alt][Space][X]
Casc Cascade the windows/icons. [Shift][F5]
91
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Find Find the next child window. [Ctrl][Tab]
Enter Enter Key. [ENTER]
Close Close the active child window of an
active window. [Ctrl][F4]
Rstr Restore the child window to its former
size. [Alt][Space][R]
Max Maximize the child window.
[Alt][Space][X]
Pg2 Move to Page 2 of the Windows Controls.
Page 2 - Windows Controls Application Panel
UNDO Undo last command. [Alt-BkSp]
CUT Cut highlighted object to clipboard.
[Shft-Del][Ctrl-X]
COPY Copies highlighted object to clipboard.
[Ctrl-Ins][Ctrl-C]
PASTE Pastes object from clipboard to active
window. [Shft-Ins][Ctrl-V]
92
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
PPST Pastes object from clipboard to previous
window.
PPSTR Pastes object from clipboard to
previous window and returns.
FIND Switches through all open windows.
[Alt-Esc]
PREV Goes to previous active window (if
available).
CLOSE closes active window. [Alt-F4]
MIN minimizes active window (to an icon).
[Alt][Space][N]
MAX maximizes active window (full screen).
[Alt][Space][X]
RSTR Restore the window to its former size.
[Alt][Space][R]
Find find the next child window. [Ctrl-Tab]
Enter Enter Key. [Enter]
93
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Close Close the active child window of an
active window. [Ctrl][F4]
Rstr Restore the child window to its former
size. [Alt][Space][R]
Max maximize the child window.
[Alt][Space][X]
Pg1 return to page 1.
In order to use the PPST and PPSTR
functions, you must do the following:
1. These functions work best when you have
two windows on your desktop.
2. Use the FIND button to select the second
window.
3. Verify that both windows are in sequence
by using the PREV key.
4. If both windows switch back and forth,
then this feature is available.
94
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
5. Highlight some text in Window1 and press
COPY or CUT.
6. Use PPST to paste to Window2.
7. Use PPSTR to past to Window2 and return
to Window1.
8. This feature will continue to be available,
until either Window is closed or another
window receives the input focus.
95
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Macro Panels and Keys
The purpose of the Macro Panel is to give you
the capability of defining your own buttons to
launch programs, open other Macro Panels, or
create keystroke combinations.
In OnScreen, a Macro is a sequence of
keystrokes or actions tied to a button. The
Macro is initiated by selecting the button.
The main Macro Panel provided has options
96
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
preprogrammed to show you the vast
capabilities of this panel. For more information
see the User’s Guide, or see OnScreen Setup
Help (How to create Macros).
Several Example Macro Panels have also been
provided. Macro Panels have the ability to
Auto-Open when the appropriate application
becomes the active window. The Auto-Open
feature will only operate if the Macro Panel is
open on OnScreen, and the OnScreen window
is not minimized.
97
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Calculator Panel
The calculator is a standard four function
calculator. To operate simply press the desired
number, press an operation key, press the next
number, and press an operation key or the total
(=) key. You may then send the displayed
number to the active window by pressing the
SD (Send) button. While there is a number
stored in memory, the calculator’s display
window frame will change color to indicate
98
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
that memory has a value stored.
Calculator Tape
The Tape key will allow you to run a history of
any calculations, just as on paper tape and then
you may save it as a file, print it, or import it to
another document. If you want to use the tape,
it must be activated BEFORE any operations
are performed. Click on the Tape button to
activate. You may also click on the calculator
display window to activate & deactivate the
calculator tape. The calculator tape will
automatically close if you close the Calculator
Panel on OnScreen. If necessary, you will be
asked if you wish to save any information
recorded in the Tape.
The Calculator Tape window has a drop-down
File Menu which has options to save the Tape
as file, print, or open a previously saved tape.
The drop-down Edit menu has the standard edit
functions - Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste.
99
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
Quick Help Panel
The Quick Help panel appears above the
currently displayed panels and describes each
key as it is passed over with the cursor. You
may open or close the Quick Help panel from
the OnScreen Menu or from the Help button on
the OnScreen Control Panel .
To assign the Quick Help capability to your
macros, see How to create Macros in OnScreen
Setup Help.
System Information Panel
The information panel appears below the
100
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
currently displayed panels and shows date,
time, system resources, etc. as chosen for
display in OnScreen Setup. You may rearrange
the order of the information shown by clicking
on any item. This will move that item to first
place on the left in the information panel. If
you have more than one hard-drive or a
CD-ROM drive, or if you are operating on a
Network , use the up-and-down arrows to
display the current free space of each drive.
Time & Date display depend on International
display settings set by the Windows Control
Panel.
Touch Panel
Touch Panel
The Touch Panel is an
101
Chapter 3. OnScreen Panels
multi-touch/gesture/flicks interface interaction
tool that is not enabled for OnScreen (Assistive
Technology focused version).
102
Chapter 4. OnScreen
Menu
The OnScreen Menu will give you quick
access to the most used functions of OnScreen
and Windows System Menu functions. The
default operation of the right mouse button (i.e.
second button) will open this menu when it is
clicked over the OnScreen window.
OnScreen Menu
OnScreen Menu - Basic Mode
In Basic Mode Operation, a limited menu is
available. It contains basic items from the full
menu, along with several items from the Action
panel. In Basic Mode, OnScreen will save your
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
current settings and position when closed.
OnScreen Setup
Clicking on OnScreen Setup will open
OnScreen Setup Window.
Size
Clicking on Size will open a pop-up menu. You
may select Size Up or Size Down to go up or
go down a single size. Here you can select any
of the 12 smaller sizes of OnScreen. The
current size is indicated with a check-mark.
When larger than Size 12, you may only Size
Up or Size Down.
The Screen-Edge Scroll option will have a
check mark when Enabled. When Enabled and
a portion of the OnScreen window is
off-screen, OnScreen will scroll back
on-screen when the cursor (pointer) is held at
the extreme edge of the screen. This feature
104
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
may be useful for larger sizes. NOTE: Certain
pointing devices may not react desirably when
this feature is Enabled - select the Screen-Edge
Scroll to clear the check mark and Disable this
feature.
Minimize
OnScreen will minimize to an icon (button on
the taskbar).
Note: The default minimize approach can
be changed in the Advanced mode of
operation.
Select
This will select from the current open
windows, and select the next window and
make it the current active window, and size &
arrange the window.
105
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Arrange
This will Size & Arrange the active window. If
there are child windows (windows contained
within the main window), these current child
window will be maximized.
OnScreen Help!
Clicking on OnScreen Help will open
OnScreen Help (information in this guide).
Close
Clicking on Close will close OnScreen.
OnScreen Menu - Advanced Mode
Size
Clicking on Size will open a pop-up menu. You
may select Size Up or Size Down to go up or
go down a single size. Here you can select any
of the 12 smaller sizes of OnScreen. The
current size is indicated with a check-mark.
106
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
When larger than Size 12, you may only Size
Up or Size Down.
The Screen-Edge Scroll option will have a
check mark when Enabled. When Enabled and
a portion of the OnScreen window is
off-screen, OnScreen will scroll back
on-screen when the cursor (pointer) is held at
the extreme edge of the screen. This feature
may be useful for larger sizes. NOTE: Certain
pointing devices may not react desirably when
this feature is Enabled - select the Screen-Edge
Scroll to clear the check mark and Disable this
feature.
Minimize to Icon
Minimize to Button
The check-mark indicates the way OnScreen
will be minimized, when you click on the
Minimize Button. Select which way OnScreen
will look when minimized. Note that the Icon
107
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
on Taskbar can only be selected via OnScreen
Setup. If currently at Button and Minimize to
Icon is selected, the Icon option will be used.
By clicking on either selection, OnScreen will
be minimized immediately.
OnScreen Quick Help
Clicking on OnScreen Quick Help will open
and close the Quick Help panel. The
check-mark will indicate its current status.
OnScreen Help!
Clicking on OnScreen Help will open
OnScreen Help (information in this guide).
OnScreen Tutorial
Clicking on OnScreen Tutorial will begin the
OnScreen Tutorial.
OnScreen Setup
Clicking on OnScreen Setup will open
OnScreen Setup Window.
108
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Current Settings
Note: Saving BOTH the Settings and
Position is required for returning to the
current layout when closing & restarting
OnScreen. Refer to the Developer’s Kit
notes for other configuration options,
saving, restoring, etc. Settings refers to
the current panels shown, and the current
size (the current, visible layout). Clicking
on Current Settings will open a pop-up
menu. Here you can select Save Current
Settings, or Restore Settings.
Save Current Settings: This will save
OnScreen as it appears. OnScreen will always
open with this saved configuration.
Restore Settings: If you have changed
OnScreen and want to return to the saved
configuration, select Restore Settings.
109
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Panels: Clicking on Panels will open a
pop-up menu. This allows you to open and
close individual panels. When the panel is
already opened, a check mark will be next to
the Panel. If the panel is opened, and you select
the panel from the menu, it will close the
panel. If you select a closed panel from the
menu, it will open the panel. From this menu,
you may not close a panel if there is only one
panel opened.
Position
Clicking on Position will open a pop-up menu.
Here you can select Save Position, or Restore
Position.
Save Position: This will save OnScreen’s
current screen position.
Restore Position: If you have moved
OnScreen and want to return to the saved
position, select Restore Position.
110
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Set Position: Clicking on Set Position will
open a pop-up menu. From this menu you may
select a screen position for OnScreen from the
options available.
Close
Clicking on Close will close OnScreen.
Advanced Features
Selecting Advanced Features will open a
pop-up menu. Here you can access some
special features.
Transparency
Clicking on Transparency... will open a
Transparency control window, allowing you to
Enable or Disable this feature. When Enabled,
you can set the current Transparency level by
sliding the control - to the left is more
transparent, to the right is less transparent (or
opaque). The current Transparency level is
111
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
used if OnScreen is closed and then re-opened.
Transparency Notes: When
Transparency is Enabled, the window
interface to Windows changes (Layered
Windows), and the following are known
issues:
• The Magnifier panel can now magnify
images under the OnScreen window
itself, providing a more intuitive
operation.
• When operating with CrossScanner,
CrossScanner’s IconWindow will be
displayed below OnScreen. It is strongly
recommended that Transparency not be
enabled if using CrossScanner.
Manual Tool Bar Control
112
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Clicking on Manual Tool Bar Control will
Enable or Disable this capability - when
checked, you can click 3 times on a blank
(non-key) area or border, and toggle the Tool
bar Panel - if open, it will close, and if closed it
will open. For further info, see notes in
OnScreen Setup | Panels.
Tablet PC Input Panel
Note: Windows XP Tablet PC Versions
Only - this interface is not available in
Windows Vista / 7.
When operating on the Tablet PC, OnScreen
can replace the Tablet PC Input Panel. Clicking
on Tablet PC Input Panel will Enable or
Disable this capability. When enabled, clicking
on the "Tablet PC Input Panel" on the task bar
will toggle the visibility of OnScreen. When
113
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
enabled, the OnScreen Tablet PC Interface will
be running, and will be in the StartUp group.
Note: You must be an Administrator to
fully disable the OnScreen Tablet PC
Interface (or have sufficient rights to
remove the All Users | StartUp group
shortcut). When Enabled, Exit or Close
from the Menu will only hide OnScreen
and OnScreen will not exit with the
Developer’s Kit CloseMTS. To fully close
OnScreen, first disable the Tablet PC Input
Panel option on the Advanced Features
Menu, then select Close from the
OnScreen menu. For additional
information, refer to the PanelWatch in
Advanced User Notes.
Touch Panel
Clicking on the Touch Panel menu option will
114
Chapter 4. OnScreen Menu
Enable or Disable the Touch Panel. The Touch
Panel allows options to toggle touch modes
(Multi-Touch / Gestures / Flicks), change
themes, and control the visibility of OnScreen.
Change Theme
Clicking on the Change Theme menu option
triggers a theme change event, which will
update the current theme to the next available
theme (based on the ThemeList).
115
Chapter 5. OnScreen
Setup
OnScreen Setup - Overview
OnScreen Setup provides an easy interface to
change options, settings, and the configuration
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
for OnScreen.
Advanced Notes: The files
KEYBOARD.KBF and ONSCREEN.INI
contain all of the configuration information
for OnScreen. There can also be
Keyboard Macro files for customized
Macro panels (e.g. MAC?????.KMF) and
WordList files. All of these files are stored
in a location determined by the ConfigPath
entry in the ONSCREEN.INI file. (Refer to
the ConfigPath entry in the Initialization file
for additional information.) This location
determines if the files are per user or
shared, and the required permissions for
normal operation. By default, these files
are personalized for each user, and the
specific location can be referenced from
the File menu in OnScreen Setup. You
may also access the Windows Control
Panel from the File menu.
117
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
In the File menu, you can access Windows
Control Panel, view the current folder location
of the configuration files, Import/Export setting
files, and Exit.
•
Run Control Panel - This opens the
Windows Control Panel to access system
level properties like Appearance, and
available Keyboard Layouts. For most users,
the Windows Control Panel not required - it
is provided here as a convenience.
•
Show Config File Location - This displays
the actual path to the OnScreen
configuration files for the current user. Refer
to the ConfigPath entry in the Initialization
file for additional information.
•
Export Current User Configuration When selected, and the operation confirmed,
this will save and compress the current
user’s configuration files and place a
118
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
OnScreen_Settings.zip file on the Desktop.
This file can be saved as a backup, or moved
to another system to transfer the
configuration from one system to another. If
multiple exports are done, each file name
will change by adding a "+" symbol to the
export file name.
•
Import Configuration - This will open a
File Selection window to select a
"???_Settings.zip". If selected, and the
operation confirmed, the current user’s
existing settings will be overwritten and be
replaced with the settings contained within
the selected file. For best results, use settings
files from the same product & version, and
perform this operation from OnScreen Setup
while OnScreen is closed
•
Exit - this will Close and Exit OnScreen
Setup.
In the Options menu, each major Setup section
119
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
can be accessed, along with Save options when
running OnScreen.
When OnScreen is running and OnScreen
Setup is opened, the setting Save Settings on
Exit is checked "On" by default. This
synchronizes OnScreen with the changes made
in Setup and OnScreen. If this option is
checked "Off" and OnScreen is running while
changing settings, the settings will be saved as
normal upon an "OK", but these changes will
not be reflected in OnScreen until it is
restarted.
•
Save After Move - the current settings and
position are saved after the completion of a
move. This can be useful to always preserve
the current position while operating
OnScreen.
•
Save After Change - this saves the settings
and position after a size or panel change.
120
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This can be helpful in preserving the current
configuration.
•
Save At Close - the configuration and
position will be saved when OnScreen is
closed. This ensures that OnScreen will
always open in the last used configuration.
•
Save At End Session - if Windows is
shut-down or the user logs off, the current
settings and position will be saved.
Access to Help and the Help Index (i.e. access
to this guide) are available from the Help
Menu.
You may also Check for Updates... from the
Help Menu in OnScreen Setup.
About OnScreen... in the Help Menu provides
version and release information about
OnScreen.
121
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
User Options
Click on the User Options Button.
122
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
OnScreen lets you set operational preferences
within User Options
OnScreen WordComplete
WordComplete Active
WordComplete is an adaptive word-prediction /
completion method that allows much faster
typing by automatically offering the most
likely word candidates as words are being
typed.
By selecting WordComplete Active with the
Check-Button, you open the WordComplete
Panel, and you activate its operation within
OnScreen. When Active, Suffixes, Automatic
spaces & Capitals, Automatic U after Q,
Automatic I Capitalization, and Edit Word
Lists Button become available.
Note: If OnScreen is configured to a size
larger than 12, and WordComplete Active
123
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
will be disabled. You must run OnScreen,
resize down to size 12, then return to User
Options to access this option. Once
changed, you can resize OnScreen up to
the desired size.
Suffixes
By selecting Suffixes with the Check-Button
you enable the suffix portion within
WordComplete. Upon a word’s completion,
you are presented with a selection of suffixes
that can be used to complete the word. Suffixes
may also be selected anytime during the entry
of a word. The most common suffixes are
included, and may be modified if necessary
(See Advanced User Notes for further
information).
Automatic spaces & Capitals
When selected, this option will automatically
124
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
add a space after any word completion or
suffix, and add 2 spaces after any punctuation
character. As an added convenience, after a
punctuation character, the Caps Lock will
engage for 1 character to allow for automatic
capitalization of the next work (first word of
new sentence). (See Advanced User Notes for
additional features).
Automatic U after Q
This is a useful option when using
WordComplete and OnScreen. When On, the
character "u" is automatically sent whenever a
"q" is typed.
Automatic I Capitalization
If this option is On, the single letter "i"
followed by a space will automatically
generate a capital I followed by a space (2
backspaces, "I", then space).
LetterAssist
125
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
When LetterAssist is enabled (checked "On"),
it coordinates the available keys on the
keyboard panel with the WordComplete
candidates. This provides immediate feedback
via the keyboard panel on which letters are
valid based on the available words in the
current word list. For example, if you had a
very small word list of able, apple, and
available, after you type the letter "a", the only
letters indicated as valid on the keyboard panel
would be the "b", "p", or "v".
Show Key (Grayed)
This is only available when LetterAssist is
enabled. When checked "On" this shows the
valid keys (i.e. letters that will build a valid
word in the current word list) as normal, and
invalid keys (i.e. letters that will NOT build a
valid word in the current word list) as grayed
(dimmed). If this is cleared (checked "Off"),
the invalid keys will not be displayed at all.
126
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This mode prevents inadvertent entry by
preventing key presses on keys that will not
build a valid word.
Allow Grayed Key
When LetterAssist and Show Key (Grayed) are
both checked "On", this option is available.
When enabled, it allows typing from grayed
keys, and the building of words, even if the
word is not in the current word list. This allows
full keyboard operation, with the grayed keys
being a quick visual indicator for the next
letters that will build words from the current
word list.
WC-Assist (Select WC by #)
When WC-Assist is enabled (checked "On"), it
provides a shortcut to the WordComplete
candidates by replacing the number keys in the
top row of the keyboard panel with 2 sets of
keys numbered 1 through 5 (which correspond
127
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
to the WordComplete candidates (also
numbered 1-5 on the WordComplete panel).
This feature allows quick selection of
WordComplete candidates without moving off
the keyboard panel to the WordComplete
panel. For users that have some difficulty
positioning the mouse pointer, or when moving
the pointer requires discrete actions, or when
moving the pointer is relatively slow, this
shortcut to the WordComplete panel can be
extremely helpful. When numbers are required,
the Buffer key on the WordComplete panel can
be pressed to clear this mode, and return the
number keys to their normal operation. When
WC-Assist is enabled and active, the # symbol
is shown on the Buffer key, numbers are shown
on the WordComplete keys, and the number
keys on the Keyboard panel are taken over and
colored the same as the WordComplete keys.
When inactive, operation is normal, and there
is no visual indication. The Buffer key toggles
128
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
whether WC-Assist is active or inactive. When
WC-Assist is disabled (checked "Off"), the
Buffer key will not toggle these 2 modes.
Note: There is also an advanced option to
replace the function keys with number
keys when WC-assist is active. Refer to
the KeysOnlyAssistNumbers setting in the
Initialization File Documentation.
Edit Word Lists Button
Opens the Edit Word Lists Dialog box that
allows you to manually edit, delete, or add to
the Word Lists used within WordComplete.
There is an advanced option that allows you to
select existing documents, text files, and other
files to build word lists & update frequencies.
OnScreen Operation
Basic (Standard)
129
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
The Basic Mode of operation provides basic
options for using OnScreen and will be
sufficient for most users.
Advanced
The Advanced Mode of operation provides
additional features & options within all aspects
of OnScreen. Macro Panels & Windows
Control Panels give sophisticated users more
control of Operation within Windows.
OnScreen Action Panel
This Check-Button only becomes available if
you have cleared the WordComplete Active
Check-Button. (The WordComplete panel
includes the Action Panel). If enabled the
left-most panel of OnScreen is displayed as the
Action Panel which contains the Close, Setup,
Select, Move, and Size buttons.
Buttons Enabled:
130
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
A check mark in these boxes indicates that the
corresponding button is Enabled - clear the box
to Disable the button. If you wish to prevent
certain actions you can disable the button (for
example, you do not wish to "Move"
OnScreen, or you do not want to "Arrange" the
window for typing).
These buttons offer the following short-cuts:
Back - Shortcut to the Backspace key. Erases
the last character typed & back-spaces.
Size - Cycles OnScreen through 3 of the most
popular sizes & auto-arranges OnScreen and
the typing window.
Select - Selects the Active
ApplicationActive_Application, i.e. the
Window where OnScreen will type
Move - Moves OnScreen to the Top or the
Bottom of the display, and resizes the Active
Application.
131
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Arrange - Sizes (Arranges) the Active
Application so that it will fill the display area
not used by OnScreen.
Enable Keyboard Scanning
When checked "On", this enables panel and
key scanning (based on the Keyboard Scanning
Settings). The primary usage of keyboard
scanning is to enable a user that can only use a
switch (or single mouse button) to completely
operate all of OnScreen. The scanning
implementation within OnScreen uses a
transparent overlay to identify the scan area.
There are 3 scanning levels - Panels (the
individual components of the entire OnScreen
display), and then groups of keys on the
selected panel (rows / columns), and finally the
individual keys in the selected group.
Keyboard Scanning Settings
This is available when Enable Keyboard
132
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Scanning is checked "On". This button opens
the Keyboard Scanning Settings Dialog box
that provides both basic and advanced options
for controlling the way the keyboard scanning
operates. It includes basic options like scan
delay (speed of scanning), overlay display
(transparency & color), and selection of panels
to scan. Advanced options allow various
changes to the operation, grouping and
scanning order, and options for a second button
(right mouse button).
Operation Options
This will open the Operation Options dialog
allowing you to set your preferences while
using OnScreen. These include Auto-Arrange
Windows, Reacting to Dialogs and other
Windows, Typematic operation, Single
Keystroke per Click, Virtual Pointer, Action
Button Move, and Key Border.
133
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Edit Word Lists
You may select which Word List you wish to
edit by double-clicking or highlighting &
pressing Enter while on the appropriate list
displayed in the list box selections on the left.
The words are displayed to the right and may
be modified, deleted, or added. When
complete, select OK , or select another Word
List to edit. You will be asked to verify saving
changes if any modifications are made.
134
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Note: You can also add shorthand
(abbreviation) expressions to the
dictionary. Use the following format:
abr==Expansion - where "abr" is an
abbreviation (up to 3 characters) and the
"Expansion" is what you want to be
entered when the abbreviation is typed
and selected (can be a single word or a
phrase).
To create an abbreviation / expansion
entry, click on the word list to edit, and add
a new line, enter the abbreviation, then the
double equal (==), followed by the
expansion. Finally, make sure to end with
a space after the final character and enter
a frequency. For example, "fe==for
example 5"
After you add the properly formed
abbreviation and expansion to the
dictionary, once you start typing the
abbreviation will appear in the word list
candidates based on the frequency &
135
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
letters typed. Note only the abbreviation is
shown, not the expansion.
Note: Full sentences can also be added to
the word lists (word with spaces). The only
formatting requirement is that the after the
final word, there is a space, followed by a
frequency (number).
Formatting Notes
For proper operation of WordComplete, there
are several items to be aware of if you choose
to Edit Words manually.
1) Each word must be separated from the
others by a hard-carriage return. Each word /
frequency combination must be on its own line.
Do not leave extra lines between words.
136
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
2) Spaces are now allowed on the line, so
sentences can be used. The space character
must be used to separate the word from its
frequency count, and the frequency count must
be the last entry on the line (before the carriage
return). The maximum frequency is 32000 - do
not use higher values, do not use commas
within the frequency count.
3) Files over 65000 characters will require
using WordPad (or another text editor). You
must be sure to save the files as Text Only files.
The file type must be ANSI, not UNICODE.
Advanced
When clicked on, the Advanced button opens
up the Word List Assistant which contains
several features for maintaining & working
with word lists.
• Building word lists from existing
137
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
documents & files
• Selecting alternate word lists
Word List Assistant
What is Word List Assistant?
OnScreen uses multiple sorted text files with
frequency counts to identify word completion
candidates. Since different users require
different types of words, the ability to modify
& optimize the word lists to match a specific
user is desirable. The Word List Assistant
provides various options to help manage
multiple Word Lists.
Word List Assistant has the following
features and capabilities:
138
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
Always saves the current Word List used by
OnScreen by compressing all files into a
single, compressed file (using the widely
available Zip format)
•
Make any available or newly downloaded
Word List the current Word List by
extracting from the compressed file into the
location required for OnScreen
•
Read existing Document, Text, HTML files
(or of any file type) to count word frequency
and add new words
•
Remove words from the candidate list so
they will not be added into the users Current
Word List
•
View a Word List
•
Rename or Copy a Word List
•
Create New Word Lists - an empty list, or
with words from existing files
139
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
Merge a Word List with the current Word
List
•
Delete Word Lists
How do I work with Word List Assistant?
When the Word List Assistant is run, you have
4 main options:
•
Manage Word Lists (details below)
140
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
Add Words from file(s) to Current Word List
(details below)
•
Help for Word List Assistant (this document)
•
Exit (closes Word List Assistant)
Manage Word Lists
When selected, this option will compress the
current Word List (it does not delete the current
Word List files) and automatically names the
list (WL_[Date]-[am/pm][Time]).
141
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
If you select one of the available Word Lists,
the list will be opened for viewing.
Hints: Your current Word List will ALWAYS
be saved when you enter Manage Word
Lists. If the Word List Assistant is used
often, this will create many word list files however, it is easy to select many files
(click & drag), then use the Delete
Selected option to clear out any unwanted
word list files. This automatic approach
preserves word lists as snapshots in time,
which may be useful if manipulating word
lists using the Word List Assistant.
All Word Lists managed with this tool will
be prefixed with Word List prefix (WL_) you do not need to enter it.
Note: The Word Lists are text files with 3
header lines followed by a word (or words
142
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
with spaces), a space character, and then
a frequency count, completed with a
carriage return/line feed character
combination. It is recommended to let this
tool & OnScreen manage these word lists
for you. If you wish to work with these lists
directly, you are welcome to, but please be
completely familiar with the structure of
the existing files prior to modifying them.
OnScreen has various checkpoints to
handle ill-formed lists, but there is no
support for OnScreen operational issues if
you modify lists directly.
The internal logic starts at the end of the
line and finds the first space character
(from the end), then uses the resultant text
between this spot and the end-of-the-line
to establish the frequency value of the
entry. All text from the beginning of the line
to this "last-most" space is used as the
word list candidate. Commas are not
allowed in the word lists, as this is the
separator used to identify individual word
143
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
list candidates.
The Word List files are stored in a
WordLists folder underneath the current
user’s configuration location. To reference
the current location, see OnScreen Setup |
File | Show Config File Location. Refer to
the ConfigPath in the Initialization file for
further details.
View Word List
You can double-click on a word list to view, or
select a word list, and click on this button.
When viewing a word list from the Word List
Assistant, you can sort the list alphabetically,
by frequency (either ascending or descending).
When frequency sorted, the list shows the
internal representation (numbers) used to
properly sort the list.
144
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Create New Wordlist
You can create an empty word list, or create a
new wordlist from existing files. You will be
asked to name the word list. Simply enter the
new name (the WL_ prefix and .ZIP extension
will be automatically entered). If you select the
"from Files" option, you can then select one or
more files to use. Depending on your situation,
it may be easier to manage many word list files
separately, and then merge them to make a final
version. Once you are happy with your current
145
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
word list, you can return to the Word List
Assistant, select your most recent word list,
and rename (or copy) it to a newly named word
list.
Copy Word List
You can copy an existing word list to a
different word list. Simply enter the new name
(the WL_ prefix and .ZIP extension will be
automatically entered).
146
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Rename Word List
You can rename an existing word list. Enter the
new name (the WL_ prefix and .ZIP extension
will be automatically entered).
Delete Selected
You can remove (permanently delete!) existing
word lists or multiple word lists by
highlighting one or many, and click on Delete
Selected. IMPORTANT: This will destroy the
word list files if you confirm the deletion!
147
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Merge Word List into Current
This merges a selected word list into the
current word list. You have the option of
deleting any words that are not desired or are
inappropriate by highlighting one or many
words, and clicking on Delete Selected. Once
you are satisfied with the list, click on OK to
Add these words to the current word list.
Make Word List Current
148
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This makes the selected word list the current
word list used by OnScreen. IMPORTANT:
This will overwrite your current word list!
Also note that the Word List Assistant
ALWAYS saves your current word list (as
indicated above).
Add Words from file(s) to Current Word
List
•
Select a File, or Files, or All Files in a Folder
•
Process the words - note that large files may
take some time...
•
Review the new additions to delete any
words you do not wish to add - you may sort
149
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Alphabetically, or by Frequency (both
Ascending and Descending).
Hints: To easily add a small number of
words, use the Edit Word lists option
directly from OnScreen Setup - the
Advanced nature of the Word List
Assistant means it doesn’t duplicate this
basic functionality.
To easily add a specific set of words, enter
the words into Notepad, and save the file
(default type as Text file), then open the
file and process it with this option.
If you wish to edit specific words, add them
and then return to the Edit Words dialog.
If you need more flexibility or more control,
you may also use Notepad to edit the word
lists directly (they are saved as Text files).
It is extremely likely that various character
sequences and non-words will be added
to the list - Always review the list to delete
150
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
items that you do not want in your word
lists.
If you get a large amount of undesirable
character sequences, try converting the
file (File | Save As) to a different file type
from the source.
Operation Notes
For backwards compatibility, files must be
ANSI (rather than Unicode).
A fair amount of error checking is handled
within the Word List Assistant, but every last
possibility has not been addressed. This tool is
meant to bring in basic documents and add the
words that a particular user works with most
often. If you experience operational errors,
reduce the number of files you are processing,
increase system memory, or review the
documents directly. If you have problems with
151
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
a particular file type, you may want to convert
the file into a different format and try again.
Words are built from the alphabet, and
international characters above 128 (ANSI - see
Character Map). All punctuation, brackets,
parentheses, and the space character, are
treated as non-word characters, and end the
current word (except the backslash \ and
single-quote ’).
Advanced Notes: The 2 folders that Word
List Assistant works with are the
configuration files folder (where the current
Word List files are located), and the
WordLists sub-folder (where compressed
Word Lists are stored, and where
temporary Word List files are created (e.g.
A.TXT, B.TXT, etc.)). When Managing
Word Lists within the Word List Assistant,
it is important to realize the "Current" word
list is never touched or modified, unless
152
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
one of the options to modify it is selected
(Add Words from Files to Current Word
List, Manage Word Lists | Merge Word List
with Current, and Manage Word Lists |
Make Selected Word List Current).
Although saving the current word list every
time the Manage Word List option is
selected may seem excessive, it
guarantees that Word Lists will not be lost,
especially when people new to the Word
List Assistant start trying the various
options. Since these files may be deleted
from with the Manage Word List option,
and users familiar with the Word List
Assistant will not be constantly creating
new backups by going into the Manage
Word List option, this seemed the
appropriate solution, and is less confusing
than the approach tried in the previous
Word List Assistant (where the user was
asked to name the current backup).
153
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Copyright & License Information
The ZIP32.DLL/UNZIP32S.DLL file used to
extract the Zip file was not developed by
Innovation Management Group, Inc. The
following copyright & license information is
included here as required.
===================================
This is version 2000-Apr-09 of the Info-ZIP
copyright and license.
The definitive version of this document should
be available at
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html
indefinitely.
Copyright (c) 1990-2000 Info-ZIP. All rights
reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Info-ZIP" is defined as the following set of
individuals:
154
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald
Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly,
Hunter Goatley, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,
Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, Robert Heath,
Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David
Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van der
Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George Petrov,
Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve
Salisbury, Dave Smith, Christian Spieler,
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich
Wales, Mike White
This software is provided "as is," without
warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no
event shall Info-ZIP or its contributors be held
liable for any direct, indirect, incidental,
special or consequential damages arising out of
the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including
155
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
commercial applications, and to alter it and
redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, definition,
disclaimer, and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
definition, disclaimer, and this list of
conditions in documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. Altered versions--including, but not limited
to, ports to new operating systems, existing
ports with new graphical interfaces, and
dynamic, shared, or static library
versions--must be plainly marked as such and
must not be misrepresented as being the
original source. Such altered versions also
must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP
releases--including, but not limited to, labeling
156
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
of the altered versions with the names
"Info-ZIP" (or any variation thereof, including,
but not limited to, different capitalizations),
"Pocket UnZip," "WiZ" or "MacZip" without
the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or
Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the Info-ZIP
URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names
"Info-ZIP," "Zip," "UnZip," "WiZ," "Pocket
UnZip," "Pocket Zip," and "MacZip" for its
own source and binary releases.
Except where otherwise noted Copyright ©
1993-2013 Innovation Management Group,
Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Keyboard Scanning
157
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Settings
The scanning capabilities of OnScreen provide
a single-click option to access all panels and
keys. To address different user capabilities,
these settings provide both basic and advanced
options. In most cases, the Scan Delay setting
(which controls the scanning step speed) will
be sufficient for basic users. If a second button
is available (e.g. the Right-Click), there are
158
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
several options available to control scanning
actions when the right-click button is pressed.
The Scan Overlay display controls the basic
color (color inverted, black, or white) and the
transparency level.
OnScreen uses a "Ready to Scan!" image of a
hand over a large red switch to indicate
scanning is enabled and ready to start. The first
switch hit (mouse click) will begin the scan
process. The Ready to Scan image always
overlays the first panel to be scanned.
As an aid to trainers, there is a physical
keyboard based shortcut Alt-X that will toggle
scanning (when scanning is already enabled in
OnScreen Setup). This can be convenient to
use to cancel scans to adjust scanning settings
(during scans the mouse cursor gets locked into
the area being scanned). For users that need
more control while scanning, the Right Click
Mode of "Up one Scanning level" is the best
159
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
option, since scans & scanning can be backed
out by right-clicking.
The scanning implementation within OnScreen
uses a transparent overlay window to identify
the scan area. There are 3 scanning levels
(where the term level refers to the particular
scanning mode). Panels are scanned, and once
a panel is selected, the next level is a panel
scan, which scans groups of keys (typically
ordered as rows or columns). When this scan
group is selected, the lowest level scans the
individual keys in the group. These 3 levels are:
•
Panels Scan
•
Panel Scan (Rows or Columns)
•
Key scan (individual row or column scan
key by key)
The Panels Scan goes panel by panel as
determined in the Panels to Scan section. The
160
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
scan order is determined by the order of the
panels in this list. If a Panel is to be scanned,
but it is closed, it is skipped. If all Panels to
Scan panels are closed, scanning will be
stopped.
The Panel scan (by rows or columns) scan is
determined by settings in the OnScreen
Initialization file. In most cases, this uses a top
to bottom row scan, with some modification
based on the panel itself. For the
WordComplete panel, a column scan is used,
as this is more effective for accessing the
WordComplete candidates. See Advanced
Notes below and the Initialization File
Documentation for further details on
modifying the panel scan.
The Key scan (or individual row or column
scan) goes key by key in the order
predetermined in the OnScreen Initialization
file. The design is extremely flexible, and final
161
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
key scans can be in any order (i.e. left to
right/right to left/top to bottom/bottom to top,
or even can be alternated from outside to the
middle).
162
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Advanced Notes: The Panels to Scan
determine which panels will be scanned,
and can be set in any order by
manipulating the available panels and the
Panel to Scan in the list boxes. Each Panel
scan is determined by settings in the
Initialization file, and uses a list of
individual keys, separated by commas,
grouped by semi-colons. These settings
determine the groupings of keys that
define a row (or column). Once a Panel
scan is selected, the lowest level Key scan
is determined by the order of keys listed in
the key grouping. For example, a 1,2,3;
will group keys 1-3, and key scan left to
right. A 3,2,1; entry will panel scan the
same group, but key scan right to left. For
Text-To-Speech announcements, a word
or phrase in square brackets can be
inserted prior to the key listing. For
example, instead of 1,2,3; you can list
[First Row]1,2,3; and "First Row" will be
announced when Text-To-Speech is
163
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
enabled in Sounds. For more details, refer
to the panel scan settings in the
Initialization File Documentation.
Scan Operation Settings
Scan Delay
The Scan Delay determines the amount of time
between each "Scan Event" - panels, panel
scan (row/columns), and key scans. You can
use the scroll button to select between 0.05
seconds and 5 seconds. The scan delay time is
displayed to the right of the scroll bar. If Step
Scan is selected in the Right Click Mode, then
this setting turns into a Timeout After setting,
and the time is used as a delay period - if
nothing happens in the delay period, then the
scan reverts up one level.
Maximum Scans at current level
164
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
You can select No Maximum or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or
6 scans. When No Maximum is selected, each
scan level will continue until a left-click goes
to the next level (or selects the key), or a
right-click changes the scan level or stops the
scanning. If a number of scans is selected, the
current scan level will continue for that number
of scans, and then the scan level will revert up
to the previous level. If the Panels scan reaches
the maximum scans, the scanning will stop
(leaving the transparent overlay on top of a
panel - to restart scanning, left-click on the
scan overlay). Note that "No Maximum" is not
allowed when there is no Right-Click option
available.
Next Scan
(the * indicates this option is only
shown/available when Show All Options is On)
After a scan is completed (i.e. a key is selected
during a key scan), the default action is to
165
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
return up one level, and continue scanning the
same panel - this is the normal action "Normal (Continue on Panel)". If the key scan
option is selected ("Re-Scan Current Keys"),
the same group of keys will be scanned again
after a key selection. The panel scan option
("Scan Current Panel") has a different internal
setting, but is effectively the same as the
normal action - continue scanning the same
panel. The final option "Scan All Panels" will
return to the top level, or Panels scan after a
key is selected by the left-click, and show the
"Ready to Scan!" image.
•
"Standard (Continue on Panel)" - this
continues scanning the current panel just
scanned. For typing, this mode works best,
since the user can focus on the keyboard
panel while selecting letters. This also works
best when the Right Click Mode (see below)
is set to "Up one scanning level"
166
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
"Re-Scan Current Keys (*)" - this continues
scanning the same row (or column) just
scanned. This is only shown when "Show
All Options" is On.
•
"Scan Current Panel (*)" - this continues
scanning the same panel just scanned. This is
only shown when "Show All Options" is On.
•
"Scan All Panels" - this resets the scan and
shows the "Ready to Scan!" image after a
completed scan.
Right Click (second button) Mode
(the * indicates this option is only
shown/available when Show All Options is On)
If there is no right-click available, or the user
cannot effectively use a second button
(right-click), the not available option is
recommended ("None (no Right-Click
available)"). This forces the "Maximum Scans"
setting to 2 scans if set at No Maximum - No
167
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Maximum is not an allowable setting when the
right-click setting is set to None (otherwise a
complete scan would be required during every
scan, which could be problematic in various
situations). Detailed notes on each Right-Click
setting are outlined below.
•
"None (no Right-Click available)" - the
right-click is not used and it is ignored for
scanning operations
•
"Scan All Panels (top level) (*)" - a
right-click resets the current scan level to the
top level (or Panels scan) This is only shown
when "Show All Options" is On.
•
"Up one scanning level (*)" - this is the
default setting, and it reverts the current scan
up one level. A right-click while at the
Panels scan stops the scan process, leaving a
transparent overlay over one panel (left-click
to restart scanning). While stopped, another
168
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
right-click will clear the panel off of
OnScreen entirely - see "Accessing
OnScreen during a paused scan" below. This
is only shown when "Show All Options" is
On.
•
"Pause Scanning (*)" - this will immediately
stop (or pause) the scanning at the current
level (left-click to restart scanning) This is
only shown when "Show All Options" is On.
•
"Step Scan" - The step scan option provides
a controlled scan, using the right-click as an
advance (rather than a time based approach
(e.g. Scan Speed)). This option creates
several interface setting changes, and the
scan operation itself requires 2 buttons to
scan - right-click advances, left-click selects.
To reset or cancel this mode, a Timeout
After setting appears where the Scan Speed
setting was (and is set to 3 times the current
scan speed), and the physical keyboard is
169
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
monitored for a Ctrl-Alt combination
keypress. The timeout timer always starts
after any left or right-click. If the timeout
period expires, the scan will revert up one
level (see "Up one scanning level" above).
Once at the Panels scan, after the timeout
after period expires, the scan overlay will
disappear - right-click anywhere on
OnScreen to restart. (Note this effectively
bypasses any other right-click setting in
Mouse Buttons when in the step scan mode)
This also enables a physical keyboard
monitor, so when the Control Key and the
Alt key are pressed simultaneously, the scan
mode will end & the scan overlay will
disappear - right-click anywhere on
OnScreen to restart. When this mode is
selected, the "Maximum Scans at current
level" is automatically set to No Maximum.
•
"Abort Current Scan" - a right-click will
170
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
abort (or cancel) the current scan, and reset
based on the Next Scan setting. If at the top
level Panels scan, a right-click will stop (or
pause) scanning. In other words, this acts as
if the scan was completed & resets based on
the Next Scan setting, as if a final key press
occurred (e.g. the scan resulted in key
selection).
•
"Exit Scan Mode" - in this mode, a
right-click will disable scanning entirely (to
re-enable, you must return to User Options
in OnScreen Setup)
•
"Acts like a Left-Click" - in this mode, a
right-click will act exactly the same as the
left click - selecting the current highlighted
item
Accessing OnScreen during a paused
scan: When at a stopped (paused) scan
for "Up one Scanning level" or "Pause
171
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Scanning", and additional right-click will
move the scanning overlay off of
OnScreen, and place it above or below
OnScreen (based on current screen
position). This will display a message "Left
Click Here to Start Scanning", and change
the transparency to mostly opaque. When
clicked on, normal scanning will occur (the
same as a left-click during a paused scan,
i.e. when the overlay is over OnScreen). If
OnScreen is moved, the overlay will reset
& display over OnScreen Use a Left-click
or Right-click to reset as desired.
Operation Notes: The final selection of a
key during the Key scan sends a mouse
button down/up event message from the
scanning window to OnScreen. This is
based on the cursor position (which is
towards the bottom right of the scan area).
Therefore, it is important that the Key
172
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Border option in Operation Options be set
at 0 when keyboard scanning is used,
otherwise it may conflict with the valid area
a mouse click is accepted within
OnScreen.
On the toolbar, the 3 buttons are grouped
in 2 sets of 2 buttons (with the menu
button being shared), so there is a visual
action during the Panel Scan. In use, the
menu button results in a menu being
shown, which cannot be scanned by the
user, and the minimize button minimizes
OnScreen, disabling the scan entirely, so
neither of these buttons is a good choice
for the scanning user. Therefore, if
scanned and selected, the menu and
minimize buttons resets the scan to the
top level.
If the scan is stopped, the scan overlay will
be hidden during OnScreen move,
resizing, or reconfiguring. If OnScreen is
minimized, scanning is stopped. When
173
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
OnScreen is opened from a minimized
state, if scanning is enabled, it will
automatically be started once OnScreen is
displayed in its opened state.
Scan Open Panels (Left to Right)
When this option is set On, scanning will
always use a left-to-right approach, and will
scan all open panels. To customize the panels
and/or order, you must clear this option, and
use the "Panels to Scan" list below. This setting
also has a subtle operational approach
difference - when Scan Open Panels set On,
and scanning is enabled, when OnScreen is
started (with keyboard scanning enabled), the
scanning will be in a stopped mode, waiting for
a switch hit (mouse-click) to begin. If Scan
Open Panels is NOT selected, and OnScreen
starts, scanning will automatically start.
174
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Show All Options (*)
This affects the 2 drop down lists "Next Scan"
and "Right Click (2nd button) Mode". When
Show All Options is On, additional items are
added to the lists of available options. When
Show All Options is cleared, the most common
options are shown. Note the order of items also
changes when Show All Options is On.
Panels to Scan
Panels to Scan (as listed)
The Panels to Scan shows the panels to scan (in
the order listed). To remove a panel,
double-click or highlight and press the Space
bar. By removing and adding panels, and order
of Panels to scan can be selected. The final list
will indicate the panels and the order that they
will be scanned, during the top level Panels
scan.
Panels Available
175
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
The Panels Available show the panels that will
NOT be scanned. Double-click or highlight
and press the Space bar to select the panel, and
place it at the bottom of the list in Panels to
Scan.
Scan Overlay Display
Overlay (overlay color)
The scan overlay uses a transparent overlay
that outlines (or highlights / indicates) the scan
area. You can select this color by selecting the
Invert, Black, or White options. The Invert
option (default) uses an opaque window
(Transparency automatically set at 100%), and
inverts the current OnScreen display using
built-in display options to invert the current
display colors (this is useful for high-contrast
viewing). When Black or White is selected, the
transparency is set at a much lower level to
make a translucent overlay. For Black or
White, a fairly low transparency level is
176
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
recommended (note a completely opaque
overlay prevents viewing the keys, so some
level of transparency below 100% must be
selected for effective scanning). Whenever one
of these overlay options is selected, the
transparency level is automatically selected for
the current selection to a recommended setting.
After selection, you may change the
transparency level to your desired level.
Note: When Invert is selected as the
overlay option, you will obtain different
results for the scanning overlay based on
the current selected colors & display
options. See Colors for OnScreen display
options.
Note: When Invert is selected as the
overlay option, be sure to disable the
"Highlight Key under pointer" option in the
177
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Enhance display options, otherwise key
scans will be inverted twice, and the Key
scan will not be effective.
Transparency
The Transparency level (%) determines the
transparency of the overlay that outlines (or
indicates) the current scanning area. It is
recommended 25% to 50% range be used for
black or white, and for invert this option is
disabled. If the transparency level is set too
low, the scanning area may not be easily
discernible, and if the transparency level is too
high for the black and white options, the
opaqueness will prevent seeing the underlying
keys/scan area. Note the connection between
this setting and the overlay technically means
this is an opaqueness setting, but transparency
is a better understood term.
178
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Basic Appearance
Click on the Appearance Button
OnScreen Keyboard Display
Size Button
179
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This will open a Size Selection Dialog Box
which enables you to select one of the 12 base
sizes, along with OverSize options.
Show / Hide Keys Button
This opens OnScreen in a special mode that
allows keys on the main keyboard panel to be
hidden. To hide a key, click on the key OnScreen will be repainted without the key
just selected. To re-display a hidden key, click
on the space where the key normally would
appear, and the key will be shown again. To
Save the current setting, click on OK. Select
CANCEL to ignore any changes. Select Reset
to Show All Keys on OnScreen.
Cursor
Select either Right-Hand Cursor or Left-Hand
Cursor to alter which cursor is displayed over
OnScreen, and used to select keys & buttons on
OnScreen.
180
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Colors Button
This opens a selection Dialog Box that allows
you to choose the colors to be displayed on the
OnScreen Keyboard panel. For more advanced
color selection options, Advanced Mode must
be set in User Options.
Enhance Button
This opens a Dialog Box that allows you to
select Visual Enhancement options - Key
Highlight and/or Key Zoom (key magnification
window).
Display 3D Keys
Check this option On to enable the display of
the shaded, three-dimensional look keys. For
resolutions of 256 colors or less, it is
recommended that this option be set Off.
OnScreen checks the current display
capabilities when started, and may override
this option. Note that the 3D keys are only
181
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
displayed for sizes 8 or higher (the smaller
sizes do not have enough displayed pixels to
effectively render the 3-D look).
OnScreen Appearance
Click on the Appearance Button
Within Appearance, you will be able to set
conditions that influence how OnScreen will
appear and behave on screen.
182
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Within Appearance, you will be able to set
conditions that influence how OnScreen will
appear and behave on screen.
Minimize OnScreen to...
You can select how OnScreen will act when it
is minimized.
Title Bar Button - In order to minimize
OnScreen to a Title Bar Button, do the
following steps:
183
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button with the title "Title Bar
Button".
2. Press the OK Button.
OnScreen now will minimize to a button,
which is always attached to the active
application’s title bar (top caption bar). To
restore the window back to full size, click on
the button once.
Note: There are numerous customer
requested button size & positioning
options - see detailed information in
Initialization File Documentation.
TaskBar Button - In order to minimize
OnScreen to a Taskbar Button, do the
following steps:
184
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button with the title "Taskbar
Button".
2. Press the OK Button.
OnScreen now will minimize to a button on the
Taskbar. To restore the window back to full
size, click on the button on the Windows
Taskbar, or right-click and select restore or
maximize.
Tray Icon - In order to minimize OnScreen to
an icon in the System Tray, do the following
steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button with the title "Tray Icon".
2. Press the OK Button.
OnScreen now will minimize to an icon in the
System Tray (in the area with the clock &
volume control). To restore the window back to
185
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
full size, click on the small icon in the task bar,
or right-click and select restore.
Window - In order to minimize OnScreen to
an floating Window, do the following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button with the title "a Window".
2. Press the OK Button.
OnScreen now will minimize to a small
floating window. To restore the window back to
full size, click on the window. The minimized
floating window can be resized and positioned
as desired - when OnScreen is minimized, the
last position and size of the minimized floating
window will be used.
Operation Options
This will open an Operation Options dialog
allowing you to set your preferences while
using OnScreen. These include Reacting to
186
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialogs and other Windows, Typematic
operation, Keystroke / Click option, Virtual
Pointer, Action Button Move, Lower Case
display, Track Pointing Device Input, and Key
Border.
Key Options
This opens the Key Options dialog where you
can select Keys and Key combos (Ctrl, Shift,
Alt) that may be Enabled or Disabled.
Additionally, a Key or Key Combo can launch
an executable. In conjunction with the
OnScreen Developers Kit, this capability can
be used to create new operational features, such
as Minimize after the Enter key is pressed.
Special Options
This opens the Special Options dialog box
where Special handling features for Advanced
users, developers, and integrators can be found.
Includes the Supervisor/Operator mode
187
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
options, and Custom Logo Feature, along with
the ability to react to other windows in the
system as they become active (Special
Handling), including the ability to launch a
separate executable.
The six buttons in the middle of the dialog box
offer additional configuration options for
OnScreen.
Panels Select the panels which OnScreen
displays.
Motion Select the motion of your panels.
Size Select the size of OnScreen.
Info Select the information displayed in the
Information panel.
Colors Select the colors for each panel.
Fonts Select different character display for
OnScreen.
Display Options
188
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Display 3D Keys - Check this option On to
enable the display of the shaded,
three-dimensional look keys. For resolutions of
256 colors or less, it is recommended that this
option be set Off. OnScreen checks the current
display capabilities when started, and may
override this option. Note that the 3D keys are
only displayed for sizes 8 or higher (the
smaller sizes do not have enough displayed
pixels to effectively render the 3-D look).
Enhance Button
This opens a Dialog Box that allows you to
select Visual Enhancement options - Key
Highlight and/or Key Zoom (key magnification
window).
Show & Hide Keys
This opens OnScreen in a special mode that
allows keys on the main keyboard panel to be
hidden. This is useful for controlled
189
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
applications where certain keys or key
combinations need to be unavailable - for
example, hiding the Alt key makes Alt-F4
impossible. To hide a key, click on the key OnScreen will be repainted without the key
just selected. To re-display a hidden key, click
on the space where the key normally would
appear, and the key will be shown again. To
Save the current setting, click on OK . Select
CANCEL to ignore any changes. Select Reset
to Show All Keys on OnScreen.
OnScreen Logon Utilities
In order to logon onto Windows & obtain
access to Network resources, the appropriate
logon configuration is required within
Windows. There are various options available
in OnScreen to display & interact with the
logon requirements. This opens the appropriate
configuration options for the Windows
platform running. See OnScreen Logon
190
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Utilities for more information.
Note: In general, when you make changes
within OnScreen Setup, the changes are
immediate and reflected by OnScreen.
However, some display option
combinations may require a restart of
OnScreen for proper display. The logon
options typically require a restart of
Windows.
OnScreen Panel Selection
191
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialog Box
OnScreen lets you select which panels are open
every time you start OnScreen.
If you want ALL panels to be open every time
you run OnScreen, click on the "All Panels"
Check-Button.
You can click on-and-off each individual panel.
The panels with a check-mark will be open
each time you start OnScreen.
192
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press
the CANCEL button.
Operation Options
IMPORTANT NOTE: There are various
settings here to change how OnScreen
193
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
operates. If you are having problems
typing, see Interface Settings.
Auto-Arrange Windows (Maximize Typing
Window)
This Check-Button enables or disables the
automatic operation of arranging windows. If
enabled, OnScreen will automatically size &
position window upon selection of a new active
window using the Select button on the Action
Panel. NOTE: A window will always be
arranged when the Arrange button on the
Action panel is used.
Auto-Arrange Active Window
This Check-Button is only available if
Auto-Arrange Windows is enabled. This option
enables or disables the monitoring of the active
window. If enabled, OnScreen will
automatically size & position window when
194
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
the mouse cursor (pointer) is over OnScreen, or
by opening a new application (typing) window.
For certain users and in certain types of usage,
this can be a great help, as the automatic
arranging of windows is a constant on-going
process. However, this option is default off,
and when disabled, only by using Select on the
Action Panel with Auto-Arrange Windows
enabled will a window be automatically
arranged.
Auto-Save Position after moving
This Check-Button enables or disables the
automatic saving of position after OnScreen
has been moved (Action Button Move, or
Right-button move). If enabled, OnScreen will
process the Save command after every move
has been completed (Same as Menu | Position |
Save Position).
React to Dialogs and other Windows
(Window Contention)
195
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This is a global setting for OnScreen that will
change the internal operation of the software.
If set On, OnScreen will move off of dialogs,
and react to other Windows based on Special
and Macro Panel settings. If set Off, this
sensing & reacting to other windows in the
system will be disabled. For certain types of
use, having OnScreen remain in a particular
screen location at all times and not affecting
other windows in the system is preferred.
IMPORTANT NOTE: OnScreen’s
automatic sensing for Special & Macro
Panel options will NOT operate if this is set
Off.
Enable Typematic Operation
The automatic typing of a character while a
particular key is pressed down for a period of
196
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
time requires that Enable Typematic Operation
be set On. If set Off, this automatic typing
operation is disabled. Specific settings for
Typematic operation can be found in the
ONSCREEN.INI initialization file. See
Advanced User Information for more details.
No Keystroke until Down and Up Click
Completed
OnScreen reacts like a physical keyboard, and
a Click then Drag motion off of a particular
key results in the down and subsequent release
of that key, resulting in a keystroke being
generated. To disable this default action, set the
option On. Setting this option On is preferred
by users who do not have precise control over
the positioning of the mouse pointer while a
click occurs. When set On, Typematic
Operation is automatically set Off to disable
multiple keystrokes of the same key. This the
forces the pointing device to complete the
197
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Down & Up Click to generate the keystroke
initially selected by the Down click.
Virtual Pointer in Use
This setting should be set On if a the device
used to move the mouse cursor (pointer) is not
a standard mouse, or trackball. Any hardware
device that interacts via a "device driver" with
Windows should not be considered a Virtual
Pointer (unless the implementation does not
fully emulate a standard mouse [which is more
common than otherwise]). Various Assistive
Technology devices such as cameras or lasers
that track the eye, other biometric sensors, or
other software based translation interfaces
(such as the MouseKeys in Microsoft’s
Accessibilities options) when used should have
the Virtual Pointer setting On. This feature
forces OnScreen to operate slightly differently
for "Clicks" (button down, button up), and
during moving the OnScreen window.
198
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Alternate Virtual Interface
This setting should be set on ONLY when there
are typing difficulties AND the pointing device
does not activate the down/up display of
OnScreen buttons. This setting may be
required for software interfaces, and other
non-physical approaches to operating the
mouse cursor and generating clicks. Older
versions of "Joystick-To-Mouse" will require
this to be set On.
Allow Action Button Move
The setting is default On, and it allows the
Action button (as set in OnScreen Setup,
Mouse Buttons, Action button) to move the
OnScreen window by clicking on the frame or
any unused area (Click, drag, then release). If
the mouse cursor is not always tracked
accurately, it is recommended that this be set to
Off to prevent accidental moves. This may also
be set off to prevent the operator from moving
199
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
the OnScreen window (note that the second
and/or third button must be configured properly
to ensure the move option is unavailable).
Note: This option will be automatically
disabled if the Key Border is a non-0
value. If you want this option enabled, be
sure to check the Key Border setting.
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7 (This setting does
not apply, and is disabled)
Track Pointing Device Input at all times
This setting is default Off, unless Setup senses
a known driver or interface that requires this
setting On. If there are any focus problems (i.e.
typing [clicking] on OnScreen does not type
[send keystrokes] into the currently active
window), then this setting should be set On to
see if it resolves this problem. In general, this
200
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
setting should be Off if at all possible. See
Advanced User Notes for more information on
this setting and how it affects OnScreen
operation.
Use Upper Case Characters Always
(Keyboard Panel)
By default, lower case characters are displayed
on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel, unless the Shift
or Caps lock is engaged. Check this option On
to force Upper Case display at all times.
Key Border (# of pixels inside key edge
ignored as key press)
This setting is used to reduce the area of each
key that can register a press. For maximum
effect, the default setting is no border area. As
the Key Border values increase, the pixels
inside each edge (top, left, bottom, right) are
removed from the area of the key that will react
to a click. Because of the differing sizes of the
201
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
panels and keys, this setting may affect certain
size ranges differently. It is recommended that
the particular size for usage be selected first,
and then the desired Key Border be set to
match the current size.
Note: OnScreen automatically sets the
"Allow Action Button Move" to Off when
there is a border in use (greater than 0).
This prevents the undesirable move when
clicks & releases are not accurate due to
either software driver or operating
conditions.
Interface Settings
These are the steps that should be tried if you
are having difficulties typing with OnScreen.
202
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
1) The following settings are the preferred
options:
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = Off
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =
Off
2) If you are working with a Touchscreen or a
Pen, and when tapping on OnScreen, you
observe the buttons being pressed, but the
active application (where you are trying to type
into) becomes inactive, try setting Track
Pointing Device Input at All Times to On.
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = Off
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =
On
3) If you are working with a virtual, assistive,
or another non-hardware pointing device, and
203
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
when clicking on OnScreen, you do not
observe the buttons being pressed, set the
Alternate Virtual Interface to On
Virtual Pointer in Use = On
Alternate Virtual Interface = On
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =
Off
Other Notes
The Virtual Pointer in Use should ONLY be set
Off if you are using a physical mouse, or a
device that interfaces like a physical mouse.
The device MUST support the
GetAsyncKeyState for the VK_LBUTTON &
VK_RBUTTON. In general, there is no
negative aspect to having this setting On even
if you are using a physical mouse.
The Alternate Virtual Interface overrides the
Track Pointing Device Input at All Times, so
204
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
there is never a case where they BOTH would
be On.
If you are still having difficulties with
OnScreen after trying the above, check the
device settings to see if there are other options
available - it is possible it is operating in a
mode that is not compatible with other
Windows programs. You may also wish to test
with a physical mouse to see if the pointing
device is truly emulating a mouse pointer.
If you continue to have difficulties, please
contact Technical Support.
205
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Key Options
Key Options offers customization capabilities
for keys on the main Alpha Keyboard Panel
and the Edit panel. Keys may be disabled,
assigned to other functions, and can be
re-mapped using the Launch Key EXE in
conjunction with the Developer’s Kit (e.g. the
Esc key could be re-mapped to send Alt-F4).
Select Key
This Drop-Down list allows you to select the
206
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
specific key you wish to work with. The
number in parentheses is the internal ID used
by OnScreen for the key’s position. Refer to
the Build-A-Macro Notes for more details on
these internal IDs.
Select Key Modifier (Key with...)
This Drop-Down list allows you to select a
specific key combination (i.e. Ctrl-Alt-Delete)
for the currently selected Key. All combination
options are available. Note that with the proper
setting, you can disable Ctrl-F1, but not F1, or
just disable Alt-F4, or Shift-Esc. Due to the
complexity of available applications, each
possible option for each key is given. See the
Key Display (below) which is a quick visual
aid to see if a particular key has any enhanced
settings.
Key Display
This is a visual aid only. When it is 0 (zero),
207
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
there are no enhanced key settings in use. All
keys are Enabled, and there is no Launch
setting on. Any non-zero display means that at
least one enhanced key setting is selected for
the currently selected Key.
Clear
This button will remove all enhanced settings
for the currently selected key. All keystrokes
will be Enabled, and any Launch settings will
be removed (No Additional Action will be
selected to every possible keystroke). This will
not remove the Key EXE entry, but this is
disabled since all Launch settings will be
cleared.
Enable Keystroke(s) / Disable Keystroke(s)
This defines the state of the particular key and
its current modifier (Ctrl, Shift, Alt). If
Enabled, then OnScreen will generate & send
the keystroke. If Disabled, then the
208
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
keystroke(s) will be removed and no action by
OnScreen will occur when the particular
keystroke(s) is/are initiated by the user. Note
that this action is independent of the Launch
Key EXE capability.
No Additional Action / Launch Key EXE
In general, the No Additional Action for any
keystroke is the typical setting. Due to
customer requests, we have added the
capability of also initiating other actions tied to
specific Keystrokes. By using the OnScreen
Developers Kit, these (or any other developer
selected action) can be tied to a particular
keystroke or combination. Some of these
requested capabilities are:
- Minimize to button upon Enter (type Enter,
then minimize = Enter Key Enabled, Launch
MINMZMTS.EXE)
- Ctrl-Alt-Delete restarts system
209
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
(Ctrl-Alt-Delete Launches NTRSTART.EXE)
- Alt-F4 cannot close window (Alt-F4
Disabled)
- Make F1 run special Application Help
program tied to a different key (F1 Key
Disabled, Launch SDSTRMTS.EXE with
appropriate alternate keystroke used)
This adds a great deal of flexibility to the
general keyboard (similar to the capabilities of
the Macro panels), but it also creates a greater
chance of confusion. These should only be
used when implementing a system for only 1
type of use. In general, these settings are
potentially more dangerous then helpful.
Wondering why the keyboard disappears
everytime you press Enter is certainly not the
end goal of productivity - so please be
extremely careful when using these options,
and document any changes for developers to
come and for your users!
210
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Key EXE
This is an Executable file that will be run if the
"Launch key EXE" option is selected for the
particular Key Combination. Note you may add
command line options, but be sure to click on
OK when you are through editing the selection.
Browse
This button will open a File Open Browse
Dialog that will let you explore your system to
select an executable. Because of backward
compatibility, only short path & file names are
used.
It is strongly recommended that only
Developer Kit EXEs be used.
OnScreen Special Handling
211
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialog Box
Important Note: This dialog box contains
advanced user options. In general, most
users should ignore these settings.
Select Special Options:
Some Windows applications do not conform to
pre-defined Windows standards, or require
212
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
special handling to work along with OnScreen.
Some known applications are included in the
Pull-down box box on the left. On the right,
click on a Radio-Button to select the action
each application should perform to work along
OnScreen. You may add new Applications by
typing the name in the top box on the left. This
will add the Application Name to the list. Once
selected, choose one of the options on the right
to indicate how OnScreen should react when
the selected Application becomes active. To
delete an entry, highlight the entire selection,
press the Delete key to remove the text, and
then press Enter to remove the entry from the
list.
Minimize to Button
When OnScreen overlaps the Application, a
"Goto Button" command will minimize
OnScreen to a Button.
Minimize to Icon
213
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
When OnScreen overlaps the Application a
"Goto Icon" command will minimize
OnScreen to an Icon.
Move Off Application
This will move OnScreen below the
Application Window. Note that based on
window size and OnScreen size, areas may be
moved off screen.
Hide
This option currently matches the Minimize to
Icon.
Resize
This will move OnScreen off the window, and
resize the Application so that it occupies the
rest of the screen area above OnScreen.
Ignore
This option is meant for the user who may
want different actions based on changing
214
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
circumstances, and may not want special action
during a period of time.
Run EXE
The ability to Run an Executable file adds great
flexibility, and should be used in conjunction
with the OnScreen Developers Kit. The
executable file is run once until another
executable is launched via OnScreen (typically
when some other window becomes active that
is in the Special Handling list). Primarily this is
meant to be used to position or reconfigure
OnScreen as different windows become active
(different web pages, different applications,
etc.). OnScreen only checks the Active window
when it is open normally (NOT as an Icon or
Button). Also, the React to Dialog and other
Windows in Operation Options can override
these settings.
Browse
215
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This button will open a File Open Browse
Dialog that will let you explore your system to
select an executable. For maximum
compatibility, only short path & file names are
used. When the Run EXE is updated, it is also
saved for the currently selected "Application
Window Text". If you wish to modify the entry
(e.g. add command line options), you must
then click on OK to save these changes.
Notes on Application Window Text &
Advanced Notes
The entire Caption bar (or entire Window
Name) is searched for a match, starting in the
order of the Special List. Any part of the
window name will match, therefore being
specific is important. This substring match can
cause problems, especially if the Window Text
is common, e.g. "Word" will match WordPad,
Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, etc. Because
each entry is checked regularly by OnScreen, it
216
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
can affect system operation as the list grows.
This list should be used sparingly with extreme
care, and only when using the Developers Kit
within a separate Application is not an option.
Edit OnScreen Initialization file:
Pushing this button will allow you to directly
edit the contents of the OnScreen initialization
file. Caution: Editing the .INI file can cause
OnScreen to operate incorrectly! Know what
you are editing. Refer to the OnScreen User’s
Guide section on the Initialization File for
complete coverage of this option.
Return to Installation defaults:
If you would like to return all options to the
original defaults, press this button. This will
replace the current initialization file
(ONSCREEN.INI) and the configuration file
(KEYBOARD.KBF) with the files from the
time of original installation. EVERYTHING
217
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
will be reset to the configuration at that time
(i.e. the time immediately after installation).
OnScreen Panel Motion
Dialog Box
Panel Motion
Choose "Snap-Out Panel" and OnScreen’s
panels will snap in & out. The new
configuration will be displayed without
intermediate displays.
218
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Choose "Slide-Out Panel" and OnScreen’s
panels will slide in & out. The new
configuration will be displayed with a visual
effect of motion.
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press
the CANCEL button.
OnScreen Size Selections
219
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialog Box
The size Dialog box allows you to select which
size OnScreen will be displayed each time you
start the program.
NOTE: This is not available if OnScreen is
using a size larger than 12 (infinite sizing). For
sizes larger than 12, you must use SzUp &
SzDn from the OnScreen Control Panel.
Each of the 12 pictures show the approximate
220
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
size of OnScreen. In order to select a size for
OnScreen, do the following steps:
1. Click on the picture of the size you want
OnScreen to be.
2. Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press
the CANCEL button.
NOTE:
You can change OnScreen’s size also directly
from the OnScreen Control Panel or select a
new size from the OnScreen Menu.
Oversize Window Options
Oversize refers to the state when the OnScreen
window is wider than the screen display width.
These are the options available here to
accommodate the user.
Enable Screen-Edge Scroll
221
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
When the OnScreen window (keyboard display
window) is larger than the actual display (e.g.
OnScreen is wider than the screen width),
select this option to enable the automatic scroll
when the mouse pointer (cursor) is held at the
edge of the screen. If OnScreen is off-screen at
that edge, it will automatically scroll
completely into view when this option is
checked On.
Enable Scroll Window
This option is available for CrossScanner /
Touchscreen users who may have difficulty
holding the mouse pointer (cursor) at a screen
edge. When checked On, and OnScreen is
larger than the actual display, a separate Scroll
Control window will appear with options
available to reposition OnScreen.
Please note the following with this option:
- Will automatically appear when this option is
222
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
enabled, and when portion of OnScreen moves
off-screen
- This is only available for the horizontal
(width), there is no control for the height
- Designed for OnScreen being displayed at top
of screen
- << moves extreme left onto visible part of
screen, >> shows extreme right
- < & > move the indicated end of OnScreen
towards visible part of screen
- Slider can be used to adjust OnScreen directly
- Select Close to close the Scroll Control
window
If Closed and you wish to re-open the window,
you can use the Move button on the Action
panel (or when WordComplete is open), and
the Scroll Control window will automatically
re-open.
223
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Center Window (after sizing)
This option is default On, and centers the
keyboard after a change in size. If OnScreen is
oversized, this will mean certain portions of the
window will be off-screen and not available. If
this option is set Off, the left most portion of
the window will align with the left side of the
screen - this setting may be desirable for
CrossScanner users.
System Information Display
Dialog Box
The System Information Dialog Box allows
you to select which options are to be displayed
in the Information Panel:
This is the System Information Panel.
224
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
You can click on-and-off each individual
Check-Button. The options with a check-mark
will be displayed each time you start
OnScreen. To Sort the display, either add
individually or click on the item in the System
Information window to move the item to the
front of the list (leftmost).
Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press
the CANCEL button.
225
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Basic OnScreen Colors
Panel Colors
In order to color a OnScreen panel, do the
following steps:
Select Panel to Color
1. Choose Keyboard, Completion Keys, or
select Specific Key.
226
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
2. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button of the panel (or Key) you
wish to color.
Select Item to be Colored
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button of the part of the button you
wish to color. You may also Click on the
appropriate area of the oversized button on
the right.
2. Click on a color that is provided below (16
colors) to select the color.
3. The item you have selected will change its
color, and show you a preview of the in the
oversized button window.
4. Repeat this process for all button parts you
want to color.
Once you are finished coloring one panel, you
either press OK Button to save, or select
227
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
another panel to color. If you select another
panel to be colored, the previous colored panel
will change its colors immediately.
Keyboard Background
To Select Keyboard Background Color
Use the Keyboard Background Button to
change the color of the keyboard background
& frame.
OnScreen Colors Dialog
228
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Box
IMPORTANT NOTE - 3D Display,
Themes affect Colors: As OnScreen has
become more flexible, the original intent of
these color options has diminished.
Because the Button Text color is used, and
the original display option is still available,
the configuration options here remain
intact. However, when the 3D display is
enabled, or any other theme is selected,
typically only the Button Text color will be
229
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
reflected on the OnScreen display. For
notes and access to more information on
themes, refer to General Operation.
Select Color Source Select "Use System
Colors" to use the Windows scheme (available
in Display Properties, Appearance)
NOTE:
When System Colors are used in conjunction
with 3D keys, only pure RGB colors are
allowed. (RGB - Red, Green, Blue - 3 values
between 0 and 255 indicating the amount of
Red, Green, or Blue used to "build" a color this is sometimes referred to as 24-bit color (3
x 1 byte <=> 3 x 8 bits = 24 bits) - pure RGB
means a value of either 0 or 255 (no bits set, or
all bits set)) Due to the shading & desire for a
clean appearance, preservation of the system
color is not possible (disable 3D keys to see
230
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
actual system color). The following algorithm
is used to create a "pure" RGB color: The
system color is split into the 3 RGB
components, and then the smallest value is
subtracted away from all elements, leaving 0,
1, or 2 positive values - these then are used to
determine use of a solid color (i.e. value of
255) or no color (i.e. a value of 0). This is used
as the "background" of the shaded keys. In
most cases, this is in the same color scheme as
the System Colors. You may adjust the
Windows Appearance, "Display 3D keys", or
revert back to "Use Panel Colors" to review the
various display options.
Select "Use Panel Colors" to use OnScreen
Colors. OnScreen colors allows you to
customize OnScreen by coloring each panel’s
keys and buttons.
Panel Colors
In order to color a OnScreen panel, do the
231
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
following steps:
Select Panel to Color
1. Choose among the seven panels.
2. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button of the panel you wish to
color.
Select Item to be Colored
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button of the part of the button you
wish to color. You may also Click on the
appropriate area of the oversized button on
the right.
2. Click on a color that is provided below (16
colors) to select the color.
3. The item you have selected will change its
color, and show you a preview of the in the
oversized button window.
232
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
4. Repeat this process for all button parts you
want to color.
Once you are finished coloring one panel, you
either press OK Button to save, or select
another panel to color. If you select another
panel to be colored, the previous colored panel
will change its colors immediately.
Use current Colors on all Panels
If you want your current selected colors to be
the colors for all panels, press this button.
Set Panel Colors to Default
If you want to return one or all your panels to
their default colors, press this button. To
change one panel back to default colors, do the
following steps:
1. Click on the diamond-shaped
Radio-Button of the panel you wish to
change.
233
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
2. Click on "Set Panel Colors to Default"
button.
3. The colors will return to default.
To change all panels back to default colors, do
the following steps:
1. After completing 1-3 above, press "Use
current Colors on all Panels".
2. All panels will change to default colors.
Keyboard Background
To Select Keyboard Background Color
Use the Keyboard Background Button to
change the color of the keyboard background
& frame.
OnScreen Background
234
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Colors Dialog Box
This Dialog Box allows you to switch the
colors of the OnScreen panels. The following
panels will be affected:
1. Alpha Keyboard Panel
2. Edit Panel
In order to select a color for OnScreen panels,
do the following steps:
235
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
1. Click on the picture of the color you want
OnScreen to be. A black frame will appear
around your selection.
2. Press the OK Button.
If you do not want to save your changes, press
the CANCEL button.
Enhance - Visual
Enhancements
Visual Enhancement Options
236
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Highlight Key under pointer
Check On this option to enable a visual
highlight of the key currently under the mouse
pointer (mouse cursor). This may be useful to
some individuals who have difficulty seeing
the mouse cursor, or find the additional visual
feedback helpful. The highlight is
accomplished using a display color inversion,
and different colors will display different
highlight colors.
Note: If scanning is enabled, it is
recommended that this option be set off
when the Invert overlay is used.
Zoom Key under pointer
Check On this option to enable a magnification
window that expands the key under the mouse
pointer (mouse cursor). During OnScreen
237
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
operation, the window will follow the pointer
and magnify the key into the magnification
window. The size of the window will change
based on the size of the key pointed to, and the
Zoom Display Size (see below). This is a
visual enhancement that may help some
individuals identify the key easier, prior to
selection. If a portion of the key is off-screen,
the Zoom will not display the magnification
window. The position of the window relative to
the pointer (cursor) depends on the position of
OnScreen, the size of the magnification
window, and the screen edges.
Zoom Display Size
When Zoom Key under pointer is checked On,
these 3 choices will be enabled. Select Large
for a 3 times magnification, Larger for a 5
times magnification, and Largest for a 7 times
magnification. The Largest is probably best
used if your display is running at a very
238
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
high-resolution (e.g. 1600 x 1200 or higher).
Hide Zoom after Click
For Touchscreen users and other types of
pointing devices that do not constantly cause
mouse motion, this checking this option On
will hide the magnified Zoom window after a
click to reveal any keys or buttons hidden by
the Zoom window.
Once you have made your Visual Enhancement
choices, click on the OK Button.
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog
& cancel the Select Visual Enhancements
operation.
239
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Fonts
IMPORTANT NOTE:
The Font capabilities of OnScreen are limited
for a variety of reasons. These limited options
have only been included as a specific solution
for a small subset of customers. Use OnScreen
Build-A-Board for more complete control over
the appearance.
Base / Medium / Large Selections
Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all
240
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.
Medium Sizes are 7-9.
Large Sizes are 10-12.
Select Button for Base / Medium / Large
Each button selects the corresponding size
range font. A System Font Selection dialog is
available to select from installed fonts.
Only the (Font) Face Name is preserved.
Character Set for Base / Medium / Large
For MyTMouse, use 22. For most others, 0 is
the best choice (ANSI). Symbols use character
set 2. Other choices are:
ANSI_CHARSET = 0
DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1
SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2
MyTMouse = 22
241
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
MAC_CHARSET = 77
SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128
HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129
HANGUL_CHARSET = 129
JOHAB_CHARSET = 130
GB2312_CHARSET = 134
CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136
GREEK_CHARSET = 161
TURKISH_CHARSET = 162
VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163
HEBREW_CHARSET = 177
ARABIC_CHARSET = 178
BALTIC_CHARSET = 186
RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204
THAI_CHARSET = 222
242
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238
OEM_CHARSET = 255
1 Character Size Adjust for Base / Medium /
Large
This setting refers to the amount subtracted
from the available area of the key (total pixels)
used to display the font character. Even though
it strongly affects key displays of 1 character
(i.e. alphanumeric keys on the Keyboard
(Alpha) panel), it does have some effect on all
buttons displayed. In some ways, this is similar
to the Key border concept in Operation Options
- the only use for this value is in calculating the
best point size for the key display.
243
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Sounds
Click on the Sounds Button.
There are 2 main areas of sound feedback
available in OnScreen - Key Press
244
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Acknowledgement (feedback), and
Text-To-Speech
Sound on Click - Key Press
Acknowledgement Sound Options
OnScreen lets you select No Sound, Key-Click
sound, or Voice sound audio feedback for key
presses.
No Sound
Select No Sound to disable any sounds when
keys are clicked on OnScreen.
Key-Click
Select Key-Click to play a click sound when
each key is clicked on OnScreen.
Voice
Select Voice to hear voices describe each key
on the OnScreen Keyboard. This also enables
the Sound Recorder, and you may add your
own voicing to OnScreen. See below for basic
245
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
overview, and also see Advanced User Notes
for more details & requirements. If Enable
Keyboard Scanning is checked On in User
Options, the Voice option is not available.
Scan Sounds
OnScreen lets you select sounds for keyboard
scanning (available when Enable Keyboard
Scanning is checked On in User Options).
No Sound
If this is selected, no sound will be played
when a scan event occurs.
Scan Sound
If this is selected, a clear "pop" sound will be
played at each scan event (when a new scan
area is highlighted).
Text-To-Speech Notification
If this is selected, Text-To-Speech will be used
to notify the user of the current highlighted
246
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
scan area. Some of the text must come from
settings in the Initialization File. This setting is
only available when the system supports
Text-To-Speech.
Sound on Enable/Disable
When set On, OnScreen plays a special sound
when scanning is enabled, and a different
sound when disabled.
Text-To-Speech Options
OnScreen lets you select basic Text-To-Speech
operation when using OnScreen.
Speak key under pointer
Select this option to enable basic
Text-To-Speech while using OnScreen. When
the mouse pointer hovers over a key, the
selected Voice will say the key name (or Text
on key), e.g. the Enter key will say "Enter", the
! key will say "Exclamation Point.;" To change
247
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
voice or rate, see the Text-To-Speech Speak
and Setup in the Start Menu Program group
(Start Menu | (All) Programs | OnScreen |
Text-To-Speech). When selected, this option
automatically enables and selects the "Speak
letters/numbers/punc." and "Speak words", and
it selects "Speak WordComplete words" if
unselected, effectively providing
Text-To-Speech for the entire OnScreen
keyboard. Various subsets of the keys may be
selected for Text-To-Speech operation as
described below.
Speak letters/numbers/punc.
This option offers Text-To-Speech for the
single character keys (common keys). For
intermediate or advanced users, hearing these
keys may not be necessary or desired, so
Text-To-Speech for the subset of single
character keys may be enabled/disabled with
this option.
248
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Speak words
This option offers Text-To-Speech for the keys
that contain words, excluding the
WordComplete words (see below). This option
provides a second subset of the keys, so
Text-To-Speech for the keys that contain words
may be enabled/disabled.
Speak WordComplete words
Select this option to enable Text-To-Speech
processing of the WordComplete completion
candidate words. This option is automatically
enabled when the "Speak key under pointer"
under pointer is selected, but is independent of
that option. Primarily used by individuals who
do not need verbal feedback of the basic
keyboard, but appreciate the feedback from the
WordComplete words. Also designed for use
with CrossScanner to enable automatic scan of
WordComplete words - when this option is
checked On, CrossScanner Auto-Speaks the
249
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
words, and enables selection via the current
input option.
Scan WordComplete words
Select this option to enable automatic scan of
WordComplete words - when this option is
checked On, OnScreen will step through
available WordComplete words, and
Auto-Speak them. A mouse left-click will
select the highlighted word. The automatic
scan will begin once the WordComplete
candidates are displayed. Suffixes will also be
scanned when enabled. You may use a
right-click to cancel the scan, or wait until the
scan is complete. Do not use this feature with
CrossScanner - CrossScanner performs a
similar operation automatically when Speak
WordComplete words is checked On.
Delay before speak
The scroll bar can be moved to set the delay
250
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
(shorter to the left, longer to the right). This
delay affects the following when
Text-To-Speech is in use:
•
The repeat rate (when enabled)
•
The delay between the start of one key and
the period when a different key will be
spoken
•
The time allowed for the key to be spoken
•
How long the pointer must be over the key
before it is spoken
The delay should be made longer if you
experience the following:
•
Speech is cut off prior to hearing the entire
word
•
Keys are spoken too quickly as the pointer is
moved across the keys
251
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
The hover time (dwell time) seems too quick
Repeat (while over same key)
Select this option to enable automatic
repetition of the key name while the pointer
remains over the key. This may be useful for
individuals who want the continuous feedback
of hearing which key is currently under the
mouse pointer.
Speak Word on Click
This option speaks the word when selected
from the Word Completion Candidates. This is
a good option to use when you have selected
Voice key press acknowledgement - this acts as
Word Completion key press acknowledgement.
Using "Speak Key Text under pointer" and
"Speak Word on Click" together can be
confusing, and is not recommended.
Once you have made your Sound selection,
click on the OK Button.
252
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog
& cancel the Select Sound operation.
Advanced Notes on Sound and
Text-To-Speech
Custom Sounds - Voice and Key-Click
For foreign keyboards and other uses,
OnScreen allows the user to replace the
pre-recorded voice descriptions of the keys.
Note that "Voices" must be selected in
OnScreen Setup, Sounds to enable this feature.
To add your own wave file, simply record the
description required, and then place the wave
file into the installation directory in the Sounds
folder (directory) using the following
conventions:
•
Each numbered key description should have
a wave file associated with the naming
convention - Key 0, the Escape key, would
253
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
be "0.WAV" - Key 1, the F1 key, would be
"1.WAV" and so on up to "100.WAV", etc.
see Advanced User Notes for the complete
list of keys & wave file numbers.
•
In other words, if there is a "0.WAV" file in
the Sounds folder, and Voices is the selected
Sounds option, then the "0.WAV" file will be
played whenever the Escape key is pressed
on OnScreen.
•
Also note the following: If the Sound option
is Key-Click and there is a
"KEYCLICK.WAV" in the Sounds folder,
then this wave will be played whenever a
key on OnScreen is pressed.
Text-To-Speech Advanced Notes
The Text-To-Speech requires the appropriate
Speech Components installed. The file
MSSPEECH.MSI must be installed (it requires
the Windows Installer) - review the Release
254
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Notes on the distribution media for more
details. Once installed, you can test & setup the
appropriate voice in the Text-To-Speech Speak
and Setup, available in the program group for
OnScreen.
Text-To-Speech Speak and Setup provides 2
important functions:
1. The ability to select the Voice and Rate of
speech - select, click on Speak to test, then
click on Close to save these settings for the
current user (stored in the Registry for the
Current User) - these settings will be used
by OnScreen for any enabled
Text-To-Speech option.
2. The ability to type into the text area, and
click on Speak to say the words typed this can be both fun and also extremely
useful for individuals who cannot
articulate words well.
255
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
You may click on Notes for more details about
the options in Text-To-Speech Speak and Setup
- you can also open existing text files into the
text area, then click on Speak to "read" the file.
Other Text-To-Speech notes:
•
When OnScreen starts, and when the Sounds
dialog is open in Setup, if Text-To-Speech is
installed, you will hear "Text-To-Speech is
available" spoken in the current selected
voice.
•
You may remove the Speech Components by
re-running MSSPEECH.MSI and selecting
remove, or using Control Panel |
Add/Remove Programs
256
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Select Keyboard Layouts
Click on the Keyboards Button.
OnScreen can operate with many different
257
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
keyboard layouts. By selecting the same
keyboard layout that Windows uses, you can
synchronize the display on OnScreen with the
characters generated in your application.
The main US keyboard layout is called the 101
United States Standard (sometimes called the
QWERTY layout (for the top left row of
keys)). To change to a different US Keyboard
layout, do the following:
1. On the right-hand side of the dialog, Select
a layout by clicking on its name.
2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not want
to change the current layout, press the
CANCEL button).
Some Special US Layouts
Dvorak Standard
Dvorak Left Handed
258
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dvorak Right Handed
My-T-Easy - alphabetically ordered (ABC)
keyboard layout
Note: The special US layouts will only
operate correctly with the US Standard
layout selected in Windows.
In order to change the OnScreen keyboard
layout to another language, do the following
steps:
1. Select a language (layout) by clicking on
its name.
2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not want
to change the selected language, press the
CANCEL button).
259
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Important: This process will only change
the OnScreen keyboard layout. If you wish
to change your physical keyboard layout,
you must change your Windows driver
from the Windows Control Panel (available
in Keyboard Properties, Layout).
For proper font display & typing, you may
need to set Regional Settings (available in
Regional Settings).
For additional notes, see Keyboard Layouts &
Windows and see Advanced Notes on
Keyboard Layouts.
When an International keyboard is selected,
OnScreen offers the option to run the Windows
Control Panel. On some International layouts,
the right [Alt] key becomes a combination
[Ctrl][Alt] keystroke, and may be labeled
[AltGr].
260
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Important: Many non-US layouts
incorporate an additional key not available
on the 101 layouts. In almost all cases, the
recommended and supported layout is the
104 layout for any non-US selection. In
some cases, only the 104 layout has been
updated.
Additional Keyboard Notes:
Note: Some layouts date back to Windows
3.1/Windows 95. These layouts are
labeled "(old)". For later releases of
Windows, these layouts may not match
changes to the current keyboard layouts in
Windows. Some layouts may only operate
correctly under Windows 95/98 - refer to
the layouts available in your version of
Windows to select which layout to use in
OnScreen.
261
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
The old layouts are included as a
reference & reminder that keyboard
layouts are not as consistent as one might
believe. Because manufacturers have
flexibility in keyboard layouts (e.g. look at
different laptop keyboards), constant
changes to the underlying operating
system, and there are no specific
international standards that can be used
as a reference, a keyboard layout can only
be viewed as snapshot in time. And for all
we know, these "old" layouts may one day
be useful again. Refer to Developer Kit
utilities for further information on Keyboard
layouts, and refer to IMG’s Build-A-Board
for full keyboard layout customization
capabilities.
Asian layouts require fonts for the East Asian
languages - on some versions of Windows,
these are not installed automatically - refer to
262
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Regional and Language options in Control
Panel for adding these supplemental files. Note
that the Asian languages may not be supported
at all in certain versions of Windows!
Some layouts are designed for operation in the
localized versions of Windows. Arabic, Greek,
Hebrew, Russian, & Central / Eastern European
layouts may not correctly display all characters
if a different ANSI code page is in use.
Typical users operate with only 1 keyboard
layout, but it is possible to switch between
active layouts for various applications in
Windows. To automatically have OnScreen
synchronize with changes to the active layout
in Windows, refer to the KeyboardSync utility
in the Developer’s Kit.
Select Custom Build-A-Board Layouts
263
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
There are a few sample, custom Build-A-Board
Layouts available. Additional Build-A-Board
layouts can be created, and when placed in the
Installation Folder will be added to this list.
When selected, the KEYBOARD.KBF in the
users configuration folder is replaced with the
selected layout. When OnScreen is run, the
layout is recognized, and the Build-A-Board
compatible run-time (MYTSOFT2.EXE) is
used to operate with the version 2.x keyboard
layouts.
264
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Using Build-A-Board Layouts: Custom
Build-A-Board layouts are displayed by
MYTSOFT2.EXE (which is a completely
different executable program), and as
such, the configuration options
documented for OnScreen are not
referenced or used by the Build-A-Board
based executable. All configuration
options available for Build-A-Board layouts
are controlled via Build-A-Board, and
contained within the 2.x version layout file
(KeyBoard File (KBF File)). The support
for Build-A-Board custom layouts is
available as part of the license to
OnScreen to add even more flexibility and
utility to the OnScreen product. However,
a separate license for Build-A-Board is
required to obtain all the capabilities of
Build-A-Board. For continuity and name
recognition, the trademarked name
My-T-Soft is used for both the newer
Build-A-Board layouts (2.xx version) and
original software (1.xx version), along with
265
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
the fully encompassing My-T-Soft Family.
Keyboard Layouts &
Windows
Windows has various Regional & Keyboard
Layout settings, and these are best managed
within the Windows Control panel. Changing
the Keyboard in OnScreen only affects
OnScreen. Proper operation of the selected
layout may depend on the version of Windows,
your current Keyboard Layout, and Regional
(International) settings.
If you wish to change the physical keyboard
layout used by Windows, you must change
your Windows driver from the Windows
Control Panel (available in Keyboard
Properties, Layout). You may be required to
266
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
have your Windows CD (or original
installation media) when loading a previously
unused keyboard layout.
For proper font display & typing, you may
need to set Regional Settings (available in
Regional Settings).
NOTES:
When an International keyboard is selected,
OnScreen offers the option to run the Windows
Control Panel.
On some International layouts, the right [Alt]
key becomes a combination [Ctrl][Alt]
keystroke, and may be labeled [AltGr].
OnScreen keyboard layouts include the
characters displayed on OnScreen and the
low-level keyboard scancodes (scancodes are
the hardware level information about which
key was pressed). Most keyboard layouts are
similar, but if you experience improper display
267
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
or incorrectly typed characters, you must verify
the OnScreen layout, Windows Keyboard
Properties, and Windows Regional Settings.
Font character set, AltGr handling, and the
Lowercase display setting are automatically
updated when required for keyboard layouts
selected through OnScreen Setup. Refer to
Advanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts for
additional documentation.
Font & Character set issues can be referenced
in Fonts.
Advanced Notes on
Keyboard Layouts
Keyboard Layouts & Specific Notes
Notes:
268
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
The keyboard language/layout must be
changed for the keyboard to type correctly
based on the Windows Keyboard Layout,
Windows Regional settings, and the displayed
Layout.
Most users operate on one version of Windows,
and are used to one keyboard layout. After
selecting the layout when they first configure
OnScreen, they may never return to the
Keyboard Layout selection again. This is what
the objective was for the design & approach to
handling keyboard layouts in OnScreen.
Changing the keyboard layout in OnScreen
only affect OnScreen’s display & operation. To
synchronize the display and operation with
Windows, both OnScreen and Windows must
be set to the same layout.
During the various updates in Windows
versions, keyboard layouts have changed. Keys
have been moved/added, internal scan codes
269
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
changed, etc. It is important to note there is no
standards body that determines what a
particular keyboard layout should be.
Technically, it is left up to the manufacturer to
determine the physical keyboard layout (e.g.
look at different keyboard layouts on
laptops/notebooks/desktops). Microsoft must
support these different hardware
implementations, and also is involved in layout
modifications (e.g. adding keys, such as the
Windows Key). The end result is that the
keyboard layout files must be viewed as
dynamic and may be different between one
version of Windows and the next. If you
experience a problem with a layout, please
contact technical support, or refer to our
Developer’s Corner
(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm) for
options available.
Regional Settings (Refer to notes below)
270
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Optional = the Regional Settings doesn’t have
to change for showing the correct labels.
Suggested = the Regional Settings has to
change for showing the correct labels
Char Set numbers has to be changed in
OnScreen to matching keyboard
language/layout.
There are several settings that take affect when
the keyboard is selected through OnScreen
Setup. The appropriate character set is
automatically selected, the status of whether or
not the software should handle the AltGr
keystroke is set, and the setting for whether or
not the Lowercase display is allowed on the
keyboard panel is set for some layouts.
Because of display issues, these settings have
been pre-set for various layouts. Refer to
Advanced User notes and the setting for
KeyboardUpdate (in initialization file
description), and see manual setting below for
271
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
additional details on the actual implementation.
In some cases, the logic behind the
upper/lowercase display causes minor display
issues with certain layouts - these issues are
documented under the layout.
Arabic
Char Set = 178
Belarusian
Regional Settings = Belarusian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Belarusian/Belarusian
Char Set = 204
Bulgarian
Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Bulgarian/Bulgarian
Char Set = 204
272
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Bulgarian (Latin)
Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Bulgarian/Bulgarian (Latin)
Char Set = 204
Croatian
Regional Settings = Croatian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Croatian/Croatian
Char Set = 238
Czech (Qwerty)
Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech
(Qwerty)
Char Set = 238
Czech
273
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech
Char Set = 238
Estonian (Code Page might not be fully
supported by some version of Windows)
Regional Settings = Estonian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Estonian/Estonian
Char Set = 186
Suggested Font: MS Sans Serif
Greek
Regional Settings = Greek (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Greek/Greek
Char Set = 161
Hebrew
Char Set = 177
274
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Hungarian
Regional Settings = Hungarian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Hungarian/Hungarian
Char Set = 238
Irish
Regional Settings = English (Ireland)
(Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = English
(Ireland)/Irish
Char Set = 0
Korean
Regional Settings = Korean
Keyboard Language/Layout = Korean (IME)
Char Set = 129
275
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
On the 104 layout, the key above the enter and
next to the right-shift appear the same. The
correct letter is displayed in Windows Vista/7,
but not in Windows XP. The 2 keys generate
different virtual keys (220 & 226), but both
generate the same character.
Latvian (Latin) (Code Page might not be
fully supported by some version of
Windows)
Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian
(Latin)
Char Set = 186
Latvian (Code Page might not be fully
supported by some version of Windows)
Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian
Char Set = 186
276
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Polish
Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish
Char Set = 238
Polish Programmer
Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish
Char Set = 238
Romanian
Regional Settings = Romanian (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout =
Romanian/Romanian
Char Set = 238
Russian
Regional Settings = Russian (Suggested)
277
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Keyboard Language/Layout = Russian/Russian
Char Set = 204
Slovak
Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak
Char Set = 238
Slovak (Qwerty)
Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak
(Qwerty)
Char Set = 238
Turkish (F Type)
Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish
(F type)
Char Set = 162
278
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Turkish (Q Type)
Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)
Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish
(Q type)
Char Set = 162
HOW TO SETUP ADDITIONAL
KEYBOARD LAYOUTS MANUALLY
Make sure the OnScreen keyboard is closed
during these steps!
Step 1) Copy All (or the appropriate)
KYBD????.KMF file to the OnScreen
Installation folder
\Program Files\ONSCREEN
Step 2) Modify the ONSCREEN.INI file
Important: Refer to the ConfigPath entry
in the Initialization file to determine which
279
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
ONSCREEN.INI file is the correct file to
modify!
- OnScreen Setup | Configuration | Special
Options | Edit Initialization File
- Find the Keyboard=? setting in the
[Configuration] section (top of file)
- Change to the appropriate numbered
keyboard layout
Layout Numbers
The values 1-96, and 101-196, and any 200+
entries listed are valid, and are related as
follows:
01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. Dvorak
Standard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =
U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.
My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =
Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = Canadian
280
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Multi-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =
Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,
14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =
Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =
Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =
Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.
International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =
Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,
29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =
Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech
(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =
Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =
Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish
(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44
= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish
(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish
(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.
Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =
Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),
56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German
(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =
281
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish
(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =
Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64
= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish
(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish
(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch
(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =
Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese
(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =
Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish
(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =
Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),
78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),
80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish
(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =
English (Australian), 84 = English (New
Zealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English
(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88
= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =
Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.
Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish
282
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =
Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the
104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104
British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2nd
alternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104
Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic
(Alt.)
- Save the file
Step 3) Change the Font / Character Set
- OnScreen Setup | Configuration | Fonts
- See above for character set numbers
Step 4) Verify Windows Keyboard Layout &
Regional Settings
Step 5) Close OnScreen Setup, run OnScreen
283
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Build-A-Macro
Click on the Build-A-Macro Button.
OnScreen lets you create your own Macros to
work within Windows and DOS in a Window.
284
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
In OnScreen, a Macro is a sequence of
keystrokes or actions tied to a button. The
Macro is initiated by selecting the button.
A virtually unlimited number of user-defined
panels can be created. Each panel can group
keys that support actions such as: Application
macros, Commands, Keystroke sequences,
names, addresses, pre-defined paragraphs,
letters, and even launch Programs.
Click on the Select Macro Panel Pull-down
box to choose an existing panel.
Click on Add A Panel to add a new panel.
Click on Delete Panel to delete the current
panel.
Click on Document Panel to create
documentation for the selected panel.
Click on Document All Panels to create
documentation for all Macro Panels.
285
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
The selected Macro Panel is displayed on the
right. Click on the top button to modify
features & properties of the Macro Panel, and
click on any button to create / edit the Macro
triggered by that button. The Main Macro
Panel cannot be deleted, however all of its keys
may be changed (except the panel (top) key).
Advanced Notes: The panels included
have been setup with various options to
help illustrate the functions available. They
may be changed or deleted as you desire.
When running OnScreen, clicking the top
panel of the Main Macro panel will open
OnScreen Setup and go directly to
Build-A-Macro. This is useful for fast
macro panel / button changes. Macro
Panels may be nested up to ten levels.
Clicking on the top button of a nested
panel will return to the previous panel,
which is a shortcut for advanced users. In
general, it is better to use a button to
286
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
indicate the panel to open.
Limitations
There is an upper limit of 2000 characters
maintained by the Build-A-Macro section of
OnScreen. This amount was arbitrarily selected
as enough keystrokes to do just about any kind
of task. Note that one character can result in as
many as 10 keystrokes being required to
generate the character via the selected active
keyboard layout in Windows. Therefore it is
possible that a large amount of text may
overflow the 32000 bytes reserved for these
macros (i.e. 3 bytes per keystroke x 10
keystrokes x 1000 characters). If these limits
are reached during macro operation, the
following issues may be relevant:
287
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
Not all characters may be generated from the
saved Macro
•
The Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys may be in an
undefined state.
•
Any additional keystrokes or macros may
not operate properly until the Shift, Alt &
Ctrl keys are synchronized to the system.
•
Only characters not represented by the active
keyboard layout require may push these
limits - either limit the macro character size
to under 500 characters, or select a more
appropriate keyboard layout for the
characters required.
Steps to create a new Macro panel and insert a
new Macro.
Click on Add a Panel.
In the new dialog box, add a 5 character
identifier, for example Word.
288
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
In the Macro Panel Description, enter some
information for your own use, for example
Word for Windows.
Press the OK Button.
On the right side of the dialog box, a blank
Macro panel will appear.
Click on the first button (top left corner).
A new dialog box opens. Here you define your
Macro Button.
First, enter a key label, for example Open.
Under Key Description [Quick Help], enter
what you would like to appear in the quick
help bar on top of OnScreen.
Under This Key will... select which option you
would like the button to perform.
In this case, you want to launch an application.
Click on Launch an Application.
289
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
If you do not know the correct path for your
application, find the applications executable
file by using the browse button.
Click on the OK Button.
Verify your action.
Steps to create a keystroke Macro.
•
Press on the next empty button.
•
Under key label, enter "PreVu".
•
Under description, enter "Shows a Print
Preview".
•
Click on Activate Keystroke Macro.
•
Click on Zoom.
Here you will create your keystroke Macro.
•
Use the up-and-down arrows to select the
appropriate keystrokes.
290
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
In this case, double-click on Alt-Down to
insert the keystroke (i.e. pressing the Alt
button down).
•
Now, double-click on the letter F.
•
Now, release the Alt button by
double-clicking on Alt-Up.
•
Finally, double-click on the letter v.
•
This Macro will bring up the Print Preview
while running MS Word!
•
Click on the OK Button.
•
Verify your action.
Information on Advanced
Macro Editing
When working with Macro Panels, there are
291
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
various advanced options available to manage
the panels, including documenting every detail
of the panel (or panels) as a text file.
Add-A-Macro Dialog Box
Macro Panel ID
Enter a five letter identifier for your new Macro
Panel.
This identifier will appear on the top button or
your new Macro Panel.
292
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Macro Panel Description
Enter a description for your new panel. This
description will appear in the Quick Help bar
when activated.
Click on the OK Button to save the current
options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the &
cancel the Add operation.
Once you have added a panel, it will be
automatically selected for editing.
293
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box
Delete this Macro Panel?
The Macro panel named in the box below
Macro Panel ID will be deleted.
294
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Warning
Use with extreme
caution. Once the panel
is deleted, it cannot be
recovered! Press the
OK Button to Delete the
Selected Macro Panel. If
you do not want to
delete your panel, press
the CANCEL button.
Note: You cannot delete the Main Macro
Panel.
Document Macro Dialog
295
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Box
The documentation will correspond to the
selected Macro Panel.
Post to Clipboard
Click on this button to Post the Panel
Documentation onto the Windows Clipboard.
You may then paste the textual information
into any word processor, or other application
that uses text.
Save to File
This will open the File Save Dialog which will
allow you to save the textual Panel
Documentation to a file & save the information
296
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
to disk.
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog
& cancel the documentation operation.
Document All Macros
Dialog Box
The documentation contains All Panel
documentation for All Macro Panels.
Post to Clipboard
Click on this button to Post the All Panel
Documentation onto the Windows Clipboard.
You may then paste the textual information
297
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
into any word processor, or other application
that uses text.
Save to File
This will open the File Save Dialog which will
allow you to save All the textual Panel
Documentation to a file & save the information
to disk.
Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog
& cancel the documentation operation.
Documentation File Save
Dialog Box
You may simply enter the name of the file
name you wish to save in the File Name box on
the left, or select the file name from an existing
file in your system. Once you have entered or
selected the name, click on the OK Button to
298
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
save the file. Press the CANCEL button to
Close the Dialog & cancel the File Save
operation.
Macro Key Dialog Box
Key Identifiers
Enter a key label. This label will appear on the
key in the Macro Panel. Enter a key
299
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
description. The key description will appear in
the Quick Help bar.
This key will...
Activate Keystroke Macro
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to
create a Macro consisting of keystrokes. Use
the edit box below (Keystroke Macro) to enter
your Macro, or press Zoom to use the Macro
Editor. You may use any Windows supported
ANSI characters.
Note: As keys are entered, characters are
treated as both the press and release
events. Case is preserved, and Caps Lock
is assumed OFF when playing back the
macro. Therefore, using lowercase
characters is preferred. If a Keystroke
macro is initiated with the Caps Lock on,
then the Macro WILL be affected and the
end-result may not be as originally
300
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
intended!
Open Macro Panel
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to open
another panel. Enter the Macro name in the
edit box below (Macro Panel), or press Select
to select an existing Macro Panel.
Launch Application
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to
assign an application to your Macro button.
Enter the application name and path in the edit
box below (Application), or press Browse to
select an application. You may also enter a
Working Directory, which will be the current
directory used by the Application once it is
launched. Short file names are used for
maximum compatibility.
User Notes / Details
301
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
You may enter helpful information, notes, or
details regarding the settings for this key. This
is used only for reference and will appear on
the Panel Documentation.
Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate
the text. This may help you enter information
& interact with other Windows applications.
Copy Key, Paste Key, Clear Key
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate
& operate within OnScreen Setup / Macro Key
Editing. For example, you could Copy Key
information from an existing panel to be pasted
into another Macro Panel.
Click on the OK Button to save the current
options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the
Dialog & cancel any changes.
302
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Macro Panel Dialog Box
When you click on the top button of a Macro
Panel in OnScreen Setup, you may edit the
Panel settings for the current Macro Panel.
Panel Label
Enter a panel label. This label will appear on
the top key in the Macro Panel.
Enter a panel description. The panel
303
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
description will appear in the Quick Help bar,
if it is open.
This panel will...
Open
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to open
this Macro Panel. This means no additional
action will occur when the panel is opened.
Open and launch Application
Click on this Radio-Button if you want to
assign an application to this Macro Panel.
Enter the application name and path in the edit
box below (Application), or press Browse to
select an application. You may also enter a
Working Directory that will become the
current directory when the Application is
launched. When accessed, the panel will open
& then automatically launch the application.
Open When Window Active
304
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Click on this Radio-Button if you want your
Macro Panel to be open as soon as the
application is opened. Enter the application
name in the edit box below Window Name, or
press Select to choose from currently active
windows. You MUST take the Window name
from the caption bar of your application. It
MUST appear exactly as on the caption bar.
For example, the caption bar title for this help
file is "Macro Panel Dialog Box". The name
entered should not have information including
a current file name, or open document. You
may also shorten the name to provide
additional functionality. For example, if you
enter the name as "Word", the Macro Panel
will automatically enter when the Microsoft
Word, WordPad, or WordPerfect is active.
Note: Because of the system memory
required for this operation and constant
monitoring, it will affect the system speed!
305
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
User Notes / Details
You may enter helpful information, notes, or
details regarding the settings for this panel.
This is only used for reference and to appear
on the Panel Documentation.
Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate
the text. This may help you enter information
& interact with other Windows applications.
Copy Panel, Paste Panel, Clear Panel
These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate
& operate within OnScreen Setup / Panel
Editing. For example, you could Copy Panel
information from an existing panel to be pasted
into a newly created panel.
Click on the OK Button to save the current
options.
306
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the
Dialog & cancel any changes.
Macro Zoom Dialog Box
Key Label
Key label will show which button is currently
edited.
Key Description
307
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Enter a detailed description (will appear on
Quick Help).
In order to create a keystroke Macro follow
these steps:
There are six vertical selection lists in the
bottom left corner of the dialog box. Select &
double-click to add to the Keystroke Macro.
•
Use the up-and-down arrows to select the
appropriate keystrokes, then double-click to
enter into the Keystroke Macro.
•
For example, double-click on Alt-Down to
simulate pressing the Alt button down.
•
Now, double-click on the letter F.
•
Now, release the Alt button by
double-clicking on Alt-Up.
•
Finally, double-click on the letter v.
308
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
•
This Macro [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]v will
bring up the Print Preview while running
MS Word!
You may edit the Keystroke Macro directly in
the Edit window. You may wish to refer to the
Advanced User Notes for options & details
regarding the keystroke macros.
Reserved words in brackets [ ] will only
function properly when typed exactly! They
may be used to indicate combination
keystrokes. For example, to execute Ctrl-S it
must appear as [Ctrl-Down]s[Ctrl-Up]. This
allows you to execute more than one character
with the combination key depressed.
NOTE: For proper operation, you must have
EVERY keystroke required! (Don’t forget
[Enter]) If the macro does not operate as
desired, review & verify that each keystroke
and the sequence of keystrokes is accurate.
Also make sure that the correct Application is
309
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Active when the Macro is initiated.
There are seven buttons with standard editing
options:
CUT - Cuts the highlighted portion of a Macro.
COPY - Copies the highlighted portion of a
Macro.
PASTE - Pastes the highlighted portion of a
Macro (must be preceded by a CUT or COPY).
DELETE - Deletes the highlighted portion of a
Macro. (UNDO will not recover!)
UNDO - Undoes the previous operation (like a
CUT OR DELETE).
SELECT ALL - Selects the whole Macro.
OPTIONS - Changes to a different set of seven
editing buttons.
There are seven buttons with advanced editing
options (Useful if you are pasting in text from
310
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
other applications):
CLEAR ALL - Clears the editing Window,
even if nothing is highlighted. (Erases the
entire macro).
CR - Changes carriage returns to [Enter].
(ANSI character 13)
CRLF - Changes carriage return-line feed to
[Enter}. (ANSI characters 13 10)
TAB - Changes tab to [Tab]. (ANSI character
9)
STRIP - Strips all ANSI characters. (Removes
all non-ANSI characters from text)
ALL - Does all of the above (CRLF, TAB,
STRIP)
EDITING - Returns to the previous seven
buttons.
The Open and Save buttons are available as
conveniences for developers using the
311
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
MACROBAT and other IMG utilities. These
will use the Zoom Edit screen as an the Editing
area - Open will open, read, and place the
contents of a previously Saved Macro into the
Zoom Edit area. The KMF (Keyboard Macro
File) format is used.
The special selections [Time], [Date], and
[Pause] can be used as follows: [Time] and
[Date] insert the current system time as
formatted via the System Information panel
(formatted as set in the Windows Regional
Settings).
[Pause] inserts an "empty" keystroke in the
sequence of keystrokes. This is a special option
along with other specialty macros otherwise
undocumented.
Click on the OK Button to save the current
options.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the
312
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialog & cancel any changes.
Macro Select Dialog Box
Use the up-and-down arrows or your Mouse to
select one of the existing Macro panels.
Press Enter, or click on OK Button.
Click on the CANCEL button to Close the
Dialog & cancel any selection.
313
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Active Window Dialog Box
This list shows all of the current active
windows running on your system. You may
select the Window Name from the list. You
may wish to modify the name to remove any
open documents, or other information that may
change. OnScreen must have an exact match to
recognize the need to automatically open the
Macro Panel.
Once you have found the name double click on
it or highlight your selection & click on the OK
Button. Press the CANCEL button to Close the
314
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Dialog & cancel the Select operation.
Browse Programs Dialog Box
This opens the OnScreen Browse that allows
you to select from available programs on your
system. Short file names are used for
maximum compatibility. Once you have found
the name of the program to run double click on
it or highlight your selection & click on the
Open Button Press the Cancel button to Close
the Dialog & cancel the Browse operation.
315
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Basic Mouse Buttons
Click on the Mouse Buttons Button
Important: The term Mouse is used
generically for any pointing device that
moves the cursor (mouse pointer) within
Windows. For Pen and Touchscreen
316
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
drivers, often only 1 button is available
(Left Button): In all cases, the Left Button
should be selected as the Action button.
Select Mouse Button to use on OnScreen
OnScreen lets you define which button on your
Mouse (or other pointing device) is going to be
used as a point-and-click button. This button
will be the execution button that presses on a
OnScreen button. Select Left Mouse Button for
standard operation, or Select Right Mouse
Button.
Important Note: You may also use the
Swap Mouse Buttons option available in
the Windows Control Panel, but this will
affect the operation throughout Windows.
This OnScreen setting only affects
OnScreen operation.
317
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Note: In the Advanced Mode, OnScreen
lets you define functions for all your Mouse
buttons (2 or 3 button Mice). This can
make you work more efficiently by
eliminating frequently used tasks and key
combinations.
Configure your Mouse
Buttons
Click on the Mouse Buttons Button
318
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Important: The term Mouse is used
generically for any pointing device that
moves the cursor (mouse pointer) within
Windows. For Pen and Touchscreen
drivers, often only 1 button is available
(Left Button): In all cases, the Left Button
should be selected as the Action button.
OnScreen lets you define functions for all your
Mouse buttons (2 or 3 button Mice). This can
319
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
make you work more efficiently by eliminating
frequently used tasks and key combinations.
Select Mouse Button to use on OnScreen
Here you define which button on your Mouse
is going to be used as a point-and-click button.
This button will be the execution button.
Select Type of Mouse
If you have a two-button Mouse, click on
2-Button Mouse. If you have a three-button
Mouse, click on 3-Button Mouse.
Note: If you have a three button Mouse,
be sure that you are loading the correct
driver. If you are loading a two-button
Mouse driver with a three-button Mouse,
you will not be able to use the middle
button. Go to Windows Control Panel |
Mouse to install a different Mouse driver.
320
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Mouse Button Action Pull-down Boxes In
order to assign a different function to the
OnScreen Mouse buttons, do the following
steps:
1. Click on the down-arrow of the 1st
Pull-down box.
2. Use the scroll-bar to scroll up and down
within the Pull-down box.
3. Select a function by clicking on its name.
4. Press the OK Button.
5. Repeat the steps 1-4 on the 2nd Pull-down
box.
6. Press the OK Button.
7. If you do not want to change the current
Mouse buttons setup, press the CANCEL
button.
321
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
This functionality is only available while your
Mouse pointer is over OnScreen.
Some of these actions are:
1. Ignore the button press (no reaction at all)
2. Move OnScreen around the screen (click
and drag)
3. Look Thru OnScreen (while holding the
button down you will be able to see the
screen behind OnScreen)
4. Open the OnScreen Menu
5. Minimize OnScreen
6. Choose from a list of single or
combination keystrokes, such as [Enter],
[F1], [Alt-F4], etc.
Enable Dwell Button Press - When enabled,
and the mouse cursor (pointer) hovers (dwells)
over OnScreen, a timer based on the "Delay for
322
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Auto Press" will begin and continue to count
down as long as the pointer itself stays within
the "Jitter Distance (Pixels)" from the starting
point. Once the delay expires, and automatic
Action button press will occur (i.e. Left Button
press) at the starting point. This allows a user
to operate OnScreen simply by hovering over
select keys or buttons for the delay period.
Note: The actual button press occurs at
the original point tracked when the delay
timer begins, not the position of the mouse
cursor at the end of the delay timer
Jitter Distance: Care should be taken to
make sure this value is as small as
possible that allows the user to be
effective. As the setting gets larger, it is
possible to visually be over a different key
when the mouse button occurs on the
323
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
original key when the delay timer started.
In order to assist users with mouse control
difficulties, this aspect may affect users
who have good mouse control. Therefore,
it is important to take the time to set the
correct Dwell timing and Jitter distance for
a particular user.
Note: If the mouse cursor moves off of
OnScreen, the dwell timer stops.
OnScreen uses a visual display highlight to
indicate the key that is currently selected by the
dwell timer, and uses a diminishing rectangle.
When the rectangle diminishes to nothing, the
button press will occur. The visual result will
be slightly different if Key Highlighting is
enabled. The display itself is a percentage
based on the dwell timer, so a longer timer
324
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
period will cause the rectangle to diminish
slower.
Select the Cursor and Icon
OnScreen enables you to select different
Cursors and different Icons for use with
OnScreen.
Cursors
There are 12 Cursors available; 4 right-handed,
325
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
4 left handed Cursors, and 4 specialty Cursors.
They are on the right side, titled "Cursors". In
order to select a Cursor, do the following steps:
1. Click on one of the 12 cursor pictures; it
will be framed by a black rectangle.
2. Press the OK Button.
3. If you do not want to change the current
layout, press the CANCEL button.
Note: For Touchscreen & Pen based
systems, the "Blank" or "Invisible" cursor
should be used if other applications do not
show a cursor when in use. Otherwise,
select the most appropriate cursor from
those available.
Icons
326
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
There are 3 Icons available. They are on the
left side titled "Icons". In order to select an
Icon, do the following steps:
1. Click on one of the 3 Icon pictures; it will
be framed by a black rectangle.
2. Press the OK.Button.
3. If you do not want to change the current
layout, press the CANCEL button.
Note: The Icon is only used for the
Minimize to Icon option in Configuration.
327
Chapter 5. OnScreen Setup
Exit OnScreen
Click on the Exit Button
This will exit OnScreen Setup and Close the
OnScreen Setup Window.
328
Chapter 6. OnScreen
Logon Utilities
OnScreen Logon Utilities
Overview
The OnScreen Logon Utilities enable complete
operation from a pointing device, allowing
secure logons to network & workstations via
the on-screen keyboard interface. Because of
fundamental differences in operation and
security between the Windows 2000 / XP and
Windows Vista / 7 / 8 platforms, please refer to
the appropriate version and help sections when
referencing the Logon Utilities. For support of
Windows Vista / 7, please refer to version 1.79
or 1.78. For support on Windows 95/98/Me &
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
Windows NT, please refer to version 1.77 or
earlier.
Important Notes
•
The proper configuration and
implementation of this utility requires a user
with Administrator rights
•
Proper licensing is required or the Logon
module will revert to a demonstration and
eventually disable itself
•
All configuration should be done via the
OnScreen Logon Utilities program
accessible from the Program Menu for
OnScreen
•
In Windows Vista, Microsoft completely
changed the approach used for Logon, and
no longer supports the GINA interface used
for 2000 / XP. Refer to the OnScreen Logon
Utilities for Windows 8 below.
330
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
OnScreen Logon Utilities for
Windows 8
The OnScreen Logon Utilities for Windows 8
have been provided to bring flexibility to the
implementation of Pen and Touchscreen
systems without requiring a physical keyboard.
By using the OnScreen Logon Utilities, the
following benefits can be realized:
•
Consistency in the user interface
•
Flexibility for different screen resolutions
and user interfaces
•
Secure Logon operation without the need for
a physical keyboard
•
Control of user input options may provide
additional security (e.g. limiting keyboard
layout in conjunction with other logon
authentication tools)
331
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
OnScreen can also interact with the new Start
Screen and provide several options to
customize the logon/startup sequence.
In addition, the Automatic Logon option has
also been incorporated as a convenience within
this utility, allowing a fixed user/password
combination to start up Windows 8 without any
user interaction required.
Important Notes
•
The proper configuration and
implementation of this utility requires a user
with Administrator rights
•
Proper licensing is required or the Logon
module will revert to a demonstration and
eventually disable itself
•
All configuration should be done via the
OnScreen Logon Utilities program
accessible from the Program Menu for
332
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
OnScreen
Windows Logon Setup
Options
When configuring the OnScreen Logon
Utilities, there are 3 options available (listed
based on common usage):
1. Setup Start Screen Options
333
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
2. Setup / Configure Logon Utility
3. Setup Automatic Logon
Setup Start Screen Options provides ways to
start OnScreen in conjunction with the
Windows Start Screen (Windows 8 Start Menu)
- options available include the capability of
bypassing the Start Screen and going direct to
the Desktop, starting minimized, and opening
without the normal splash screen.
Setup / Configure Logon Utility enables
options prior to running OnScreen after the
user has logged onto the system. There are
various security options that can affect the way
the system is used, and this allows the
keyboard to be available at secured screens,
along with a way to generate a Ctrl-Alt-Delete
option when a system is secured with this
requirement.
Setup Automatic Logon is an option to allow
334
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
modification to the built-in Windows option
that allows Automatic logon - this is a
convenience tool for System Administrators.
Configure Start Screen
Options
•
Open OnScreen Logon Utilities from Start
Menu | (All) Programs | OnScreen
•
Select Setup Start Screen Options
When running the Keyboard at the Start Screen
335
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
is enabled, there are 3 options available
1. Automatically go to Desktop
2. Start Minimized
3. Start without Opening Splash Screen
The additional actions/options are disabled
unless the Enable Keyboard at Start Screen is
checked On.
Check Enable Keyboard at Start Screen On to
enable the automatic startup of OnScreen after
the user logon and during the display of the
Start Screen. With no other options selected,
OnScreen will appear as it is currently
configured.
Each option is independently selectable and
can be selected in any combination.
Automatically go to Desktop inserts a Win-D
keystroke combination into the system, and
336
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
will take the logged on user directly to the
Windows Desktop screen.
Start Minimized - when selected, this will
start OnScreen and then display in the
currently configured minimized state. Note
some minimize options may not be available /
visible at the Start Screen (e.g. if you do not
select Automatically go to Desktop). It is
recommended that the Button or Window
option be used if this option is selected.
Start without Opening Splash Screen
bypasses the splash screen opening when being
launched via this feature.
Technical Notes: The older Windows
StartUp Group option will not launch an
application until the user goes to the
Desktop. These Start Screen options
provide additional features and capabilities
by integrating with newer Windows
capabilities via the Ease of Access tools.
337
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
The actual file ONSCREEN_RUN.EXE is
used to launch OnScreen in different ways
based on options set via the OnScreen
Logon Utilities | Setup Start Screen
options. The program uses mutexes and
command line options to launch
OnScreen. This is configured at
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Micr
NT\CurrentVersion\Accessibility\ATs\img_my
t-soft_v180 and configured to run in the
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\Micro
NT\CurrentVersion\Accessibility via the
Configuration Key. If used, this should be
disabled prior to un-installing the software
- no accommodation to remove this
registry entry is performed, so if this option
is in use and the software is uninstalled,
this entry will remain. However, with the
software removed, its existence will have
no affect on the system, although it will
appear in Ease of Access under keyboard
options.
338
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
Setup / Configure Logon
Utility
There is 1 option available - Setup / Configure
Logon Utility (My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard Logon)
The My-T-Soft 2 software used which allows
customized layouts of the logon keyboard, an
the My-T-Soft 2 approach enables the use of a
My-T-Soft 2 keyboard during the secure logon
sequence. The keyboard can be modified with
IMG’s "Build-A-Board" (ANSI 2.10 version).
339
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
There is 1 section available with 2 options
•
Use Onscreen Keyboard at Logon Screens
Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry
When Enable Onscreen Keyboard Logon is
checked "On", the default logon options are
used, but the My-T-Soft (version 2) keyboard is
displayed within the secure logon screens. The
keyboard layout may be modified with IMG’s
"Build-A-Board." See below for options
specific to the My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard.
Use Onscreen Keyboard for data entry
My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard options
340
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
There are 2 approaches available when
My-T-Soft 2 is selected for displaying the
keyboard layout (i.e. what the user sees).
My-T-Soft 2 is the next generation of the
popular OnScreen keyboards, and has a more
flexible approach to designing and operating
keyboard layouts. To address customers who
want customized and specialized layouts,
My-T-Soft 2 can read Build-A-Board layouts
(ANSI 210) along with Original KBF files
(layouts for My-T-Mouse, My-T-Touch,
My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft and OnScreen).
There are 3 generic Build-A-Board layouts
provided - Small Keyboard, Medium
Keyboard, and Large Keyboard. Small
works well for pen system and Large is better
for touchscreens & fingers, but the actual
resolution of the display will determine the
best choice.
There are also 2 options available for dealing
341
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
with Original layouts (NOTE: These layouts
only display the alphabetic portion of the
keyboard). Select Default 101, Current
language to use a preset standard 101
keyboard configuration with the currently
selected language/layout in
My-T-Soft/My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. If you need
a different size, you have the option of
selecting Copy of Current Layout to copy the
current saved layout. This current saved layout
is the KEYBOARD.KBF in the installation
directory. To update the layout, run
My-T-Pen/My-T-Touch/My-T-Soft, select a
different size, then open the menu
(middle-button of tool bar), and select Current
Settings | Save Current Settings. Run the
Logon Utilities, and select Copy of Current
Layout, then click OK (this will copy the
KEYBOARD.KBF into the LOGON folder).
Enable CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility
342
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
When enabled, a utility with a screen displayed
large red button is used and available at the
separate Ctrl-Alt-Del screen. It is important to
understand this is not a security solution, but a
utility for systems that need to operate in
situations where security policies have
machines that display this screen. It is
recommended that the Ctrl-Alt-Del
requirement be removed (see below for further
information and how to configure a system to
remove this screen). In instances when a
system will display the CTRL+ALT+DEL
screen, this Logon Utility can be enabled, and
will provide a way for a touchscreen/pen based
user to generate the system notification and
bypass the screen.
Note: User Account control must be
enabled (it cannot be Off) for the system to
generate the Secure Attention Sequence
(SAS). Also, the system SAS.DLL must be
343
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
present on the system (Originally included
with Windows 7 - Windows Vista users
should apply Service Packs or refer to
Microsoft)
Technical Notes: There is a Group Policy
/ Security setting that can affect the
operation of this feature. Refer to the
Group Policy Editor (GPE) Microsoft
Management Console (MMC) snap-in at
Computer Configuration | Administrative
Templates | Windows Components |
Windows Logon Options | Disable or
enable software Secure Attention
sequence. If this is disabled, the SendSAS
via the SAS.DLL will not operate,
preventing the CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon
Utility from operating as intended.
The CADBTN.exe is configured at
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Micr
344
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
NT\CurrentVersion\Accessibility\ATs\img_my
t-soft_v220 and configured to run in the
HKEY_CURRENT_USER and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE via the
Configuration Key at
SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows
NT\CurrentVersion\Accessibility. It will
appear in the Ease of Access under
keyboard options, but for best results,
enable/disable via the OnScreen Logon
Utilities.
Keyboard Logon Technical Notes
The My-T-Soft 2 option for the Logon portion
of Windows 8 uses MTS2.EXE, a special build
of My-T-Soft 2 for this usage. The layout
displayed by My-T-Soft 2 is the
KEYBOARD.KBF file in the LOGON folder
under the installation directory. The above
options in the Logon Utilities handle this
345
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
manipulation for you. If you use
Build-A-Board to create your own layout, you
will want to copy your "built" layout into the
LOGON folder, AFTER selecting the
My-T-Soft 2 option in the Logon Utilities.
Note that if you re-run the Logon Utilities, and
click OK on the Setup/Configuration screen,
your "built" layout will be copied over! For
reference, or if you want to take over the
pre-built layouts, this lists the file names and
their associated selection in the Logon
Utilities:
Small Keyboard =
LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML =>
LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Medium Keyboard =
LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED =>
LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Large Keyboard =
LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG =>
346
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Default 101 = LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG =>
LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Copy of Current Layout = KEYBOARD.KBF
=> LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF
Note: ConfigPath changes - The Setting
of ConfigPath in the Initialization file can
change where the Copy of Current Layout
uses when copying the "current" layout.
This is based on the ConfigPath setting
and the current user. In general, the
default, and any ConfigPath setting other
than ConfigPath=0 will result in copying
the current user’s layout and INI into the
Installation Folder. This will also have a
result of creating a new "default" layout &
configuration (e.g. KEYBOARD.KBF and
INI file), which will consequently be used
for any new users running the My-T-Soft
software on the desktop (assuming they
347
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
don’t already have a current
configuration). In other words, if the Copy
of Current Layout is selected, from then on
the Logon layout AND the default
OnScreen layout will be this Current
Layout when ConfigPath is set to anything
but 0. For further details on ConfigPath,
see the Initialization File Documentation.
The Small Keyboard layout project
(Build-A-Board 2.10) is included as
KEYBOARD.ZIP in the LOGON folder. The
larger layouts were simply resized & cleaned
up with a larger font selected.
Older KBF/KMF support
My-T-Soft 2 can read & operate older (i.e.
pre-version 2.00) layouts, and this approach is
used for the "Original Layout" selections. This
option is included for 2 main reasons. 1) Easier
way to select different sizes, and 2) Match
348
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
selected keyboard layout in both Logon and
Desktop operation. For example, if you have a
Dutch layout on your desktop, when one of
these options is selected, the same layout (i.e.
KMF) will be used for the Logon keyboard.
Note: There are some limitations with the
My-T-Soft 2 handling of older layouts:
The Shift-AltGr states require selecting
Shift, then AltGr.
Caps-Lock display always uses the Shift
label, and some keys may show an
incorrect label vs. the character generated
by the keystroke.
The default font will not handle non-ANSI
layouts correctly.
Positioning
349
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
If you do not have Build-A-Board, and wish to
change the opening position of the
Small/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts,
there is a basic utility called
KBFLOGON.EXE in the LOGON folder. You
can access this by clicking on Update
Opening Position (Build-A-Board Layouts).
By running this utility, you can change the
opening X / Y position of the current selected
Build-A-Board layout to match your screen
orientation & resolution.
Original layouts are treated differently, and are
centered horizontally and position at the
bottom of the screen. The KBFLOGON.EXE
will not affect this positioning, and should not
350
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
be used for these layouts.
Advanced Technical Notes: Starting in
Windows Vista, the older GINA WinLogon
interface was removed, and a more
flexible "Credential Provider" interface was
created. The DLL that manages and runs
the My-T-Soft software (keyboard) in the
logon context is the
IMGLogonProvider.DLL. (Note: for 64-bit
systems, this must be a native 64-bit
compiled DLL - 1.78 Release 4 provided a
user-installable update, and the 1.79
includes both 32-bit & 64-bit versions).
The Credential Providers are listed as
classes in the registry at
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Micr
Providers, and the class ID for the
IMGLogonProvider.dll is {CEE78DCC539B-4b6c-B829-21D189C5112F} This
entry must be in place, and the CLSID
entries in the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT
must also be set for proper operation and
351
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
integration into the system via the
Credential Provider interface.
Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement
In the Windows NT/GINA model, the
Ctrl-Alt-Delete special keyboard sequence
created a Secure Attention Sequence
(SAS). In the newer Windows security
model, the Ctrl-Alt-Delete is a separate
screen. This added security is for the
physical keyboard only - if the virtual
keyboard is allowed to bypass this screen,
no additional security improvement results.
You can simply disable it via Local Security
Policy - see Control Panel | System
Maintenance | Administrative Tools | Local
Security Policy - Local Policies | Security
Options | "Interactive Logon: Do not
require CTRL+ALT+DEL" | Enabled. You
can also use Start Menu | in the search
box, type netplwiz[Enter], and refer to
the Advanced tab. Alternatively, to quickly
access the setting, use the Start Menu |
352
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
then type secpol.msc[Enter], then go
into Local Policies | Security Options and
find the setting for: "Interactive Logon: Do
not require CTRL+ALT+DEL", and set to
Enabled | OK.
The reason the keyboard sequence
Ctrl-Alt-Delete was chosen is the keyboard
interface (going back to the original IBM
PC) generates a hardware interrupt for this
keystroke combination. In a secured
system, the ONLY way this hardware
interrupt could occur is if someone was
physically at the keyboard, pressing those
keys. Because of the physical security this
provided (i.e. a remote user could not
generate this sequence), this became the
event that triggered the logon request for
user name/password.
In the newer logon model, if the user via
the virtual keyboard can bypass this
screen, there is absolutely no additional
physical security (i.e. on a system where
353
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
the physical keyboard will NOT be used to
bypass this screen). The only change is
the extra screen step. The critical issue to
understand is no security benefit occurs if
a software only option is allowed to
mimic/bypass this hardware interrupt
based event - it ends up being just another
screen. The real issue is security vs.
expectations of security, and human
inertia (i.e. familiarity with the older GINA
approach). If there is just an expectation,
or inertia, that the Ctrl-Alt-Del provides
real security when accessed via the
touchscreen keyboard (or the
CTRL+ALT+DEL Logon Utility), then it is
important to review and understand the
architecture and structure & and security
provisions within a Windows based
system.
If a physical component is necessary (and
you do not or can not use the physical
keyboard), then for a true/secure
approach, a smart card, biometric, or
354
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
other physical approach may be required.
There really is no additional "security" that
the keyboard software can provide (with or
without the Ctrl-Alt-Del requirement).
Because it is possible there are system
wide security options that may affect
systems with OnScreen installed, this
feature is available, but unless there are
these type of requirements, it is
recommended that the CTRL+ALT+DEL
option not be used.
Configure Automatic
Logon for Windows
•
Open OnScreen Logon Utilities from Start
Menu | (All) Programs | OnScreen
355
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
•
Select Setup Automatic Logon
There are 3 options available
1. Enable Auto Logon
2. Default Logon Name
3. Default Password
The Name and Password fields are disabled
unless the Enable Auto Logon is checked On.
Check Enable Auto Logon On to enable the
automatic logon of the Default User / Default
Password combination. You must enter a valid
User Name along with the proper Password to
356
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
ensure proper operation of the Automatic
Logon.
Notes:
•
If the Default User Name has a blank
Password, this option will only work once the next time you turn on the system, the
Name / Password Logon screen will appear.
A Password must be entered to ensure
proper operation of the Automatic Logon.
•
You must have Administrator Rights to
update the system with any changes.
Technical Notes: This section and
settings are just a convenient user
interface to registry settings specified by
Microsoft (dating back to Window NT) to
allow an automatic user logon. There are
security issues - check with a System
Administrator if there are any questions
about using this convenience feature.
357
Chapter 6. OnScreen Logon Utilities
There are 3 entries affected by this
section: DefaultUserName, DefaultPassword, and AutoAdminLogon in the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Microso
NT/CurrentVersion/WinLogon registry key.
When enabled, AutoAdminLogon=1, and
when disabled, AutoAdminLogon=0. The
DefaultPassword entry is stored as plain
text. For an automatic logon,
AutoAdminLogon=1, and a valid
DefaultUserName with correct
DefaultPassword must be set.
358
Part III.
OnScreen
Technical
Documentation
Advanced User
Notes, Technical
Documentation,
File Information,
and various Other
Information about
OnScreen.
Chapter 7 - Advanced User Notes details
additional product information, Final Release
Notes, Technical Notes, Developer
information, product history, and Customer
Suggestions.
Chapter 8 - Files & File Notes & Installation
Information lists all files, general information,
location, along with usage details. Additional
Installation Information is also included here.
Chapter 9 - Operation Notes is a collection
of specific issues, advanced notes, and
additional documentation on Build-A-Macro,
Command Line options, Sounds, and
Build-A-Board support.
Chapter 10 - Initialization File
Documentation provides comprehensive
technical documentation on all the
configuration settings available in the
ONSCREEN.INI file, along with other
advanced user notes.
Chapter 11 - Error Messages and Numbers
lists all internal errors, number references, and
possible solutions if these errors are
experienced.
Chapter 7. Advanced
User Notes
Advanced User Notes &
Information
The Advanced User Notes and Technical
Documentation covers a wide-range of topics
& information. It is important to understand
that most users will simply type with the
software, so detailing all of the features,
options, settings in the standard product help
would overwhelm the majority of users.
Note: For up-to-date information, and
other specific technical issues, it will
always be important to refer to the on-line
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
support database at
http://www.imgpresents.com/imgfaq.htm
If you have been referred to this section, or
have been unable to resolve your question(s) or
problems within this manual, on-line help, and
tutorial, or are an advanced user familiar with
Windows Initialization files (INI type files), the
Registry, and wish to learn all of the OnScreen
configuration Options, please read the
following chapters. For developers, integrators,
or technicians, the following information
should be read in its entirety - also refer to the
Developer’s Kit for even more options & other
advanced information.
Note: Some of the notes contained here
date back to the original development in
1992. Certain information may be dated or
no longer relevant, but is kept for historical
363
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
reasons and as a reference back to the
actual implementation. This detail may
also help answer questions about settings
and features, and why things have been
done in a particular manner.
Final Release Notes
Specific Application Notes & Release
information are included in the
APPLICATION NOTES section below.
Quick Help is available only for the U.S.
Standard 101 Keyboard.
Gaps in version numbers usually caused by
OEM or non-public releases. List is
chronological from original public release.
Version 1.30 - Product release 1/30/94
364
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.31 - Changes for Trident 256-color
drivers in Display routines & Macro Panel
Updates. 3/31/94
Version 1.32 - Modification to keyboard
interface DLL for compatibility with Windows
95 August 24, 1995 release. 8/30/95
Version 1.35 - The INSTALL.EXE has been
removed, and SETUP.EXE has an installation
option. Several minor inconsistencies have
been corrected. 3/5/1996
Version 1.40 - Enhanced Graphics, 3 new sizes,
complete compatibility & enhancements for
Windows 95, multi-language versions, new
macro panels & features, and a whole lot more.
3/1/97
Version 1.41 - WordComplete, Action Panel,
Basic & Advanced Modes, and a wide range of
features based on beta-test feedback.
My-T-Soft AT 7/1/1997
365
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.42 - 1.44 - Various minor changes to
accommodate CrossScanner compatibility OnScreen / My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1997
Version 1.45 - Dwell timer added. OnScreen /
My-T-Soft AT finalized & released.
My-T-Soft AT 9/15/1997
Version 1.45 - Enhancements for operation
within Windows NT/2000. Incorporation of
features from My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen,
My-T-Soft AT. All basic operation confirmed.
Issues with certain dialog edit fields, some
window flash during typing, some
dialogs/message boxes lose input focus, no
logon support. 10/1/97
Version 1.46 - Various minor modifications. No
Splash Option, better operation with Menus,
flexibility added for non-type into windows,
default settings for common programs
included. 12/9/97
366
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.47 - Addition of NoType capability
to bypass other floating windows, custom logo
in operator mode, settings for Microsoft Office.
7/15/98
Version 1.49 - Complete change for lower level
interface into Windows, various new features,
advanced macro support, released for
integrators only (pre formal 1.50 public
release). 4/9/1998
Version 1.50 - Numerous additions, Windows
98 - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1998
Version 1.50 - All features tested & verified,
complete documentation update, all known
issues addressed, updated Developers Kit,
addition of Logon Utilities. 11/1/1998
Version 1.52 - Maintenance release, match to
commercial products - My-T-Soft AT 5/2/1999
Version 1.53 - Maintenance release, match to
commercial products - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1999
367
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.60 - WinLogon options, e-commerce
version, 11/1/99
Version 1.61 - Maintenance release,
AddFontResource removal, 2/1/2000
Version 1.67 - 3D Keys & infinite sizing,
Incorporation of Windows 95/98 software to
create retail version that allows install for
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000, software
distribution on CD, updates from 1.61 versions
of My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. 7/16/2000
Version 1.70 - Integration & updates to Logon
utilities for both 95/98/Me and NT/2000,
integration with My-T-Soft TS (Terminal
Server version), updated help, additional
keyboard layouts Win 2000 specific features,
modifications for non-mouse drivers.
3/17/2001
Version 1.70 - OnScreen merged with 1.70
code, added
368
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
WordList/TurnAwayScrlCrtl/Text-To-Speech.
7/17/2001
Version 1.73 - OnScreen minor updates,
changes to Text-To-Speech, integration with
CrossScanner various maintenance updates,
Terminal Server updates, etc. 3/17/2002
Version 1.75 - Various maintenance updates,
new features to OnScreen, help updates,
additional keyboards. 5/17/2002
Version 1.75a-1.75J - Several additional
settings & customizations for OEMs.
8/30/2002
Version 1.76 - Support for Build-A-Board
layouts for both Windows Logon
(IMGGINA2.DLL), and at run time
(My-T-Soft TS), maintenance updates.
11/17/2002
Version 1.77 - 104 key layouts, updates to 101
layouts, additional Spanish/German/French
369
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
layouts, Chinese/Japanese/Korean layouts,
customer requests & maintenance updates.
7/7/2003
Version 1.78 - Support for Windows Vista, user
configuration files, synchronization with
OnScreen release, Build-A-Board layout
selection, Download Manager (managed
updates), keyboard scanning, keyboard layout
updates, numerous customer requests and
maintenance updates. 4/18/2007
Version 1.78 Release 2 - Updates to keyboard
scanning, maintenance updates, integration
with Developer’s Kit 1.78 Release 3. 3/5/2008
Version 1.78 Release 3 - My-T-Soft TS and
My-T-Mouse releases, maintenance updates.
7/16/2009
Version 1.78 Release 4 - Updates to OnScreen
for scanning requests, Settings Import/Export,
Windows 7 compatibility 11/24/2009
370
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version 1.79 - MultiTouch support, Themes,
Logon Windows 64-bit support, maintenance
updates. 9/17/2012
Version 1.80 - Windows 8 compatibility.
Version 1.80 - 5/7/2013
Important User Notes
OnScreen WAS NOT intended to emulate the
Windows keyboard interface in its entirety.
Although OnScreen appears to operate just as
the keyboard does, due to its design, certain
applications may not function properly with
OnScreen. Special software considerations
have been made to make OnScreen as flexible
as possible, and the notes below offer
information on configuration settings that may
make OnScreen work within your applications.
371
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Also below is a complete discussion of
settings, options, and possible solutions to any
incompatibilities.
OnScreen WAS intended to make certain
operations easier because the user can
concentrate on the task at hand, not which
input device is required at the moment.
OnScreen allows the user to keep their eyes on
the screen, so the flow of work on a computer
is uninterrupted. In essence, OnScreen is just a
standard Windows application that provides
special functionality.
When asked "How do I do a right-click from
OnScreen?" we try to be patient and explain
that OnScreen is a text input tool, and not a
pointing device. The touchscreen / pen
interface replaces the desktop mouse as the
pointing device, and OnScreen replaces the
physical keyboard. You need a pointing device
to work with OnScreen, and if you can’t
372
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
perform a right-click with your pointing
device, you need to talk to the pointing device
vendor for options (or refer to IMG’s
TouchRight Utilities
(http://www.imgpresents.com/righttch/trt.htm)
which provides right-click options & tools for
pointing devices). Also note there are keyboard
short-cuts/options that can be used via
OnScreen to possibly resolve the underlying
access issue - Shift-F10 will open the context
menu (or the Properties key on the 104 layouts)
which often is what people want when asking
about the right-click action. Finally, look at a
standard physical keyboard, and find the
right-click button - it isn’t there (unless the
keyboard has some sort of pointing device
capability).
373
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Technical Notes
OnScreen is a standard Windows Application
and does not require any special drivers, and
should work with all keyboard and mouse
emulation drivers that are compatible with the
ones that ship with Microsoft Windows.
For other pointing devices, OnScreen calls and
uses the GetAsyncKeyState & GetKeyState
API calls for certain actions of the mouse.
These must be supported by the hardware &
driver emulating the mouse. The 1.40 release
addresses some of these limitations, and
OnScreen operates properly with
Joystick-To-Mouse, CrossScanner, Mouse
Keys, and other pointing methods that do not
use the actual mouse driver.
When working with Virtual Machines, certain
pointing device functions operate differently
because of the way the mouse integrates
374
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
through the virtual machine layer. Some
functions may not operate correctly, or the
virtual machine may need to be full screen (or
windowed) to operate correctly. We are aware
of issues with the Windows API ClipCursor
and SetMousePos when using VMWare and
Parallels virtual machines. These limitations
then affects the keyboard scanning feature
when running OnScreen in Windows within a
virtual machine.
Application Notes
THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFIC
APPLICATIONS IN WHICH OnScreen DOES
NOT NEED SPECIAL SETTINGS BUT IN
WHICH OnScreen REQUIRES
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
375
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Note: Because of the general
improvement by Microsoft & other
Windows developers, this list has not been
updated since the original releases. It
remains here as an appropriate place if
there are any specific applications that
require additional notes when operating
with OnScreen.
Dashboard for Windows
Publisher: Hewlett-Packard
Version: 2.0
Dashboard can cause some painting problems
when OnScreen is
launched from a Layout due to the way
Dashboard positions
opening windows. We suggest you set
OnScreen to open as a
376
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Normal Window, and position Dashboard away
from the center of
the screen.
MS-DOS Window
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
OnScreen will not work with a Full Screen
DOS application.
OnScreen will work with a DOS application in
a DOS Window.
There are a few items that should be noted
when using OnScreen
with a DOS Window. You may want to use a
PIF file for operating
a DOS Application in a DOS Window.
377
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
1. Keystroke Macros MUST BE ENTERED
IN LOWER CASE.
2. If the arrow or edit keys do not respond
properly, turn the Num Lock off.
Paintbrush, Solitaire, Reversi
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
The edit keys are used by these applications to
move the cursor.
Using the arrows, etc. on OnScreen will move
the Cursor onto the
Application, moving the cursor off OnScreen,
resulting in a very
short usefulness of OnScreen.
PC Tools for Windows
Publisher: Central Point
Version: 1.x, 2.0
378
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
When OnScreen is minimized to a button, the
OnScreen button
display can obscure some of the PC Tools
windows. Set
CaptionWatch=1 in the ONSCREEN.INI file to
alleviate any
interference.
PIF Editor
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
If you have built an Application Short-Cut key
with the PIF
Editor, it will not respond in all cases to the
Short-Cut if
typed on OnScreen.
Recorder
Publisher: Microsoft
379
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Version: Windows 3.0,3.1
When working with OnScreen & Recorder make sure that
OnScreen does not obscure any window you
will be working with
and you may NOT start a macro with a
keyboard short-cut from
OnScreen.
Either start the macro from Recorder or try to
remember where you
left your keyboard and use the keyboard
short-cut.
Windows Tutorial - (WINTUTOR.EXE)
Publisher: Microsoft
Version: Windows 3.1
OnScreen hides behind the Windows Tutorial
except in a few cases,
380
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
and these may be confusing to new users. New
users should run the
tutorial without OnScreen, and learn the
Windows Concepts before
using OnScreen.
Acrobat Reader (ACROREAD.EXE)
Publisher: Adobe
Version: All
When viewing documents as full screen,
Acrobat will destroy the
Keyboard display on OnScreen. This is due to
improper windows
application operation within Acrobat. Keep
OnScreen minimized,
or do not use Acrobat in this fashion.
381
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Windows Developers
Note: As a starting point, please refer to
the Install Developer’s Kit icon in the
installation program group.
Developers Notes, downloadable files, sample
code, and other useful integration and
programming information is available at
Innovation Management Group, Inc.’s Web
Site:
http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm.
(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm)
Developers wishing more technical
information about OnScreen, messaging
information, and details how applications can
interface with OnScreen should contact
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
382
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
For Questions or other information you may
contact:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
About this product
OnScreen was conceived in its simplest form
by Kermit Komm in a brainstorming session at
a company called Future Technologies. The
383
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
original name "My-T-Mouse" was a
contraction of "My Typing Mouse", and the
original product was designed as a mouse
utility to enable a mouse to type and perform
any operation within the GUI (Graphical User
Interface) without the need for a physical
keyboard (this aspect of the design has become
the underlying theme for the acceptance of the
products and their technology in the
marketplace).
Note: My-T-Mouse was originally
introduced to the world at Fall COMDEX
1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the Computer
Dealers Exposition, was the premier trade
show for everything happening in the
computer industry - My-T-Mouse was
featured as one of the highlights of the
show in a program called "Computer
Chronicles" (a well known series that ran
from 1981 through 2002). You can find this
archived video [Computer Chronicles Fall
384
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
COMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive
(http://www.archive.org)).
Legal note: The My-T-Mouse name (and
its resultant phonetic pronunciation)
created a trademark dispute raised by
Viacom (with its cartoon character having
a similar sounding name), eventually
winding up before the Trademark Trials &
Appeals board and setting a citable
precedent, with Viacom’s opposition to the
My-T-Mouse® trademark being dismissed.
When introduced in 1993, the concept of an
on-screen keyboard was new and far from the
mainstream, and in the beginning years much
education was required to explain "why"
anyone would want or use an on-screen
keyboard. Over the years, with the introduction
385
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
of handheld devices, the growth of touchscreen
based systems, and the maturation of
pen-based systems, the concept of an on-screen
keyboard has become commonplace, and in
many situations, expected as an alternate input
mechanism.
Since the original product was named
"My-T-Mouse", much effort was expended in
explaining that the product would work with
touchscreens or pen based systems (or, in fact,
any pointing device that could act like a
mouse), so "My-T-Pen" and "My-T-Touch"
were created to address the needs of the
marketplace. In order to encompass the now
growing family of on-screen keyboards, the
name "My-T-Soft" (i.e. My Typing Software)
was created and eventually used as the
encompassing trademark of the entire
My-T-Soft® family of on-screen keyboards and
utilities. There is also a version enhanced for
386
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
people with specialized needs was originally
named My-T-Soft AT (or My-T-Soft with
Assistive Technology), and eventually renamed
OnScreen to differentiate its capabilities with
the more commercially focused versions.
Conceived during the original development of
My-T-Mouse, the concept of Build-A-Board
has been under constant refinement and
development during the entire lifetime of
My-T-Mouse and its derivatives. At some point
in the future, Build-A-Board’s capabilities will
be expanded to enable not only completely
customizable layouts, but to meet or exceed all
of the capabilities of the original products and
its derivatives.
Many of the enhancements and utilities came
from all involved and OnScreen users.
In the 20 years as a commercial product, many
individuals have been involved at various
levels, and thanks & acknowledgements go to
387
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
everyone so involved.
Note: The following acknowledgements
are for the original release in 1993.
Production:
Product Concept, Screen Presentation &
Usability: Irwin Handelman
Logo & Graphic Artwork & Fonts: Marc
Handelman
Development:
Windows Interface & Keyboard Emulation:
Kermit Komm
Keyboard Display & Display Interface: George
Merritt
OnScreen Setup & Graphic Artwork & Help
Files: Darrel Niemann
388
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Manual & Help Information: Lorrie Greene
Customer Suggestions
We appreciate and welcome suggestions from
our users for features that you would like to see
in future versions of OnScreen. Please feel free
to send us any comments you may have that
would make our product more useful to you.
All suggestions and ideas become the property
of Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Send to:
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
Customer Service
179 Niblick Road #454
Paso Robles, CA 93446
USA
389
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
Or contact us directly:
1-800-889-0987 (US & Canada)
+1-818-701-1579
+1-818-936-0200 (fax)
<cs@imgpresents.com>
http://www.imgpresents.com
Date:_____________________
Name:___________________________________
Address:_________________________________
City:_____________________State:_______Zip:
OnScreen Comments and Suggestions:
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
Version 1.80
390
Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes
5/7/2013
Copyright © 1993-2013 by Innovation
Management Group, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® and
My-T-Soft® are registered trademarks of
Innovation Management Group, Inc.
391
Chapter 8. Files & File
Notes & Installation
Information
This section outlines details about each file,
minimum file requirements, and reference
information on the product installation.
OnScreen Files & File Notes
& Installation Information
MY-T-SOFT FILES & FILE NOTES
Files located in the OnScreen Installation
Directory:
The following files are REQUIRED for proper
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
operation of
OnScreen: (Version specific files indicated)
* - indicates the minimum files required for
functional operation of OnScreen
** - the Font file is not absolutely necessary,
depending on size & Font settings,
however for basic operation with minimal file
configuration, it is recommended that it remain.
- ONSCREEN.EXE* - OnScreen executable
- ONSSETUP.EXE (???SETUP.EXE, Version
specific) - OnScreen Setup executable
- ONSTUTOR.EXE (???TUTOR.EXE,
Version specific) - OnScreen Tutorial &
Calculator Tape Executable Tutorial &
Calculator Tape cannot run at the same time.
- MYTLIB.DLL* - OnScreen Dynamic Link
Library
393
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- MYTLIB32.DLL* - OnScreen Dynamic Link
Library
- IMGVERS.DLL* - IMG Dynamic Link
Library. IMGVERS64.DLL is the 64-bit
version.
- IMGLM.EXE (2000/XP/WS2003)
(*Required for Terminal Server licensing)
- BWCC32.DLL* - Borland International Inc.’s
Dynamic Link Library
- CW3215.DLL* - Windows 32 support
Dynamic Link Library
- IMGLOGON.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required
for 2000/XP Logon) - IMG Logon Dynamic
Link Library In the 1.76 & later releases, the
IMGLOGON.DLL is installed from
PKG00003.ZIP and extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
- IMGLOGON.EXE - IMG Logon
394
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Configuration Utility (also used by
???SETUP.EXE) IMGLOGON.X64 is the
64-bit version.
- IMGGINA2.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required for
2000/XP Logon, OnScreen 2 Keyboard layout)
- IMG Logon DLL In the 1.76 & later releases,
the IMGGINA2.DLL is installed from
PKG00003.ZIP and extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
IMGGINA2.003 - (2000/XP) For support in
Windows XP & Windows Server 2003, the file
IMGGINA2.003 is used. This overwrites
IMGGINA2.DLL at install when installed on
Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.
- IMGVistaLogon.DLL - (Vista/7) (*Required
for Vista / 7 / 8 Logon, OnScreen 2 Keyboard
layout) (this is analogous to the
IMGGINA2.DLL for 2000/XP), but provides
the interface in Vista / 7 / 8 to allow the logon
keyboard. IMGVistaLogon.X64 is the 64-bit
395
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
version. This interfaces via the Credential
Provider interface.
The following files are used by
IMGGINA2.DLL / IMGVistaLogon.DLL, and
only are used when OnScreen 2 is enabled as
the logon option for 2000/XP
- MTS2.EXE - (My-T-Soft 2 executable to
display LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF)
- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /
MYTSOFT2.EXE
- BABDLL.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /
MYTSOFT.EXE, Build-A-Board common
functions
- STOCK.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /
MYTSOFT2.EXE, Resources for 3D keys
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the Keyboard
Layout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)
- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch
396
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
processor for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - Default
Keyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macros
for MTS.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout
(Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Medium
layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout
(Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout
(Original layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Board
layout Project for Small keyboard
Note: The actual layouts are different
between 2000 / XP and Vista / 7
397
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - Utility to
change opening position for
Small/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts
In the 1.76 & later releases, these support files
for IMGGINA2.DLL are installed from
PKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install prior
to Program Group creation.
- PNLWATCH.EXE / PWLIB.DLL - Utility &
Support library to handle Tablet PC interface
for Windows XP. In the 1.77 & later releases,
these support files are installed from
PKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install prior
to Program Group creation.
- MYTSOFT2.EXE - Executable for
Build-A-Board created keyboard layouts
- MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch Processor
for MYTSOFT2.EXE In the 1.76 & later
releases, MYTSOFT2.EXE,
398
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
MACROBAT.EXE, and Support DLLs are
installed from PKG00004.ZIP & extracted
during install prior to Program Group creation.
(1.76 add-on - IMGSOUND & default Wave
file)
- IMGSOUND.EXE - Executable process used
to play sounds
Note: In the Assistive Technology version,
IMGSOUND.EXE is always run, even if
there are no sound options turned on. It
can be renamed or removed to prevent it
from launching if sounds are not required
and you do not want this process to be run
because of memory or security reasons.
Also see the NoAnnounce setting in the
Initialization File Documentation. In
Commercial versions, IMGSOUND.EXE is
only run when Sound=1.
399
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV - Wave file for
default KeyClick sounds (Sounds=1) In the
1.76 & later releases, IMGSOUND.EXE, and
SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV are installed
from PKG00005.ZIP & extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png OnScreen Help (PKG00008.ZIP)
- MTSOPEN.EXE - OnScreen Welcome
- SEETHRU.EXE (2000/XP - Transparency)
Standalone window with dialog to control
transparency of keyboard
- KEYBOARD.KBF* - OnScreen Keyboard
Configuration & Description File
- *.KBF - other KBF files (pre-built sample
Build-A-Board layouts included as examples)
- KEYBRD01.KMF - Base macro file,
preserves original naming convention, used by
400
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
both MTS & MTS2. 1.77 note - significant
name change KEYBRD?? changed to
KYBD???? to accommodate 104 layouts &
future layout additions
- KYBD0001.KMF - KYBD????.KMF
(*.KMF File specified in INI file (Keyboard=))
- OnScreen Keyboard Layout & Macro File for
individual Keyboards In the 1.76 & later
releases, the KYBD0002.KMF KYBD????.KMF files are installed as
PKG00001.ZIP and extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
- MAC00000.KMF - MAC00???.KMF
(*Appropriate files IF Macro panel in use) OnScreen Macro Panel Files In the 1.76 &
later releases, the MAC00001.KMF MAC?????.KMF files are installed as
PKG00002.ZIP and extracted during install
prior to Program Group creation.
- ONSCREEN.INI* - OnScreen Initialization
401
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
File
- LICENSE.EXE* - IMG License Manager
- LICENSE2.EXE* - IMG License verification
only (read-only access)
- LICENSE.LIC* - IMG License File
- LICENSE.ORG - Original IMG License File
- LICENSE.TXT - IMG End User License
Agreement
- README.TXT - Product Installation text file
- MANIFEST.TXT - Reference File from Build
- IMGUTIL.EXE - used for installation and
uninstallation of software
Support Files
- MYTSTORY.TXT - Tutorial Text file
(PKG00006.ZIP)
- KEYBOARD.ORG - Original
KEYBOARD.KBF file for recovery
402
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- ONSCREEN.ORG - Original
ONSCREEN.INI file for recovery
Developer Utilities: (Installed in Installation
Directory)
- DEVKTDOC\DEVKIT.CHM - OnScreen
Utilities & Information (PKG00006.ZIP)
- CTALTDEL.EXE - Dev Kit utility to restart
Windows, used as an example for Key
Launches - (pre 1.70 RESTRTWN.EXE, from
NTRSTART.EXE)
- CADBTN.EXE - This is logon utility tool
that displays a large button and integrates with
SAS.DLL to generate a user-based Secure
Attention Sequence (i.e. Ctrl-Alt-Del)
- ONSCREEN_RUN.EXE - Start Screen
interface tool for running OnScreen
- DVKTINST.EXE - tool for quick installation
of Developer’s Kit
403
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- ZIP32.DLL - Zip library for compressing
exports / Word Lists
- UNZIP32S.DLL - Unzip library, required for
installation of Dev Kit with DVKTINST.EXE
- WORDLIST.EXE - Word List Assistant, read
in files, save Word List files, install new Word
Lists, Requires ZIP32.DLL, UNZIP32S.DLL.
This is also the utility that handles the
Export/Import menu options, but only provides
the Word List Assistant in the OnScreen
releases.
- DKT??????.ZIP - latest release of Developers
Kit (If included with distribution files) Use
DevKit Installer (DVKTINST.EXE), or
WinZip or use PKUNZIP with the -d option to
preserve directory (folder) structure.
Recommended to Unzip in Installation
directory for easier file management. The latest
Developer’s Kit may be downloaded using the
IMG Download Manager.
404
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Note: The font and the files established in
\Program Files\Common Files\Innovation
Management Group are not un-installed
when OnScreen is un-installed. These
remain in case future IMG products are
installed. Refer to the IMG System
Manager for further information (if
available).
- MYTMOUSE.FON** - OnScreen Keyboard
Font File for smaller sizes
- ADDFONT.EXE - Utility to Add font post
installation, e.g. "Addfont add"
Located in the Windows System Directory (or
Windows Fonts folder):
- MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE - this is a
post installation utility that establishes or
updates the IMG Download Manager and IMG
License Manager files as outlined below.
405
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Located in \Program Files\Common
Files\Innovation Management
Group\Download Manager directory:
- IMGCLEAN.EXE - used to complete
uninstall of software, required for Control
Panel Add/Remove Programs
- IMGDLM.EXE - The IMG Download
Manager - Installed by
MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE
- IMGNET.DLL - The IMG Download
Manager Library - Installed by
MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE
Located in \Program Files\Common
Files\Innovation Management
Group\License Manager directory:
- LICENSE.DLL - library used by the IMG
License Manager and IMG Download
Manager. LICENSE64.DLL is the 64-bit
version.
406
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Files created during use:
- ONSCREEN.BAK - OnScreen previous
Initialization File (in configuration location for
user’s ONSCREEN.INI file - see ConfigPath
entry in Initialization File Documentation
OnScreen Add-Ons
- KEYBOARD.KB1* - Keyboard Layout for
Action panel configuration
- A.TXT - Z.TXT,-.TXT, etc. - Word List files
- IMGSOUND.EXE* - Used for Key-Click
Sounds and Text-To-Speech
- SCRLCTRL.EXE - Used for Screen Control
of larger than screen keyboard configurations
- TTSAPP.EXE - Speak and Setup for
Text-To-Speech, required to change voices
when using Text-To-Speech
- TURNAWAY.EXE - Head Mouse users App
to cover screen until Exit is clicked.
407
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
OnScreen Folders (The Developer’s Kit creates
numerous sub-folders - see Dev Kit docs)
SOUNDS - OnScreen Voice & Key-Click
replacements
WORDLISTS - OnScreen Word Lists - saved
and international
OnScreen with CrossScanner Add-Ons
(CrossScanner folder)
- XSCAN.EXE - CrossScanner
- XSCAN_S.EXE - CrossScanner Setup
- XSCANSRV.EXE - CrossScanner Support
- KEYBOARD.KMF - CrossScanner Support
- MYTCLIB.DLL - CrossScanner Support
- XTOGGLE.EXE - CrossScanner Support Separate executable for controlling
CrossScanner
408
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- XSCAN.INI - OnScreen Support Configuration File for USB Device operation
- MANIFEST.TXT - OnScreen Support Reference File from Build
- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png OnScreen Help
CrossScanner 4.00 additional files
- XADMIN.EXE - OnScreen Support Administrative setup for
CrossScannerLogon.DLL
- CrossScannerLogon.dll - OnScreen Support Logon Interface DLL for Windows Vista / 7
- MTS2.EXE - My-T-Soft Executable Keyboard for Logon Interface
- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft
Executable
- BABDLL.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft
Executable
409
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- STOCK.DLL - Support for My-T-Soft
Executable
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the Keyboard
Layout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)
- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch
processor for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - Default
Keyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE
- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macros
for MTS.EXE
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout
(Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Medium
layout (Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout
(Build-A-Board layout)
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout
(Original layout)
410
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Board
layout Project for Small keyboard
- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - MTS2.EXE
Utility
Note that as files are removed, the possibilities
for errors or operational limitations increases.
Also note that a large portion of the
MYTLIB.DLL are bitmaps that may not be in
use for particular fixed size configurations contact IMG if a small footprint installation is
required.
Note: The following notes indicate various
options for some of these files. There may
also be additional information in Advanced
User Notes, Operation Notes, and the
Initialization File Documentation..
411
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
OnScreen Setup options: The
???SETUP.EXE program can take a few
command line options. The command line
"BUILD" is used when the top button
MACRO is pressed on the Main Macro
panel in OnScreen to automatically open
Setup with the Build-A-Macro dialog.
There also is a "HELPCMD" option to
display the internal help request prior to
using the HelpInterface function from
IMGVERS.DLL. This is currently used as
the lookup from the ONSCREEN.INI file to
open the appropriate help file from the
HELP folder. The lookup table approach
was required because Microsoft has
constantly changed preferred help formats
through various versions of Windows. Help
is currently available in HTML files so the
same help files can be used in the product
and be made available on the product
website.
412
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Installation Information
CD/DVD may contain:
SETUP.EXE - Installation Assistant to
determine platform / install files
AUTORUN.INF - AutoRun for AutoPlay
CD/DVD
RELEASE.TXT - Release information
Located on the OnScreen Distribution media:
Compressed Files of the OnScreen Installation
Files and:
README.TXT - For the Experienced User
LICENSE.TXT - OnScreen License
Agreement
SETUP.EXE - Setup Utility to Install
OnScreen onto your Hard Drive
The IMG installer can support these options:
413
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
/? Displays a message box with info about
options
/Q (Quiet install) runs a quiet install (no
dialogs/user interaction)
/I (Install) runs a quiet install (no dialogs/user
interaction)
/U runs a quiet un-install (no dialogs/user
interaction)
/Q and /I are handled the same (customer
requested /Q)
OnScreen Add-ons
WordLists Folder - contains available Word
Lists
Speech Folder - Microsoft Speech
Components, Text-To-Speech
The following information is for those users
who are curious and want to know, or wish to
414
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Uninstall OnScreen & do not have the original
distribution media.
There are 2 approaches to Setup, an IMG
installer and the Windows Installer (MSI). The
reason 2 installers are available is for flexibility
and support purposes. Installing any product is
a relatively easy process, but can become
complicated as more & more features and
capabilities are included. In any complicated
sequential process, it is inevitable that some
sequence or step is not handled properly. By
using a second approach, a verifiable
comparison based mechanism is created where
a definitive end-result of files & settings can be
attained, ensuring the integrity of the
installation steps.
Post Installation information:
IMGUTIL.EXE performs various post
installation tasks. For reference, if the
installation media has LICENSE.LIC in the
415
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
same folder as SETUP.EXE, or in the
\LICENSE folder, IMGUTIL will copy this
into the installation folder (this is useful for
evaluation and other types of licensing). If
the installation media has a
DK??????.ZIP file in the same folder as
SETUP.EXE, or in the \DEVKIT folder, it
will be copied to the installation folder.
For reference information, you can refer to
the INSTALL.XML used by the IMG
SETUP.EXE for all post installation
operations. In Windows Installer (MSI)
installs, these same actions occur.
SETUP.EXE will sense if OnScreen is
Installed or not. If OnScreen is not installed,
then Install must be checked to Install the
OnScreen software. If OnScreen is already
installed, you may Un-Install by selecting the
Un-Install option and selecting OK throughout
416
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
the following screens.
The following outlines relevant information
about the MSI (Microsoft Installer)
packages, and command line options to
msiexec to manage installation with these
files
IMPORTANT NOTE: The MSI support is
being phased out due to issues with User
Account Control, Permissions, Security,
Code-signing, and user support. For best
results, if using the MSI, do so as an
Administrator with User Account Control
disabled. Another effective option is to run
the CMD prompt and Run as
Administrator, then use the appropriate
msiexec command below.
The MSI files are essentially databases of
information used by the Windows Installer to
417
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
install the files and setup a system. The
executable to use is "msiexec.exe" and any
appropriate command line switches. In general,
if you double click on an MSI file, Windows
launches msiexec with the /i install option (e.g.
"msiexec /i prodver_target.msi").
For some basic, frequently asked for options,
here are a few that can be used with the
standard IMG MSI install files (these switches
are not case sensitive):
In these examples, the msi file should be
replaced with the msi file you want to operate
on
msiexec /i mts178_2000xp.msi (This installs
My-T-Soft 1.78 (using the user interface))
msiexec /qn /i mts178_2000xp.msi (This
silently installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO user
interface))
msiexec /qn /x mts178_2000xp.msi (This
418
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
silently un-installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO
user interface))
msiexec /a mts178_2000xp.msi /qn
TARGETDIR="C:\Documents and
Settings\Full User\Desktop\Test" (This silently
installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO user
interface) to a different target directory (for
testing, etc.))
Further notes on command line switches:
/a = Administrative install - allows use of
TARGETDIR override
/i = standard install
/x = standard un-install
/q? = user interface options
/qn = Displays no user interface.
/qb = Displays a basic user interface.
/qr = Displays a reduced user interface with a
419
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
modal dialog box displayed at the end of the
installation.
/qf = Displays the full user interface with a
modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qn+ = Displays no user interface, except for a
modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qb+ = Displays a basic user interface with a
modal dialog box displayed at the end.
/qb- = Displays a basic user interface with no
modal dialog boxes.
For further info on msiexec.exe, refer to
Microsoft’s documentation.
Deployment Information
This section outlines relevant information if
OnScreen is going to be imaged via hard disk
replication, incorporated into a different
420
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
installation package, or handled externally
from the publically provided installation
approaches. Please refer to the other sections in
this chapter to have a basic level of
understanding regarding the files and issues
involved in the installation of OnScreen
This is a quick summary of the 3 steps
typically used to prepare a master image for more details and reference information,
see below
1. Install the software. It is recommended
you do not run the software until after the
duplication.
2. Copy in custom configuration (if
necessary). If configured on a separate
system, refer to OnScreen Setup | File
menu | Show Config File Location for
location of configuration files.
421
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
3. Copy in company/site/deployment license
(if applicable) - replace LICENSE.LIC in
Installation folder.
There are 3 main areas that need to be
managed: Deployment, Default Configuration,
and Licensing
Deployment
The goal of this step is to ensure that all the
required files are on the target system. For
practical purposes, these are simply all the files
and folders in the Installation folder, e.g.
\Program Files\ONSCREEN. Often, the default
installation method can be used, with post
installation management of configuration and
license details handled after the installation.
When Imaging, the basic approach is to install
the software onto the master system, then
perform any updates to configuration and
license files, and then DO NOT RUN the
422
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
software (as settings and files can be modified
by running the software).
For actual installation (i.e. including the
software with an existing application), it is best
to wrap the files into the existing application
installation approach. Refer to the Zip files in
the extended download area, as these are the
installation files without any installation
add-ons - these are just the program files that
need to be installed on a system in a
compressed, single file zip format. Often it is
easiest to have a test system where normal
installation / testing can take place, and refer to
the information here, the post installation files
on the test system, and also the
MANIFEST.TXT text file (a post-build
snapshot of the product files) in the installation
folder for file details.
Doing folder comparisons, or simply testing on
the target system (after imaging/installation), is
423
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
the preferred approach to ensure the software
has been deployed correctly.
Default Configuration
The configuration is contained in the
KEYBOARD.KBF / ONSCREEN.INI files
(and the MAC*.KMF files if the macro panels
are used). Typically making sure the desired
(correctly configured) files are the files in the
installation folder is all that is necessary to
bring a new/different default configuration
when the software is run.
The simplest steps to create the desired
configuration files are to configure the software
as desired, then use the menu to Save Current
Settings, and also Save Position. To test,
re-start the software and verify the
configuration is correct. Then obtain the
KEYBOARD.KBF / ONSCREEN.INI file
(refer to the ConfigPath setting / or use Setup |
File menu | Show Config File Location), and
424
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
use these on your master image or as part of
the installation files.
After duplication, when a new user runs the
software, they will receive a copy of these
default configuration files from the Installation
Folder. They will then have their own personal
copy which can be configured as they desire.
This is the default setting of the software
(ConfigPath=1). Note there are different
approaches that could be taken with these
configuration files based on the ConfigPath
setting and permissions - for example, a fixed
configuration for all users that cannot be
modified.
Note: If secure logon is required, the
Logon Utilities require a registry entry in
the WinLogon group, which is not
managed by installation or via the
configuration files. This option requires
proper configuration via the Logon Utilities.
425
Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information
Licensing
If using the default (retail) license scheme, you
just need to ensure that the file LICENSE.LIC
in the installation folder is the same as
LICENSE.ORG (the as shipped license file). If
using any other type of license, refer to notes
and instructions that were provided to you. In
most cases, this means that you will have been
provided a custom LICENSE.LIC file, and this
must be the file installed as LICENSE.LIC.
426
Chapter 9. Operation
Notes
OnScreen Operation and
Release Notes
These notes document some of the known
limitations with OnScreen as of this release,
and other anecdotal information.
EGA Users
The OnScreen Tutorial will not run in EGA,
although the rest of OnScreen will. EGA users
will probably prefer different settings for the
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
default colors, since the light gray is a dithered
gray on the EGA display.
Year 2038 Limitations
In versions 1.78 and later, any invalid date is
treated as a 0 result and time and dates will not
be displayed in the System Information panel
properly when run past the year 2037. All
important functionality of OnScreen is not
affected by the date, and beyond the improper
display on the System Information panel, there
are no other limitations associated with any
date issue. Note that versions 1.77 and earlier
will not run when the system date is greater
than the year 2037 (due to an invalid/null
pointer returned by the time system call).
Search the internet for the "Year 2038"
problem for further information. Future
428
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
versions will update to a more capable system
time call well before the year 2037.
Windows Menus
1. The OnScreen Menu does not have any
keyboard short-cuts - OnScreen was
designed to operate entirely from a
pointing device.
2. For Keyboard users who want to close
OnScreen, make sure the Cursor is not
over the OnScreen display, then Use
Alt-Tab to select the OnScreen window,
and use Alt-Space to bring up the
OnScreen Menu for OnScreen, then arrow
down to select Close.
3. Keyboard Users can Minimize OnScreen
429
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
by doing the above & selecting a
Minimize option.
4. If a Any Windows Menu is up in an
application, the following limitations
affect OnScreen: You Cannot Move
OnScreen, or if you do, the Menu will
close. Assignments to Middle & Right
buttons will not work! Cannot move
through System Menu Bar Highlight if
there are no Pop-up menus.
Keyboard Notes
The Print Screen key only captures the Active
Application. Maximize the Active application,
then use the Print Screen Key to capture a full
screen of the display.
The Pause Key properly generates the
430
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
keystrokes, and sends them to the active
application - the application must respond to
these keystrokes for any action or pause to
occur.
The Ctrl-Break, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and Sys-Rq
Combinations are not supported. However, by
assigning executables to the appropriate key,
certain emulations can occur. As an example,
the default install includes a sample of
emulating the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence to restart
Windows.
The Alt-Tab combination works properly, but if
used from OnScreen the user will find that only
the "top" 2 windows cycle. This is caused by
the way Windows re-sorts windows in the
Window Manager list. The "quick-switch /
select" window is not visible when the Alt-Tab
combination is generated by OnScreen. Some
tricks can be used by creating macros with
Alt-Tab-Tab, or Alt-Tab-Tab-Tab, since these
431
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
will select windows deeper down the list. For
example, Alt-Tab-Tab from a macro panel will
cycle through the top 3 windows in the list.
Using the Shift-F10 combo to bring up
property & context menus operates correctly,
but additional keyboard functionality is not
available when these menus are open.
DOS Windows must operate within the "tty"
class within windows, and if you have trouble
using the arrow or edit keys in a DOS Window,
try turning the Num-Lock off.
Some combo boxes and password entry dialogs
do not accept keystrokes and appear to lose
focus. This is because of internal operation of
the Windows operating system and certain
security measures enforced to prevent
"software" from comprimising the security of
passwords, etc. Contact IMG for additional
options available to resolve any mission critical
requirements.
432
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
KMF layouts, Windows Regional Settings,
Windows Keyboard Layouts, etc. At first
glance, it would seem that a keyboard is pretty
straightforward, and in most cases, it is.
However, differences in physical keyboards &
physical keyboard layouts, changes to the
computer keyboard over time & different
manufacturer approaches, along with
international/cultural requirements, has turned
keyboard handling into quite a complicated
affair. In order to isolate differences between
different versions of Windows, expectations of
operation, and other issues, each supported
layout is contained in a KMF (Keyboard
Macro File). In general, these are intended to
be used in the region & with the appropriate
version of Windows.
While people do not complain that their
physical keyboard does not change to match
the symbols generated, when using a virtual
433
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
keyboard, this type of operation is expected.
The key labels are also contained within the
KMF file, and OnScreen will display the key
labels for what is generated from the
appropriate Windows Keyboard Layout. If you
are experiencing inconsistencies between what
is displayed and what is typed, then it is
probably related to the selected Windows
keyboard layout (see Control Panel |
Keyboard). This is handled differently in
different versions of Windows (not only
platforms, but international releases).
KMFs & KBFs & Build-A-Board
The original design used a KBF (KeyBoard
File) to track the physical appearance (keys,
panels, size, etc.) (i.e. imagine a blank
keyboard), and a KMF (Keyboard Macro File)
to track key labels & key operation. This works
well when a pure physical keyboard emulation
approach is used, since each KMF will result in
434
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
the display of different labels, but the relative
appearance of the shape & size & key
relationships remains the same. For example, if
you place physical keyboards from different
countries next to each other, they will look
pretty much the same except for the key labels.
When Build-A-Board was designed, a
completely different approach was used,
wherein each layout file would contain
everything necessary in a single file, the KBF
(KeyBoard File). So KBF files greater than
2.00 not only contain keys, panels, & size
information, but also key labels & key
operation information.
Build-A-Macro Notes
The following double-characters are reserved
in Build-A-Macro:
435
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
@@ - Signifies an Alt keystroke to follow
e.g. @@f = [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]
~~ - Signifies a Ctrl keystroke to follow
^^ - Signifies a Shift keystroke to follow
$$ - used internally for internal macro uses
%% - used to specify a virtual key, internal
keystroke, or a keyboard scan code
You may not use these character combinations
in your macros, unless you use them as
outlined. For example, you may quickly create
a macro for File, New ([Alt]-F, N) by entering
"@@fn" and clicking OK. However, using the
Reserved words in brackets is the preferred
method.
The %% sequence has 4 options, and must be
formed properly to be interpreted as an special
entry. 4 characters must follow the 2 percent
signs, spaces are not allowed. When this is
436
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
used, it generates both the Down and Up
keyboard messages, (press & release), similar
to the entry of a specific character.
The following general form is:
%%cnnn
where c is a character signifying Keystroke or
Scancode or Virtual Key Code or ProcessKey
keystroke - The only valid characters are k or s
or v or p (case does not matter)
The nnn must be 3 decimal digits (values
between 000 and 999 are valid). Note that there
are only 200+ keys on the panels and 255
Virtual keys - higher numbers may cause
memory access errors!
The keystroke (k) numbers refer to the internal
numbering of the keyboard - see below for a
table of the standard 101 keyboard.
For example, to generate a F10 keystroke, you
437
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
may use "%%k010" in the Build-A-Macro
portion. In most cases, using the actual
character will generate the appropriate scan
codes internally, and this is only provided as an
enhancement to provide more functionality in
certain environments. Documented deficiencies
include lack of support for the keys on the
Numeric keypad panel. Additionally, by using
the scancodes, macros can generate
"keystrokes" for keys that are not present on
the physical keyboard. Because of the
hardware oriented nature of the actual
scancode generated by the physical keyboard,
and its interpretation by the system hardware
and Windows, the scope of these issues
requires that they be referenced in appropriate
system manuals, and/or documentation on
industry standards.
The Virtual Key (v) passes the Windows based
Virtual key code directly through OnScreen.
438
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
How an application interprets the virtual key
code is dependent on regional, language,
keyboard layout, and possibly other issues.
The ProcessKey (p) approach uses the internal
ProcessKey function which handles more
internal processing beyond the AcceptCode
function handled by the k, s, or v options. This
was added to allow macros to interact with the
WordComplete panel on the Assistive
Technology version.
Technical Information: The internal
interface uses the AcceptCode approach
which adds the keystroke to the buffer to
be typed. This is managed in different
ways as specified based on the k, v, or s
options. The p option calls the internal
ProcessKey that does various tasks prior
to calling the AcceptCode function to
insert the keystroke into the output buffer.
Because of the tightly interwoven aspects
439
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
of ProcessKey, the keyboard panel, and
special options such as WordComplete,
there may be side-effects if the %%pnnn is
used extensively. There may also be other
interactions with various other features
(Show & Hide Keys, LetterAssist, etc.) that
the direct AcceptCode approach will
completely bypass. The intended use is to
allow a single macro button to type a letter,
and interact with the WordComplete panel
in the Assistive Technology version.
It is probably worthwhile to state that each
of these approaches is important
dependent on the context that you want a
particular keystroke. Is the keystroke
dependent on the physical layout or virtual
layout selected? Is the keystroke a
character typed into the application with
keyboard focus? Is the keystroke acting
like it was typed on a the physical
keyboard? Is the keystroke macro acting
like it was typed on the virtual keyboard?
Each can be valid and required depending
440
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
on many factors. Supporting each
possibility may explain one reason why the
software has been around for 20 years.
Quick Reference:
%%knnn, e.g. %%k010 - uses the currently
selected KMF (OnScreen layout) and looks up
the virtual key / scan code information for this
key, sends down/up keystrokes
%%snnn, e.g. %%s112 - sends the scancode,
but processed internally. In most cases this will
be the same virtual key code as specified, but it
may be modified.
%%vnnn, e.g. %%v112 - sends the Windows
Virtual Key (refer to Microsoft documentation)
unmodified (note decimal notation, hex is not
supported).
%%pnnn, e.g. %%p041 - uses the currently
441
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
selected KMF (OnScreen layout) and looks up
the virtual key / scan code information for this
key, sends down/up keystrokes, and processes
the key as if typed via the keyboard directly.
Key# Description
0 Escape Key
1 F1
2 F2
3 F3
4 F4
5 F5
6 F6
7 F7
8 F8
9 F9
10 F10
442
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
11 F11
12 F12
13 Select key
14 1/!
15 2/@
16 3/#
17 4/$
18 5/%
19 6/^
20 7/&
21 8/*
22 9/(
23 0/)
24 -/_
25 =/+
443
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
26 Back space
27 Tab
28 Q
29 W
30 E
31 R
32 T
33 Y
34 U
35 I
36 O
37 P
38 [/{
39 ]/}
40 Caps Lock
444
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
41 A
42 S
43 D
44 F
45 G
46 H
47 J
48 K
49 L
50 ;/:
51 ’/"
52 Enter Key
53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &
53.WAV
54 Shift / Left Shift
445
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
55 Z
56 X
57 C
58 V
59 B
60 N
61 M
62 ,/<
63 ./>
64 //?
65 Shift / Right Shift
66 \/|
67 Control / Left Control
68 Alt / Left Alt
69 Space Bar
446
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr
71 Control / Left Control
These are on the edit panel
72 Print Screen
73 Scroll Lock
74 Pause
75 Insert
76 Home
77 Page Up
78 Delete
79 End
80 Page Down
81 Up Arrow
82 Left Arrow
83 Down Arrow
447
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
84 Right Arrow
These are on the Numeric keypad panel
85 CL indicator / not processed as key
86 NL indicator / not processed as key
87 SL indicator / not processed as key
88 Num Lock
89 /
90 *
91 92 7
93 8
94 9
95 +
96 4
97 5
448
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
98 6
99 1
100 2
101 3
102 Enter / =
103 0
104 decimal point
Memory
OnScreen uses Windows Global Memory for
various things. OnScreen will operate faster if
Global memory is physical system memory,
and not swapped to disk as virtual memory.
Although OnScreen will run in 2 MB systems,
operating at 4 MB, 8 MB, or higher is
recommended.
449
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
It is normal for the OnScreen System
Information Mem:????K display to drop as you
type on OnScreen, or move over the OnScreen
display. You may also note System Resources
change as OnScreen is used.
Command Line Options
Quick Reference (Command line options)
•
-NoSplash [Open without splash screen]
•
!Minimize [Open in the as configured
minimized state]
•
DEFERSKIPMSG [If this is found in the
command line, it only affects the second
instance - the default actions will occur, but
no message (no dialog/MessageBox) will be
shown (see below for notes/details)]
450
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
DEFERNOACTION [If this is found in the
command line, it only affects the second
instance - nothing will occur when the EXE
is launched - the second EXE will just close
itself (see below for notes/details)]
•
/k=mynew.kbf [Override KeyBoard File
(must be in Config Path location)]
•
/i=mynew.ini [Override Initialization File
(must be in Config Path location)]
•
x=123[%] [Override opening x screen
position, add % to use screen percentages
(calculated)]
•
y=321[%] [Override opening y screen
position, add % to use screen percentages
(calculated)]
Prior to Version 1.76, the only command line
option was the ability to specify the NoSplash
setting - see NoSplash in the Iniitialization file
description. [Path]\ONSCREEN.EXE
451
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
-NoSplash In the implementation, the - (dash)
is actually the trigger, and the notes specify
NoSplash only as a description so maintainers
can understand what the command line means it is not required, and in fact, can be anything
as long as there is a - (dash).
In the 1.79 release, a command line based
"Open in the minimized state" has been added.
Prior to this, the shortcut link properties
needed to be modified to indicate the "Run:"
state as Minimized (instead of Normal Window
(or Maximized)). This is implemented similar
to the -NoSplash and can be used as !Minimize
or Minimized! - the exclamation point
character is the trigger, and if it is present, the
internal operation will match the Show
Window properties from the shortcut link. It is
recommended you include the text of
Minimize or Minimized for future maintainers.
452
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
Important: In the 1.78 release, the
ConfigPath setting determines the default
location for the user’s configuration file.
These notes apply to this location. For
example, if you are specifying a different
layout, it must reside in the user’s specific
path, if ConfigPath=1 (default) is set in the
Initialization file. See ConfigPath setting in
the Initialization file for further details on
location You may also reference the
configuration files location from the File
menu in OnScreen Setup
DEFER overrides - DEFERSKIPMSG &
DEFERNOACTION: In 1.79, 2 new
DEFER overrides have been added to
change the operation of the second
instance of the EXE when launched. With
no option, the default action is to find the
existing Window, restore from minimized
state (if in a minimized state), position the
453
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
keyboard window at the center bottom of
the screen, and display a message
indicating only one process (window) can
be running. For situations where this
message, or these actions are
undesirable, one of these 2 options can be
included in the shortcut’s command line,
and change these actions. If
DEFERSKIPMSG is included in the
command line, all actions will occur, but
the final dialog (MessageBox) will NOT be
shown. The second instance will
open/position the running software, and
then close. If DEFERNOACTION is
included in the command line, the second
instance will perform no actions, and
simply close. Running a second instance
of the EXE with the DEFERNOACTION
option will result in no feedback to the
user.
In the 1.76 release, in addition to the
454
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
-NoSplash code, there is support for a /k=[file]
and/or a /i=[file]. These provide an override to
the default KEYBOARD.KBF (/k) and
ONSCREEN.INI (/i).
There should be no spaces in the command line
entry, except to separate multiple entries.
(e.g. C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
/k=mykbf.kbf /i=mykbf.ini -NoSplash)
The [file] specified must reside in the current
configuration folder, as specified by the
ConfigPath setting in the Initialization File
(except in Terminal Server version).
The code checks for both upper & lowercase k
(K) and i (I). The trigger is the = (equal) sign,
and the code looks to the previous character for
the k or i, and the following characters up until
a space or end of line for the [file].
The /k option updates the KEYBOARD.KBF
455
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
file with the specified [file]. There is no error
checking to guarantee the file exists, or that it
is a valid KBF file, so care should be used
when implementing these options. The [file]
specified with the /k option MUST be a copy
of a previously saved configuration (i.e. copy
KEYBOARD.KBF to MYKBF.KBF). A
Build-A-Board 2.10 generated KBF file may
also be used.
The /i option references the given [file] for
configuration information, instead of the
default ONSCREEN.INI, allowing different
settings to be used.
The implementation of the 2 options is
internally different (because of internal
design). The /k option for OnScreen actually
copies the specified [file] to
KEYBOARD.KBF, then continues on as
normal. The /i option internally references the
specified [file], leaving the default
456
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
ONSCREEN.INI file intact.
In order to ensure proper operation, certain
settings (panels, colors, etc.) are written to the
INI file when the /k option is used. This is done
to ensure a match between the layout
information, and the details in the INI file.
When the /k override in the command line is
used, the following occurs:
•
The specified [file] is copied to
KEYBOARD.KBF
•
If only the /k option is used, overlapping
features from the specified configuration
[file] are written to the ONSCREEN.INI.
•
if both /k and /i options are used, the INI
settings will be used. Therefore, a "matched"
pair should be used whenever both options
are specified.
•
If the /k is used, any other "launch" should
457
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
probably also require the /k option to ensure
the desired layout appears.
A "matched" pair means saving both Settings
and Position, then closing OnScreen. Copy the
KEYBOARD.KBF to MYNEW.CFG, and
ONSCREEN.INI To MYNEW.INI.
Additional Implementation Notes: The
command line overrides will use the
current configuration location - see
OnScreen Setup | File menu | Show
Config File Location to identify the current
user configuration file location. Custom
files need to be in this location. The
/i=mynew.ini INI override has a quirk because of internal backup code, the
custom named INI should be in the
program files location, i.e. \Program
Files\ONSCREEN. For ease of use, you
can duplicate files in both locations. Often
if there are no specific INI settings that
affect operation, and the primary
458
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
motivation is to use a different layout, it is
easiest to only specify the KBF, e.g.
/k=mynew.kbf (the KBF must be in the
Config File Location).
Terminal Server Note: In the Terminal
Server version, the file must reside in the
current user’s folder.
In the 1.77 release, an X/Y coordinate can also
be used, e.g X:200 Y:300 (e.g. C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
-NoSplash x:200 y:300)
The implementation looks for either the :
(colon) character, or the = (equal sign), and
looks at both upper or lower case x (X), y (Y).
So X=200 and Y=300 will also be recognized.
Negative numbers can be used. There should
459
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
be no spaces in the command line except to
separate options.
In the 1.78 Release 2, a percent sign character
can be used to position the X/Y coordinates
based on the relative position specified (percent
of total screen resolution), rather than a fixed
location, e.g. x:34% y:70%.
The implementation requires the % character
to immediately follow the numeric value. Valid
values for X/Y must be in the range 0-100 negative numbers or numbers over a 100 will
revert to acceptable values. The calculation
includes the size of the keyboard window, and
will keep the entire window visible, so it is a
dynamic calculation based on the specified
percent, the screen resolution, and the current
size of the window. Some examples:
[C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE x:20%
y:75%], or [C:\Program
460
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
-NoSplash x=75% y=50%].
Note: When opening in the minimized
state with the minimize option as a
Window (Floating Window), these X/Y
command line overrides will be applied to
the floating window. Refer to
ButtonOverrideW/H and
ButtonOverrideX/Y for additional control
options specific to the floating window
minimize option at startup.
Troubleshooting / Diagnosing Startup
In the 1.78 Release 2, "STARTDEBUG" can be
used as the command line to display to the
screen key code points during the initialization
of the software. During the program startup,
there is a direct to display "Reached Code
Marker ID" code indication. As the code
461
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
progress and reaches key points in the startup
sequence, a code marker (e.g. 1003) is reached,
and using a direct to display debugging feature,
the code marker is directly displayed on the left
side of the system display. If there is an error
or other problem starting, the last code marker
display will help indicate where the code
stopped, and what it was doing.
The following is the list of the codes and what
has happened up to that point:
•
1001 In WinMain code, no system calls
made yet
•
1002 After check for Window already
existing (Previous Instance)
•
1003 After Class Registered with system
(Register Class) Pre Window Creation
•
1004 After Window created
462
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
1005 Free System Timer verified, internal
variables initialized
•
1006 DLL’s attached
•
1007 Macro file verified / loaded, Read from
INI
•
1008 If Win Logon, IMGSERV.EXE
launched (95/98/Me) - post launch (Code
after OpenFirst=1 drop-out)
•
1009 Several system calls completed
•
1010 After Keyboard Layout read in /
prepare for paint
•
1011 System Timer set - last spot before
paint
•
1012 After paint, pre System hooks
(95/98/M3/NT)
•
1013 After System hooks set (95/98/M3/NT)
463
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
1014 Final call to DLL’s, last spot before
message loop
•
1015 After message loop, before all internal
cleanup
There are also several "critical error" spots that
can be tested easily (refer to ConfigPath setting
to ensure you are working with correct file
location!)
1) Rename MAC00000.KMF to something
else (KM, BAK, etc.)
Run OnScreen - it will stop after 1006 and
return false in WinMain
2) Rename ONSCREEN.INI to something else
(IN, HLD, etc.)
Run OnScreen - it will stop after 1006 and
return false in WinMain
3) Rename KEYBOARD.KBF to something
else (KB, HLD, etc.)
464
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
Run OnScreen - it will stop after 1009 and
return false in WinMain
Note: A normal startup will show through
1014 (and not show 1015 unless you close
the software). Setting ClassWatch &
WindowWatch in the INI file will identify if
message loop is reached, and that the
process is acting normally (outside of
actual window display). When this setting
is enabled, the results will be shown on
the top lines of the screen.
As a separate reference, these details were
asked by a customer doing custom integration
work, and the following is a generalized flow
of the startup & important events when the
executable is started.
465
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
•
Opening Check - should MTSOPEN.EXE be
run (reference OpenFirst settings in INI file)
•
Verify MYTLIB.DLL (Existence,
LoadLibrary)
•
Register Window Class (RegisterClassEx)
•
Create Windows (CreateWindowEx)
•
Verify System Timer Available
•
Initialize variables, global memory, files, etc.
•
Interface Libraries (LoadLibrary)
•
INI File
•
Keyboard Configuration file
•
Show/Update window (splash window - see
Note below)
•
Message Loop
Splash Window Note (Window
painting/WM_PAINT): The NoSplash
466
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
setting in the INI file or command line
-NoSplash can be used for removing
splash. The splash processing is an added
sequence prior to normal painting.
Build-A-Board Support
The 1.76 and newer versions now support KBF
files (KeyBoard Files) from IMG’s
Build-A-Board 2.10 or later.
The following notes some of the issues on how
this is implemented.
The KEYBOARD.KBF file is the Keyboard
Layout file, and it determines which program
will be used to display & operate the layout.
For KBF files built by Build-A-Board,
MYTSOFT2.EXE will be used. For the default
467
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
KEYBOARD.KBF, ONSCREEN.EXE will be
used. When MYTSOFT2.EXE is used, the
ONSCREEN.INI file is not referenced at all.
These are the key issues to be aware of when
setting up which keyboard layout / program
each user will be presented:
There is no specific way to retrieve the layouts
built by Build-A-Board into the OnScreen
folder. Build-A-Board should be installed on a
development workstation or stand-alone
system. Once the required layout(s) are built,
these may be copied from the \Program
Files\Build-A-Board\Target\[Project] folder,
where [Project] is the name of the
Build-A-Board Project for the specific
layout(s).
Note that the shortcut can be used to launch a
specific layout specified via the command line,
e.g. C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
468
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
/k=NUMERIC.KBF, or
C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
/k=KEYBOARD.NUM.
The specified file MUST be in same folder as
the EXE.
When ONSCREEN.EXE is run, if the
KEYBOARD.KBF file (or specified file via the
command line /k=[Keyboard Layout]) is for
MYTSOFT2.EXE, ONSCREEN.EXE will
terminate, and launch MYTSOFT2.EXE.
The license for MYTSOFT2.EXE is the same
as for OnScreen.
Refer to the Administrator Notes in the IMG
License Manager for differences in the
Terminal Server version.
469
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
OnScreen Button Display
OnScreen uses only three graphical icons on its
buttons, the rest consist only of text. Two
important points must be made about this:
1. It was our intention to make OnScreen
easy to use for all levels of computer users.
Due to the sizing concerns of OnScreen,
and the inherent problems of shrinking and
growing graphical images, dealing only
with text was the most reasonable solution.
2. Even though a picture may be worth a
thousand words, in most cases for
OnScreen, one will do. Also, to finalize
our point, just sit in front of an unfamiliar
application with a graphical button bar,
and quickly discern what each button does.
Hopefully, with Quick Help and the button
name, a new user to OnScreen can learn the
470
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
function of each button quickly.
Finally, since the user can build Panels,
imagine the amount of extra effort required to
build a graphical icon for each macro...
Stay tuned for Build-A-Board!
OnScreen Setup |
Configuration | Special
To properly operate the Special Settings
accessible at the OnScreen Special Handling
Screen, you must read the details about the
Initialization file below. Primarily this screen
and its options are intended for advanced users
who are already familiar enough with
Windows and its concepts. The settings
available here allow for the customization of
471
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
OnScreen without the need to edit the
MyTSpcl???? settings in the Initialization file.
To Add a new Window Name to the list, type
the new name, and press Enter. Then select the
OnScreen action on the right.
To Delete an existing Window Name, Press the
Delete Key and the Press Enter.
You may return to the default settings for
MyTSpcl by pressing
the Return to Default button.
You may edit the Initialization file by clicking
on the "Edit" button.
You may return to the Installation defaults by
clicking on the Return to Installation Defaults
button. (This will copy the ONSCREEN.ORG
file from the OnScreen Installation Directory to
the Windows Directory.) If you do this, we
suggest you exit OnScreen and restart.
472
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
Windows Notes
Tablet PC (Windows Vista / 7)
The Tablet PC Input Panel interface used in
Windows XP is not available in Windows Vista
/ 7. OnScreen can be used in conjunction with
the various Tablet PC Input Panel options
available within Windows Vista / 7.
Fast User Switching (Windows XP)
Upon a switch from or to a user session, the
software reacts to the
WM_WTSSESSION_CHANGE message by
verifying the software is not minimized, and
restoring setup from the saved configuration.
See the SessionChangeEnabled setting in the
Initialization file.
Korean Windows, default IME (Windows
XP)
The IME creates a VK_PROCESSKEY /
473
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
WM_KEYUP message when the pointing
device does a ?BUTTONUP event, causing
problems with the building of characters from
the Korean layout.
Sounds (Advanced Notes)
External Wave File Integration
Version Specific Notes: If Sounds=1 or
Sounds=2 is set in the commercial
versions (i.e. non-Assistive Technology
version), the following details files and
naming requirements.
For foreign or custom keyboards and other
uses, OnScreen allows the user to replace the
pre-recorded voice descriptions of the keys.
474
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
Note that "Voices" must be selected in
OnScreen Setup, Sounds to enable this feature.
To add your own wave file, simply record the
description required, and then place the wave
file into the installation directory in the Sounds
folder (directory) (Default C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\SOUNDS) according to the
following convention:
Each numbered key description should have a
wave file
associated with the naming convention - Key 0,
the Escape
key, would be "0.WAV" - Key 1, the F1 key,
would be "1.WAV"
and so on up to "100.WAV", etc.
In other words, if there is a "0.WAV" file in the
Sounds folder, and
Voices is the selected Sounds option, then the
475
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
"0.WAV" file
will be played whenever the Escape key is
pressed on OnScreen.
If the Sound option is Key-Click and there is a
"KEYCLICK.WAV" in
the Sounds folder, then this wave will be
played whenever a key on
OnScreen is pressed.
Key# Description
0 Escape Key
1 F1
2 F2
3 F3
4 F4
5 F5
6 F6
476
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
7 F7
8 F8
9 F9
10 F10
11 F11
12 F12
13 Select key
14 1/!
15 2/@
16 3/#
17 4/$
18 5/%
19 6/^
20 7/&
21 8/*
477
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
22 9/(
23 0/)
24 -/_
25 =/+
26 Back space
27 Tab
28 Q
29 W
30 E
31 R
32 T
33 Y
34 U
35 I
36 O
478
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
37 P
38 [/{
39 ]/}
40 Caps Lock
41 A
42 S
43 D
44 F
45 G
46 H
47 J
48 K
49 L
50 ;/:
51 ’/"
479
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
52 Enter Key
53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &
53.WAV
54 Shift / Left Shift
55 Z
56 X
57 C
58 V
59 B
60 N
61 M
62 ,/<
63 ./>
64 //?
65 Shift / Right Shift
480
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
66 \/|
67 Control / Left Control
68 Alt / Left Alt
69 Space Bar
70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr
71 Control / Left Control
These are on the edit panel
72 Print Screen
73 Scroll Lock
74 Pause
75 Insert
76 Home
77 Page Up
78 Delete
79 End
481
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
80 Page Down
81 Up Arrow
82 Left Arrow
83 Down Arrow
84 Right Arrow
These are on the Numeric keypad panel
85 CL indicator / not processed as key
86 NL indicator / not processed as key
87 SL indicator / not processed as key
88 Num Lock
89 /
90 *
91 92 7
93 8
482
Chapter 9. Operation Notes
94 9
95 +
96 4
97 5
98 6
99 1
100 2
101 3
102 Enter / =
103 0
104 decimal point
483
Chapter 10. Initialization
File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OnScreen uses ONSCREEN.INI to maintain
various options and configuration settings.
Depending on the version of Windows and
settings, there may be one file per user or a
shared file for all users.
OnScreen Initialization File
Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Listed below are settings and information for
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
specific applications that require special
actions by OnScreen, along with the
Configuration settings for OnScreen. The
Brackets [ ] denote the area in the
ONSCREEN.INI file, or the application name
where special consideration is required. Any
lines starting with a semi-colon ( e.g. ; ) are
comments and detailed information not found
in the ONSCREEN.INI file.
IMPORTANT NOTE: This documentation
stretches back over 20 years, covers 4
major releases of Windows families, and
over a dozen specific Windows versions.
Due to changes in the operating
environment, certain settings and
configuration options have become
obsolete. In most cases, these remain
documented and notated as obsolete. For
customer support (and the sometimes
extremely specific customer needs), the
multitude of options & flexibility has
485
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
become a crucial aspect of this software.
Because of this, every last capability
needs to be documented somewhere, and
this chapter is used for that purpose.
All Settings are the default Settings of
OnScreen.
[Configuration]
The following is the default configuration for
OnScreen at Install.
(Added in 1.78)
ConfigPath=1
This setting determines where the
configuration files will be located.
ConfigPath=0 means the configuration files
will be in the installation folder - there are no
per user configuration files with this setting and
user permissions must allow read-write access
486
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
to at least the KEYBOARD.KBF and
ONSCREEN.INI, or users must run with a
fixed (read-only) configuration. When
ConfigPath=1 or ConfigPath=2, each user will
have their own configuration files. If
ConfigPath=3, these are in shared among all
users in a public location.
Note that the ONSCREEN.INI file in the
installation folder determines the location of
new users’ configuration files, and if an
administrator changes this after OnScreen has
already been used by other users, their existing
individual configuration files will NOT be
transferred to the new location. What will
happen is the software will be unable to find
configuration files for the current user in the
current specified path, and a copy of the
current configuration files will be used as a
starting point for this new location.
This is a breakdown by Operating System of
487
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the specific locations used - [User] indicates
the actual user logged onto the system, and
[ProductDir] indicates the Product’s directory
name, e.g. the ONSCREEN folder.
ConfigPath Locations
ConfigPath: 0
Windows 2000/XP: \Program
Files\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7: \Program
Files\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 1
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and
Settings\[User]\Application Data\Innovation
Management Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7:
C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Roaming\Innovation
Management Group\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 2
488
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and
Settings\[User]\Local Settings\Application
Data\Innovation Management
Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7:
C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Local\Innovation
Management Group\[ProductDir]
ConfigPath: 3
Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents and
Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Innovation Management
Group\[ProductDir]
Windows Vista/7:
C:\ProgramData\Innovation Management
Group\[ProductDir]
Contention=1
The Contention setting is the global or
overriding setting - This must be set to 1 for
the individual application settings to be
recognized by OnScreen - if you wish
489
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OnScreen to remain over all applications, set
Contention=0 - you will need to be careful in
certain applications as noted in the individual
application settings below. This is referred to
"React to Dialogs..." in OnScreen Setup,
additional details can be found in the Help for
the Operation Options dialog.
(Obsolete since 1.70)
InterfaceApproach=1
OnScreen has several internal strategies to
interface with other windows in the Windows
environment. It is believed that the strategy
indicated by InterfaceApproach=1 is the best
for all windows applications. This is obsolete
for all 32-bit versions. This is left for reference
purposes & a reminder that the software still
has internal options regarding the interface
approach.
OpenFirst=1
490
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OpenAbout=0
OpenFirst is set at installation to automatically
open with the OnScreen splash screen and go
directly into the OnScreen Welcome. This is set
to 0 once OnScreen runs the first time. It is not
used again. If OpenAbout=1, OnScreen will
Open with the OnScreen Splash Screen instead
of the quick OnScreen logo. It primarily is a
left over from the development stages of the
opening logo, but was left in for those user’s
who don’t mind or prefer the longer opening.
OpenCentered=0
If OpenCentered=1, then the OnScreen
window will be centered and placed in the
lower portion of the screen (based on the
current resolution). This overrides the position
setting saved in the KBF file. Also, this will set
OpenCentered=0, making this a one-time use
setting. When set, the internal logic centers
horizontally based on the System metrics
491
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(GetSystemMetrics API) for FullScreen X, and
lower part of the screen based on FullScreen Y
(single monitor). This can be useful for
externally controlling opening position by
overriding the KBF positioning, for testing, or
for first-open / display situations.
NoSplash=0
If NoSplash=0, then the splash (opening
introduction) screens are used at Startup of
OnScreen. If NoSplash=1, then the intro
screens are not used, and OnScreen opens as
previously configured. This option can be
initiated at run-time / via a shortcut by adding
the -NoSplash option to the command line.
(e.g. "C:\Program
Files\ONSCREEN\ONSCREEN.EXE
-NoSplash")
TypeMatic=1
StartDelay=500
492
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
KeyDelay=20
The TypeMatic settings are for automatic
typing when you hold down a key on
OnScreen. Set TypeMatic=1 if you wish this
type of action, or set TypeMatic=0 if you wish
to disable automatic typing. The StartDelay
and KeyDelay are only meaningful if
TypeMatic=1. StartDelay is the delay in
milliseconds a key must be held down before
the TypeMatic action begins. The default is 500
milliseconds or 1/2 a second. The KeyDelay is
the delay between successive keystrokes sent.
The KeyDelay setting is also in milliseconds.
Note that the enable/disable key options
override the typematic setting. Note also that
TypeMatic is available in OnScreen Setup |
Configuration | Operation Options.
Cursor=2100
This is the current cursor that OnScreen uses
while over the OnScreen Keyboard display.
493
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Valid settings are as follows:
Small Right Hand is 2000
Small Left Hand is 2020
Small Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =
2040
Small Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =
2060
Large Right Hand is 2100
Large Left Hand is 2120
Large Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =
2140
Large Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =
2160
Standard Arrow = 2600
CrossHairs = 2620
Dot = 2640
494
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Invisible / clear = 2660
TrapDialAKeyCursor=1
Note - the name is a hold-over from the
Dial-A-Key option. In OnScreen, this is the
setting that indicates whether the cursor will be
displayed over the Magnifier panel. If
TrapDialAKeyCursor=1, the cursor will be
displayed over the magnified image. If
TrapDialAKeyCursor=0, the cursor will not be
shown.
Icon=3100
This is the OnScreen Icon to that OnScreen
will use when OnScreen minimizes to an icon.
Valid Settings are: Fixed Icons, OnScreen
logos, Keyboard images, etc. 3000, 3001,
3002, 3003, 3004, 3005, 3006, 3007 OnScreen
Text Icons (diff’t colors) 3050, 3051, 3052,
3053, 3054, 3055, 3056 Animating icons 3100,
3104, 3108
495
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Obsolete)
IconAnimate=0
NOTE: This is a holdover from the original
Windows 3.0 release. For all Windows versions
beyond 1995, this should be 0. The Icon
settings are for which Icon OnScreen displays
upon minimizing to an icon, and if the icon
should animate. NOTE: Some icons are not
meant to animate, so if IconAnimate=1 the
only animation action will be to flash the
border. The IconAnimate setting is used to tell
OnScreen to animate the icon if it is an
animating icon and IconAnimate=1. Set
IconAnimate=0 to disable icon animation.
(Obsolete)
IconOnTop=1
NOTE: This is a holdover from the original
Windows 3.0 release. For all Windows versions
beyond 1995, this is not used. If IconOnTop=1,
496
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the Icon will remain as a topmost window, so
the icon will always be visible. If
IconOnTop=0, the OnScreen icon will be a
normal window, and will fall behind other
windows.
MinimizeToButton=1
If MinimizeToButton=1, OnScreen will
minimize to a button (title bar button) instead
of an Icon, and ignore other Icon settings. If
MinimizeToButton=0, OnScreen will minimize
to an Icon (Taskbar button). If
MinimizeToButton=2, then the Tray Icon will
be used. If MinimizeToButton=3, then
OnScreen will minimize to a movable/sizable
window.
CaptionWatch=0
ButtonOffsetX=0
ButtonOffsetY=0
497
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
These are special settings for the Minimize to
Button option. Since there may be other
windows that use the top left portion of the
caption bar, the following settings may help
alleviate any conflicts:
In Windows 95 & greater, the right side of the
caption bar is used - negative values may be
used to adjust towards the left. If
CaptionWatch=1, OnScreen will sense if there
is a Window other than the window that owns
the caption bar in the area that the OnScreen
button will be placed. OnScreen will then
move to the right of the Window that is already
in the caption bar. If the above does not work
for your application, you may add in button
offsets to move the top-left position of the
button - these will be added to the original
position of the button and the OnScreen button
will then be placed at the offset.
(Added in 1.76)
498
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ButtonOverrideW=0
ButtonOverrideH=0
By default, the button sizes to the height of the
caption bar (title bar) using the GDI call
StretchBlt. A customer requested the ability to
modify the width of the button for touchscreen
users, so these settings have been added to
allow full customization of the displayed
button (when minimize to the button state is
selected). For both ButtonOverrideW (width),
and ButtonOverrideH (height), if set to 0, then
the default calculations occur (e.g. fixed width,
size height to caption bar). If ButtonOverrideW
is non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) is
used for the width. If ButtonOverrideH is
non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) is
used for the height. DO NOT USE negative
values - your button will not appear! (Select an
alternative minimize option to get at OnScreen
if this occurs). Because the Stretch Bitmap call
499
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
is used to fill out the display, the button display
may be distorted, especially as you get further
from the default size.
Minimize to Window Options (Floating
button in a Window): In 1.79, these
settings take on a meaning when
MinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to a
floating button in a movable/sizable
window). A customer requested the ability
to open in the minimized state, yet
separate the default opening position of
the floating window and the keyboard. To
accommodate this, these settings take on
similar meanings for the Window minimize
option. If ButtonOverrideW is non-0, then
the width for the floating window is
specified in the INI setting. Similarly, if
ButtonOverrideH is non-0, then the height
for the floating window is specified in the
INI setting.
500
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonOverrideX=-20000
ButtonOverrideY=-20000
By default, the button positions itself on the
active window’s caption bar (title bar). A
customer requested the ability to force the
minimized button to always position itself in
one place on the screen. When these values are
present in the INI file (or any value greater than
-20000), then the entered ButtonOverrideX and
/ or ButtonOverrideY values will be used when
minimized to a button. For example, if
ButtonOverrideX=754 and
ButtonOverrideY=0, then the button will
always position itself on the upper right (800 x
600) of the screen, ignoring the active window.
These settings are independent internally, but
in practical usage they need to specificy a fixed
screen position.
501
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Minimize to Window Options (Floating
button in a Window): In 1.79, these
settings take on a meaning when
MinimizeToButton=3 (minimize to a
floating button in a movable/sizable
window). A customer requested the ability
to open in the minimized state, yet
separate the default opening position of
the floating window and the keyboard. To
accommodate this, these settings take on
similar meanings for the Window minimize
option. If ButtonOverrideX is something
other than -20000, then the X screen
position for the floating window is as set in
this INI setting. Similarly, if
ButtonOverrideY is something other than
-20000, then the Y screen position for the
floating window is as set in this INI setting.
If command line overrides are used, they
will be used (these settings will not
override the command line override).
502
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=0,0
If this entry exists in the INI file, then this
establishes a lower limit (if both the x,y entries
are non-0), then these values will be used as a
check against the active window, and if the
window’s size (X and Y) is less than the entries
specified here, then the button will NOT
position on this window. This was requested by
a customer to prevent the button from moving
to small display windows. For example, if
ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=100,100 than any
window less than 100 x 100 will be ignored
when determining the active window. Note that
BOTH entries are used, so if a window is 200 x
50, then it would not be ignored, since the X
value is not less than 100.
(Added in 1.78)
ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=0
503
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
If ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=1, then a call to
GetSystemMetrics(SM_CMONITORS) is
called and if the system has only 1 monitor,
then the button will not be allowed to move
off-screen (for example, if the active window
has a title bar off screen, or the window is
wider than the screen). The
ButtonOffsetX/ButtonOffsetY entries are used
in the calculation, but the screen will still limit
the location of the minimized button. If
ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=2, then the single
screen limit will be used, regardless of how
many monitors in the system.
BackgroundColor=6201
The BackgroundColor setting is the Keyboard
Background color that paints the background
of the Keyboard & Edit & Magnifier panels.
Valid settings are as follows:
6200 - 6215 Solid Colors
504
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
6216 - 6230 Various Dithered
Grays/White/Black
Note: The dithered colors may paint
improperly on some OnScreen sizes.
SlideOption=1
If SlideOption=1 OnScreen panels will slide
out & snap in.
If SlideOption=0 OnScreen panels will snap
out & snap in.
Size=9
This is the OnScreen display size. Valid sizes
are 1-12 if set manually.
Version 1.67 added infinite sizes - values
greater than 12 should not be handled here use the SzUp & SzDn in the software to
change sizes larger than 12. The software
handles the transition from 1 to 9, 10 to 12, 12
to 13, and 13 and larger differently. The sizing
505
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
issues arise from maintaining the aspect ratio,
visual aesthetics, and internal coding that
should be reworked. At some point, it may be.
As it exists, arbitrarily changing the sizes in
increments greater than 1 can cause problems,
especially if crossing the transition from the
original sizes (i.e. 1-12) and larger sizes. It is
recommended that all sizing be handled within
the normal operation of the software. Refer to
the Devevloper’s Kit utilities, such as Copy
and Configure MTS, that can arbitrarily change
the size configuration of OnScreen on-the-fly
for sizing flexibility.
SizeMax=12 (example)
SizeMin=8 (example)
When these values are present, they determine
boundaries where the user cannot change the
size below SizeMin or above SizeMax. When
the size is at the SizeMin, the SzDn key and
menu options to size down are disabled, and
506
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
when the size is at the SizeMax, the SzUp and
menu options to size up are disabled. These
can be used together, or independently. These
settings were requested by a customer to keep a
set range of sizes available to the user, but not
let the user stray too far from the preferred
working sizes.
Center=1
RestorePosition=0
The Center setting is used to automatically
center OnScreen on the screen if it is
repositioned due to an window conflict. Set
Center=1 if you wish to center OnScreen when
it is moved, or Set Center=0 if you wish
OnScreen stay in the same horizontal position
on the screen. If RestorePosition=1, OnScreen
will remember the screen position it was at
when it was forced to move due to a window
conflict, and then restore that position when the
conflicting window is no longer the active
507
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
window. If RestorePosition=0, OnScreen will
remain at its new position when forced to move
due to a window conflict. Note: Window
conlicts are set below in the Class Settings for
window Classes & Actions. Note: Most users
felt that it was less annoying for OnScreen to
remain at its new position, than to constantly
jump back & forth.
TwoButtonMouse=1
If TwoButtonMouse=1, then OnScreen will
ignore the middle button, regardless of the
MouseButtons settings below, and OnScreen
Setup will not allow the user to change the
middle button setting. If TwoButtonMouse=0
OnScreen & OnScreen Setup will assume there
is a 3 button Mouse, and that the proper drivers
are installed for use within Windows.
IMPORTANT: OnScreen will not work with
the middle button if the proper drivers are not
installed. The default IBM PS/2, Microsoft
508
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
drivers do not support the middle button, and
even some drivers of 3 button mice do not
support the middle button within Windows.
Check with your mouse manufacturer to obtain
the proper drivers if you have a 3 button mouse
and Windows does not recognize the middle
button.
Keyboard=1
This is the Keyboard description file OnScreen
uses to define the 101 Key panel layout. The
104 layouts start in the 100+ range, so adding
100 to the 2-digit listing refers to the 104 key
layouts, e.g. 101 is the US Standard 104 key
layout. Over the 20 years & different Windows
versions, our support team would be notified
that a particular layout was not correct in a
certain version of Windows. Since with any
particular release, multiple versions of
Windows are supported, and it was thought
that a keyboard layout would remain
509
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
consistent, changes to the layouts were deemed
problematic - for example, if it was changed
for Windows version X, this change would
cause problems in older versions of Windows.
So certain layouts are tagged "Old" to reflect
that it might be required for an older version of
Windows. The values 1-96, and 101-196, and
any 200+ entries listed are valid, and are
related as follows:
01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. Dvorak
Standard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =
U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.
My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =
Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = Canadian
Multi-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =
Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,
14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =
Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =
Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =
Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.
510
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =
Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,
29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =
Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech
(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =
Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =
Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish
(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44
= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish
(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish
(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.
Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =
Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),
56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German
(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =
German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish
(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =
Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64
= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish
(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish
(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch
511
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =
Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese
(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =
Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish
(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =
Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),
78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),
80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish
(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =
English (Australian), 84 = English (New
Zealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English
(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88
= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =
Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.
Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish
(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =
Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the
104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104
British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2nd
alternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104
Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic
512
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Alt.)
DriveTypesToCheck=1
DefaultDrive=C
CheckFloppies=0
These values are for the System Information
display.
DriveTypesToCheck can take 4 values, which
have the following meanings:
0 = Do not check Removable Drive Types, or
Network Drives
1 = Do not check Removable Drive Types,
Check Network Drives
2 = Check Removable Drive Types, but Do Not
Check Network Drives
3 = Check Both Removable & Network Drives
DefaultDrive is the drive letter of the default
drive that OnScreen displays in the System
513
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Information Panel.
Valid letters are A through Z.
CheckFloppies=0 means that OnScreen will
not look at drive letters A or B. If
CheckFloppies=1, OnScreen will look at
Floppy Drives A and B.
CheckMinMax=1
If CheckMinMax=1, OnScreen will check for
the existence of the Minimize Button &
Maximize Button on the Caption Bar of the
Window before Minimizing or Maximizing the
window when MIN or MAX is used on the
Windows Controls Panels. Set
CheckMinMax=0 to bypass this check. This is
important for custom window displays that do
not use the standard windows controls for
Minimize and Maximize.
ClassWatch=0
514
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
WindowWatch=0
KeyWatch=0
SetActiveWindowWatch=0
SkipTopMostAction=0
These settings can be used for debugging
certain aspects of the operation within
Windows, or which specific key numbers
correspond to key operation on OnScreen
These settings are for individuals experienced
with Windows Environment and window
classes & names, and Windows programming,
or at least its concepts.
The ClassWatch & WindowWatch settings are
for watching the Class Name & Window Name
of the active Window. These primarily are for
finding this information so that the Special
Settings & Class Settings can be modified for
OnScreen to work with other application
515
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Windows. If ClassWatch=1 OnScreen will
display on the upper portion of the display the
Class Name of the active window. If
WindowWatch=1 OnScreen will display on the
upper portion of the display the Window Name
of the active window. Once this information
has been determined, the ClassWatch &
WindowWatch should be set back to 0.
KeyWatch=1 will display the keys affected by
the enable/disable key option - this will display
the number + 1000. Only the alpha and edit
panel keys are displayed. This is useful if
building a different keyboard mapping, and
need to identify which key number is which.
SetActiveWindowWatch=1 will display which
internal call is being used to call the
SetForegroundWindow API from OnScreen.
This can determine which area of code is
responsible for this API call. For more details
on this, refer to Microsoft’s documentation on
516
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the SetForegroundWindow API function, and
the changes that occurred in Windows 2000
with regards to changing the keyboard focus
and active (i.e. foreground) window
programmatically. This entry also serves a
double duty, and it displays a code identifying
the internal call used to save data to the
KEYBOARD.KBF file.
If SkipTopMostAction=1, this bypasses the
internal code that tries to bring OnScreen to the
topmost position during normal operation. In
general, having an on-screen keyboard fall
behind other windows is not productive.
However, there can be conflicts and issues if
multiple windows are trying to maintain the
topmost position in the Windows internal
window manager list. Also, it has been the
general consensus that menus in the system
remain above the on-screen keyboard. During
operation from a pen, touchscreen, or other
517
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
pointing device, selecting menu selections is
easier, more intuitive, and more effective
directly from the pointing device, rather than
indirectly from the on-screen keyboard. You
can refer to the MenuClasses entry below for
Menu interface options. For debugging
purposes, or to see how OnScreen will operate
by bypassing this window interface code, you
can set SkipTopMostAction=1.
SetupSaveSettings=0
(The next 2 are obsolete)
SetupAutoLoad=0
SetupAutoRun=0
These settings are for OnScreen Setup to track
whether OnScreen has been configured for
these special settings. They are used as follows:
The SetupSaveSettings is used if OnScreen is
running. If SetupSaveSettings=1, OnScreen
518
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
will update its configuration file when
OnScreen Setup is closed. This will ensure that
OnScreen will open with the current
configuration. This is default set to 0 so the
user can become familiar with all of the
OnScreen configuration options before
deciding which configuration OnScreen will
open with. If the user is confused as to why
OnScreen does not open the way they left it,
then this setting should be set to 1. NOTE: This
will only work for configuration changes made
in OnScreen Setup. SetupAutoLoad &
SetupAutoRun are used internally to track
whether OnScreen has modified the WIN.INI
file "load" and "run" options.
The SetupAutoLoad and SetupAutoRun have
been disabled since version 1.32 because of
user confusion. Most users use the StartUp
group, or understand the Load and Run settings
in the WIN.INI. They remain because they may
519
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
be reworked and included in a future release.
EnableOperator=0
Password=5F626274
(OnScreen Note - The EnableOperator setting
is used for the Basic & Advanced modes in
OnScreen - the Password and
Supervisor/Operator mode are not available in
OnScreen)
The Supervisor/Operator mode has been
included, but it is default off. If
EnableOperator=1, then OnScreen opens in the
Operator mode. This disables the OnScreen
Tool button, and the OnScreen Menu button,
and requires a password to be entered before
OnScreen Setup is opened. This effectively
limits the Operator to one (saved)
configuration, but allows a supervisor to
modify or change the OnScreen configuration
if necessary.
520
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Note: The password is encrypted - the default
entry above corresponds to "PASS". The
OnScreen Control Panel should NOT be
available for use by the Operator, as this would
allow the operator to modify the OnScreen
configuration. Note that once the Setup
password has been entered, OnScreen operates
in the supervisor mode. Close both Setup &
OnScreen, then restart OnScreen to re-enable
the operator mode.
OperatorNoMin=0
(OnScreen note - this requires the
Supervisor/Operator mode and therefore is not
available in OnScreen)
The default Operator mode still allows the
operator to minimize OnScreen. To Disable
this option, set OperatorNoMin=1, and the
minimize button will no longer function,
disabling all of the buttons on the Tool Bar.
521
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ControlLogo=0
(OnScreen note: This is not supported)
When in operator mode, it is sometimes
desirable to remove the visual display of the
buttons on the Tool Bar. When ControlLogo=1,
an optional Bitmap file will be loaded and
displayed over the Tool Bar buttons. This is a
developer enhancement, and the following
details assume a general understanding of
Windows:
Requirements for ControlLogo=1
In the installation or user directory specified by
ConfigPath, 12 bitmap files corresponding to
the 12 sizes of OnScreen need to be created:
NAME, WIDTH IN PIXELS, HEIGHT IN
PIXELS
LOGO01.BMP, 12, 46
LOGO02.BMP, 15, 58
522
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
LOGO03.BMP, 18, 70
LOGO04.BMP, 21, 82
LOGO05.BMP, 24, 94
LOGO06.BMP, 27, 106
LOGO07.BMP, 30, 118
LOGO08.BMP, 33, 130
LOGO09.BMP, 36, 142
LOGO10.BMP, 47, 190
LOGO11.BMP, 62, 250
LOGO12.BMP, 83, 322
These files could be created via PaintBrush, or
any other tool that creates bitmaps. Only
16-color bitmaps are recommended because of
memory & speed issues, but higher resolutions
should operate satisfactorily. However, only
16-color bitmaps are guaranteed to work. If no
bitmap file is present for the current size, then
523
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
no buttons are displayed, and a black
background appears. Sample/template bitmaps
may be downloaded via IMG’s Web site at
http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm
Prior to the 1.78 release, the installation path
was the only possible location. In the original
1.78 release, this actually used the location of
the user’s configuration, e.g. the path based on
the ConfigPath entry. In 1.78 Release 2, the
following logic is used: The location specified
by the ConfigPath entry is used, and if the logo
bitmap file does not exist, the installation
folder is tried. This allows more flexibility, so
that different users can have different custom
logos, or a machine level setting can be used
by placing the logo bitmaps in the installation
folder. This can also allow a specific user to
override the default logos.
Editor=NOTEPAD.EXE
ControlPanel=CONTROL.EXE
524
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ControlPanelKeyboard=rundll32.exe
shell32.dll,Control_RunDLL main.cpl @1,1
These are the default settings for OnScreen
Setup. Editor is the Executable used to modify
the ONSCREEN.INI file accessed from
OnScreen Setup, Configuration, Special.
ControlPanel is the Windows Control Panel
accessed by OnScreen Setup, Keyboards.
ControlPanelKeyboard is the Windows
Keyboard Layout Applet for selecting the
current keyboard layout that is in use. These
may be changed if relevant for the Windows
Configuration in use.
InstallPath=C:\%PROGRAMFILESDIR%\ON
This is created at Installation time to signify
the chosen InstallPath. If you need to move
OnScreen, we suggest you Un-Install, and then
re-install OnScreen to the new path.
ShowKeys=111111111111111111111111111111
525
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This setting indicates which keys are visible
for the standard keyboard (Alpha) panel. The
Esc key is key 0 and the count increases from
left to right, row by row. A 1 indicates that the
key is visible, and a 0 indicates that the key
will not be painted, and not accessible.
AllowFrameMove=1
This is for controlled applications, or where
there may be extraneous movement caused by
the touchscreen driver. If AllowFrameMove=1
then any non-key area will trigger the move
OnScreen action via click & drag. If
AllowFrameMove=0, then it will not be
possible to move OnScreen via the selected
button click. OnScreen must be moved via a
secondary button selection (OnScreen Setup,
Mouse Buttons) or by an external application.
VirtualPointer=1
If VirtualPointer=0, then the default action of
526
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OnScreen for button clicks and moves is in use.
This setting is best for standard system
hardware such as the mouse, trackball,
touchscreen, or pen. Set VirtualPointer=1 if
software control for the mouse cursor (pointer),
or other devices are in use. If there are any
problems experienced while moving the
OnScreen window using a click, drag, release,
then VirtualPointer=1 may also be tried.
SingleKeyPerClick=0
This setting is used to distinguish the operation
of OnScreen for clicks. The default action
(SingleKeyPerClick=0) is to act exactly like a
physical mechanical spring key, where a down
click; drag off motion will generate a
keystrokes (i.e. once the finger is dragged off
the key, it will bounce up and this will generate
a keystroke). If SingleKeyPerClick=1, then
only the key that was pointed to during the
down click will be generated, even if the cursor
527
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
is dragged onto adjacent keys or other parts of
the OnScreen window. If the cursor is dragged
off of the OnScreen window while this setting
is on, then the key-up event will occur, and the
keystroke will be generated. It is recommended
that the Typematic setting be set off if
SingleKeyPerClick is set on to disable multiple
keystrokes of the same "down" key.
BorderNoHit=0
This setting is used to identify pixels around
the edge of the keys (top, left, bottom, right)
that will not be used to identify a key press.
Since the setting is in pixels, the actual values
will differ between the 12 sizes available. A
setting of 6 for OnScreen size 8 will create a
noticeable border. Valid values are from 0 to
100. Note that a pixel value larger than the 1/2
the key size in pixels will result in an unusable
configuration, and values larger than the key
may create software errors in internal
528
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
calculations.
ForceUnHook=0
The ForceUnHook option toggles an internal
variable that is used to track whether the
system journal hooks should be set at all times,
or only when the cursor is over a typing panel.
The primary reason for this is to test / resolve
potential conflicts with other software
applications.
Note: Because of internal operation of the
variable, it is opposite to the displayed setting
in Operation Options, e.g. ForceUnHook=0
results from Track Pointing Device input at all
times being set On (checked), and
ForceUnHook=1 results from Track Pointing
Device input at all times being set Off (cleared)
1.70 notes: This has taken on a stronger
meaning with the 1.70 release. We have found
that only a few non-mouse drivers truly
529
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
emulate the mouse driver functionality. In order
to support touchscreen, pen, and non-mouse
drivers that do not put sufficient delays (and let
other window processes run) between the move
and click events, the system hooks Always on
(i..e. Track Pointining Device Input at all
times) is required to handle focus issues in all
pre-Win 2000 versions of Windows. In general,
a mouse cannot generate a click until it is
moved into position (generating
WM_MOUSEMOVE messages over the target
window) - OnScreen uses these messages to set
System hooks in preparation for the possible
WM_?BUTTONDOWN messages, to prevent
the focus switching events. When a
touchscreen, pen, or other non-mouse driver
moves & sends click events without a delay or
release to other window processes running
(part of the pseudo- multitasking required by
properly written windows programs),
OnScreen cannot prepare for the focus shifting
530
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
events. "Click on release" settings in the driver
may alleviate the undesirable results, or
leaving these hooks Always on can also make
for more desirable operation. A great deal of
effort was made to resolve the focus issues
without the use of these system hooks, but only
through the use of these could seamless
operation occur throughout all windows
applications & input situations. If problems
arise where the system hooks settings causes
OnScreen to become unresponsive, setting
Track Pointing Device Input at all times off
may resolve this situation, and investigating
options within the pointing device driver
(touchscreen, pen, etc.) may be helpful.
2 additional notes
1) Windows 2000 and above do not require the
use of system hooks, so this setting is not
relevant (and the situations described above do
not apply)
531
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
2) Try OnScreen on the system with an actual
mouse device - if the problems do not occur,
please contact the device driver manufacturer
and inform them that their pointing device
driver does not emulate a mouse properly.
NoHooksEver=0
This is the setting called Alternate Virtual
Interface in OnScreen Setup In Windows
2000/XP, there is no need for the system
hooks, and this setting is automatically enabled
when running in Windows 2000/XP. In testing
with older and assistive technology devices &
software, it was found that some of these
require this setting (95/98/Me/NT). If you
experience any typing difficulties & a general
non-responsiveness from OnScreen, you may
try NoHooksEver=1 (Alternate Virtual
Interface set On).
(This is obsolete)
532
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
RunAddFontResource=0
This was added to remove the call to the
AddFontResource Windows API for Windows
95 / 98. On certain systems, the delay induced
by Windows during this call caused problems
in other programs / Windows during startup.
Since it is not required if the software was
properly installed, it was removed in version
1.61. It still is called if run in Windows 3.1. Set
RunAddFontResource=1 to force this call
during startup in Windows 95 / 98. This
settings has no effect for Windows 3.1.
KeyboardUpdate=0
This setting is used as a flag when a keyboard
layout is modified in Setup to indicate that the
character set, AltGr status, and lowercase
display setting should be read from the KMF
file. It is managed automatically through Setup,
but if keyboard layouts are modified manually,
533
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
it may be wise to set this to 1 prior to running
OnScreen.
KeyboardFontBase=MyTMouse
KeyboardFontMedium=MyTMouse
KeyboardFontLarge=Arial
KeyboardCharSetBase=22
KeyboardCharSetMedium=22
KeyboardCharSetLarge=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjBase=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium=0
Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge=1
Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all
uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.
Medium Sizes are 7-9.
Large Sizes are 10-12 and sizes greater than 12.
534
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The Character Set for Base / Medium / Large
(KeyboardCharSet...) settings allow changing
the character set used to reference the keyboard
characters.
The following lists documented sets
ANSI_CHARSET = 0
DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1
SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2
MyTMouse = 22
MAC_CHARSET = 77
SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128
HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129
HANGUL_CHARSET = 129
JOHAB_CHARSET = 130
GB2312_CHARSET = 134
CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136
535
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
GREEK_CHARSET = 161
TURKISH_CHARSET = 162
VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163
HEBREW_CHARSET = 177
ARABIC_CHARSET = 178
BALTIC_CHARSET = 186
RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204
THAI_CHARSET = 222
EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238
OEM_CHARSET = 255
In general, use 22 for MyTMouse and 0
(ANSI) otherwise.
This affects the Windows GDI selection of
fonts, and can be useful if specific characters
are not being selected as desired from the
current KYBD????.KMF.
536
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The Keyboard1SizeAdj... settings refers to the
amount subtracted from the available area of
the key (total pixels) used to display the font
character. Even though it strongly affects key
displays of 1 character (i.e. alphanumeric keys
on the Keyboard (Alpha) panel), it does have
some effect on all buttons displayed. As the
numbers increase the calculated area available
for the required display character(s) becomes
smaller, forcing a smaller font to display.
LowerCaseDisplay=1
If LowerCaseDisplay=1, then the default
keyboard display will contain lower case
characters, only changing to upper case when
the Shift or Caps Lock is engaged. If
LowerCaseDisplay=0, then Upper Case
characters will always be used on the keyboard
display.
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0
537
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This setting was asked for by a customer using
the TS version with Citrix. Apparently there
are some synchronization problems within
different client versions of Citrix, and the Caps
lock operation can be inconsistent. By default,
OnScreen queries the system to establish the
Caps Lock state - on a normal PC, this operates
as one would expect - the Caps Lock state
stays in sync between the physical keyboard
and OnScreen. By setting
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1, the portions of
code that monitor the system Caps lock state
are bypassed. Note that when the Caps Lock
key is used on OnScreen, the appropriate
keystroke is sent, but the state (key display /
Caps lock ligh on Num panel) within OnScreen
will not reflect the change, because the system
is not being queried, and these updates are
bypassed. In order to address all possible
system situations based on the Caps Lock state,
additional options have been added. The
538
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
following lists the 6 different settings available
for IgnoreSystemCapsLock:
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0 (Default)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1 Does not repaint
based on System Caps Lock
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=2 Paint Capped
keys based on Internal Caps Lock state, but
do not change key action
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=3 Paint Capped
keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to shifted state if capped
(This emulates Caps Lock action if Caps
Lock is NEVER set on system)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=4 Paint Capped
keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to shifted state if NOT
capped (This emulates Caps Lock action if
Caps Lock is ALWAYS set on system)
539
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
•
IgnoreSystemCapsLock=5 Paint Capped
keys based on Internal Caps Lock state,
change key action to opposite of capped
state (this would be used if the caps lock
state is always opposite the Internal Caps
lock state - however, this suggests the caps
lock works on the system, so you really
shouldn’t be ignoring it)
CapsLockMode=0
If CapsLockMode=0, then the key will visually
latch based on the Caps Lock mode, e.g. the
Caps Lock will be shown as a key down for
Caps Lock On, key up for Caps Lock Off. If
CapsLockMode=1, then the Caps Lock key
will be treated as any other key, and not tied to
Caps Lock State
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0
This setting is to accommodate the change
from Common User Interface (Consistent User
540
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Interface) (Consistent??) options for Cut Copy
Paste & Undo. Most applications support both
versions, but for those that do not, or require
the original keystrokes, this setting has been
provided. Note that OnScreen uses the newer
version by default.
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0 means:
Cut = Ctrl-X
Copy = Ctrl-C
Paste = Ctrl-V
Undo = Ctrl-Z
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=1 means:
Cut = Shift-Del
Copy = Ctrl-Ins
Paste = Shift-Ins
Undo = Alt-Backspace
DragMode=2
541
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The DragMode setting was added to be more
consistent with the Windows appearance
settings. The following are the settings & what
they mean: DragMode=0, drag full window
contents, ignore Windows settings;
DragMode=1, drag with focus rectangle,
ignore Windows settings; DragMode=2, use
Windows settings to determine drag mode
HoldShiftCtrl=0
This was added as a test for a customer, and
has been left as an option. By default,
OnScreen holds the shift & control state until
the key is actually sent. For example, with a
Shift-T - this results in a Shift-Down at the
shift key press, then a T-down, T-up, Shift-up
after a T key press. (Same for the Ctrl key).
With HoldShiftCtrl=1, the Shift-down is held
until the T key press, resulting in a Shift-down,
T-down, T-up, Shift-up when the T key is
released. The Alt key is the System key in
542
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Windows, and it is not included within this
option.
MenuOffset=200
This setting was added in 1.70 to address
Windows 98 & its multiple monitor support.
This is updated internally as the popup
OnScreen menu is is used (offset is the width
of menu). Windows 98 incorrectly displays the
menu off screen (does not adjust to ensure that
the menu is visible on the screen). Therefore,
there are some adjustments made prior to using
the Windows API TrackPopupMenu when in
Windows 98. Issues: The LICENSE.EXE
updates the registry at: HKLM\Software\
Innovation Management Group\Windows with
a version # - this must be "98" to invoke this
action (only a problem in Windows 98). The
width itself is adjusted when one of the
secondary popup menus is used (Size, Settings,
Position).
543
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
If the Windows Display Properties |
Appearance modifies the displayed width of
the popup menu, one of these menus is
required to be opened to force an update of the
offset value internally.
Transparency=0
This setting is for Windows 2000 and later.
When set to 1, various options are enabled with
OnScreen to allow modifying the transparency
for the displayed window. When enabled, the
TransparencyLevel defines how "visible" the
window is - a lower-limit of 20 has been set in
the SEETHRU.EXE (to prevent the user from
making the keyboard completely invisible),
and the level of 255 makes the window
completely opaque (the disabled state).
TransparencyLevel=75
This is the current level of visibility, where 0
means invisible, and 255 means the window is
544
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
opaque (same as if the Transparency were 0
(disabled)). The little control program
(SEETHRU.EXE) has a lower limit of 20, and
these settings are saved to this INI file when
OnScreen gets the message from SEETHRU.
You can make the window invisible by setting
Transparency=1 and TransparencyLevel=0,
and then do not run SEETHRU.EXE. See the
Developer’s Kit for external control info.
(This is obsolete)
Begin WinLogon settings
The WinLogon settings & following support
settings are for 95/98, and handled by
IMGLOGON.EXE - OnScreen Logon Utilities
The following section runs through
AllowDomainEdit.
WinLogon=0
If WinLogon=1, then special code is used to
properly type into the windows logon screen
545
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Network Client, Windows user logon, etc.).
This is a patch to work prior to release of fully
32-bit OnScreen. OnScreen should be run via
RunServices option in registry:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\Curren
(These are obsolete)
1.70 Notes
The ForcePassword????? Options only affect
operation during the use of the Map Network
Drive dialog
ForcePasswordLower=0
ForcePasswordUpper=0
These two settings change the way characters
are sent to the windows logon / password
dialog. Set ForcePasswordLower=1 to force
lowercase characters to be sent, or set
ForcePasswordUpper=1 to force uppercase
characters. ForcePasswordUpper will override
546
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the ForcePasswordLower setting.
ForcePasswordMixed=1
This setting overrides the upper & lower case
settings and allows mixed case & punctuation
entry. Most networks only allow a limited set
of password characters, but this setting was
added for additional flexibility, and set as the
default. The original specification from a
customer for this option was all Upper case,
and other customers eventually required these
additional options.
Version 1.70 Notes: DisableEnter changes, and
UserNameNotPassword and AllowDomainEdit
are not used.
DisableEnter=0
Version 1.70 modified this entry, managed by
the OnScreen Logon Utilities
This setting is used to resolve logon problems
547
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
resulting in a system hang. Typically other
software in the system is part of the problem,
and using the logon option in as clean a system
as possible is recommended. If there are
incomplete logons, or the system does not
resume normal operation after logon, the
DisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, it
was found that logon problems were related to
the system hooks being set. When
DisableEnter=0, the Enter key operates
normally. If DisableEnter=1, then the Enter
key does not process any reaction, forcing the
user to click OK on the logon dialog. The
dialogs affected are Enter Windows Password
and Enter Network Password. Note the
ForceUnHook setting should be set to 1.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
DisableEnter=0
This setting is used to resolve logon problems
resulting in a system hang. Typically other
548
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
software in the system is part of the problem,
and using the logon option in as clean a system
as possible is recommended. If there are
incomplete logons, or the system does not
resume normal operation after logon, the
DisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, it
was found that logon problems were related to
the system hooks being set. When
DisableEnter=0, the Enter key operates
normally. If DisableEnter=1 or
DisableEnter=2, the Enter key is disabled on
the OnScreen keyboard, AND during the
logon, system hooks are in use only while the
cursor is over OnScreen (see VirtualPointer,
ForceUnHook settings). This forces the user to
click on the OK button on the Password dialog,
and forces the system hooks to be disabled
during logon. If DisableEnter=1, then normal
operation resumes upon typing into any
window after logon. If DisableEnter=2, then
this forces operation similar to ForceUnHook 549
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
even after logon.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
UserNameNotPassword=0
The default keyboard focus is on the password
field. To override this (without requiring the
user to use the Tab key), set
UserNameNotPassword=1. This will force the
default keyboard focus to be on the User Name
at logon. The default (if this entry is not
present) is ;0.
(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)
AllowDomainEdit=0
By original design (at the request of a
customer), the domain was not editable (there
was no way the user could edit the domain
field). To allow this field to be edited by the
user, set AllowDomainEdit=1.
End WinLogon settings
550
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
WantATVersion=1
This setting should be 1 for OnScreen
operation - it is not available in non-AT
versions (non Assistive Technology versions).
This may be a future option, but as of the 1.73
version, it should be set to 1 for OnScreen, but
it is not used otherwise.
(OnScreen only)
SetupMode=0
This indicates whether setup is in the Basic or
Advanced mode. If SetupMode=0 then the
Basic mode is in use, and only the dialog and
options available in Basic mode are displayed.
If SetupMode=1 then Advanced mode is in
use, and all options and advanced dialogs are
displayed.
(OnScreen only)
551
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
KeyboardFile=1
This is used in conjunction with the
WordComplete & ActionPanel settings. This is
an internal setting and should not be modified
here. If KeyboardFile=1, then the
WordComplete / Action panel is in use. If
KeyboardFile=0, then only the Action panel is
in use. This setting is used internally, and
reflects the WordComplete and ActionPanel
settings. This setting indicates which panel will
open when the Tool button (Icon /Top button
on Tool bar) is used.
(OnScreen only)
WordComplete=1
If WordComplete=1, then the WordComplete
Panel is open. If WordComplete=0, then the
panel is closed. This is used by setup, and
internally by OnScreen to indicate the state of
this panel. If WordComplete=1, then
552
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ActionPanel=1.
(OnScreen only)
IntlWordComplete=0
This was added as an option, but the settings in
the selected KBF override this setting for
International Keyboards that have dead-keys,
and Alt-Gr functionality. In 1.70, it has very
little impact on operation, and should be left at
0 unless instructed to change by IMG technical
support.
(OnScreen only)
Suffixes=1
This indicates whether the Suffix mode is
enabled. If Suffixes=1, then the Suffix button
on the WordComplete panel is enabled, and
suffixes are automatically displayed after a
word Completion. If Suffixes=0 then Suffixes
are disabled, and no automatic display occurs.
553
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
ActionPanel=1
This indicates whether the Action Panel is
available. By default, the Action Panel is
included with display of the WordComplete
Panel, and is automatically set to 1 if this is the
case. If WordComplete is not enabled, then the
ActionPanel setting indicates whether the
ActionPanel is available. In general, the
internal setting of KeyboardFile overrides this
setting. The ActionPanel and WordComplete
settings are used by Setup in User Options, and
all configuration should be managed through
Setup, rather than directly manipulating these
settings.
(OnScreen only)
AutomaticU=1
If AutomaticU=1 then anytime a "Q" is used, a
"U" is automatically added to the text. If
554
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
AutomaticU=0, then this option is disabled.
(OnScreen only)
AutoSpace=1
This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &
Capitals is on. AutoSpace=1 indicates that
spaces after word completions and punctuation
are automatically added. This also enables the
Auto-Caps option that sets after a punctuation
character, enabling the first letter of a new
sentence to be capitalized. If Auto-Capitals is
engaged, any character will automatically turn
off the Caps lock. To disengage, use the Caps
Lock key.
(OnScreen only)
AutoSpaceDisable=1
This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &
Capitals sub-option of "Disable for single line
input" is on. AutoSpaceDisable=1 indicates
555
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
that when OnScreen senses a single line input,
the Automatic spaces & Capitals feature will
be disabled. When AutoSpaceDisable=0, this
special case for single-line input is not
monitored. When enabled, this features
requires a Windows event hook that monitors
the system text caret (text input cursor). This
only monitors for single line system level
"EDIT" class input windows.
(OnScreen only)
AutoCapI=1
This is used to enable internal coding that
forces a stand-alone character I to be
capitalized automatically. This is intended
primarily for normal lowercase typing as an aid
to users. This action can be disabled by setting
AutoCapI=0.
(OnScreen only)
SecondSpace=1
556
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This is used when Automatic spaces & Capitals
is on (AutoSpace=1) If SecondSpace=1, then 2
spaces are added after a punctuation character
(period, question mark, exclamation point,
etc.). If SecondSpace=0, then only a single
space is used after a punctuation character.
(OnScreen only)
AutoArrange=1
After different events, OnScreen will
automatically arrange the open windows for
smoother operation. For experienced or
sophisticated users, this may be annoying. By
setting AutoArrange=0, this default, automatic
operation is disabled. The Arrange button on
the OnScreen Action Panel will still arrange
the active window, by positioning the window
above (or below) OnScreen, and filling the
available space on the screen with the
application window.
557
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
AutoArrangeActive=0
This is only used if AutoArrange=1. When
AutoArrangeActive=1, OnScreen will monitor
the active window (only when the mouse
cursor is over the OnScreen window) and if a
new window becomes active, it will
automatically be arranged. This also has the
effect of automatically arranging the active
window when the mouse cursor is positioned
over OnScreen (which some users find helpful,
and other users find annoying). Because of this,
the setting is now separate and default off
(AutoArrangeActive=0).
(OnScreen only)
AutoSaveMove=0
In 1.78 Release 2, OnScreen Setup has been
modified to change the Operation Options
option to match the Save After Move entry in
558
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the Options menu, and use the SaveAfterMove
INI entry (see below). The AutoSaveMove
option still remains, and is implemented
slightly differently than the SaveAfterMove
option within the actual run-time software. For
practical purposes, this setting is now obsolete.
If it is used, then SaveAfterMove=0 should be
set in the INI. Internally, the AutoSaveMove
saves the configuration and position as separate
steps, while the SaveAfterMove saves the
entire KEYBOARD.KBF in a single pass.
OnScreen will ALWAYS open at the last saved
position. Originally designed to ALWAYS save
the current position after moving OnScreen,
this has been added to address customers who
dislike this default action or where confused by
the fact that sometimes OnScreen did not open
in their "saved" position. When On, OnScreen
will execute a Menu | Position | Save Position
command when a move has been completed.
559
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Turn this option Off to prevent these saves after
moving OnScreen.
(OnScreen only)
ActionPanelEnabled=31
Each button on the Action Panel may be
Enabled or Disabled. This setting uses a
decimal value that is using a binary code to
indicate each key, where 1 is Enabled and 0 is
Disabled.
These are the codes:
Back Key = 1, Size Key = 2, Select Key = 4,
Move Key = 8 and Arrange Key = 16. These
codes are added together, and then saved as the
decimal value here. A value of 31 indicates all
buttons are Enabled.
For Example:
To Enable only the Back Key & Move Key you
would add 1 and 8 to result in
560
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ActionPanelEnabled=9 When disabled the key
will be "grayed" and its action will not be
available to the user.
(OnScreen only)
KeyboardEnabled=0
If KeyboardEnabled=1 then the Physical
Keyboard is enabled for WordComplete
operation. The WordComplete Panel MUST be
displayed for proper operation. See Help, and
User Options for more details on using the
Physical Keyboard. If KeyboardEnabled=0
then the Physical Keyboard is not used.
(OnScreen only)
EnableDwell=0
If EnableDwell=1 then the Dwell Keypress
Timer is enabled. This will engage the timer
whenever the pointer (mouse cursor) remains
at one position (over OnScreen). If the delay
561
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
period expires, a click (Left or Right button
down/up sequence based on the Mouse Button
setting) will be initiated. The pointer must be
moved again to reset/restart the timer. To
disable the dwell action, set EnableDwell=0.
(OnScreen only)
DwellTime=10
This is the length of the delay period used in
EnableDwell=1. Each unit corresponds to a
tick of 50 milliseconds. The default is 10, or
0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds). The valid
range is from 1 to 100.
(OnScreen implementation only - see below
for others)
Sound=0
This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then no
sound is generated when buttons are used
within OnScreen. If Sound=1, then the
562
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
KeyClick wave sound is played every time a
button is clicked. If Sound=2, then voices are
used to describe each key (for the standard 101
keyboard). See Sounds (Advanced Notes) for a
description of how to override the default
sounds.
(Added in 1.76 for My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft,
My-T-Soft TS, My-T-Touch)
(The implementation is different than in
OnScreen (above) because default wave
resources are NOT included within the
executable - only external wave files will be
used)
Sound=0
This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then no
sound is generated when buttons are used
within OnScreen. If Sound=1, then the
KeyClick wave sound is played every time a
button is clicked (similar to OnScreen).
563
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
However, the Keyclick wave is not included in
the resources, so only the override setting will
work, using the "KEYCLICK.WAV" file in the
Sounds folder. If you wish to use a different
sound, copy the wave file over the
"KEYCLICK.WAV" file in the Sounds folder.
If Sound=2, then key numbered files are used
to describe each key pressed, as long as there is
a corresponding "numbered" entry in the
sounds folder. Refer to Sounds (Advanced
Notes) for details on key numbers, and other
notes regarding this option. Also note that
there is no user interface for this, it must be
modified in the INI file. See the NoAnnounce
setting below if Text-To-Speech services are
enabled on the platform and the announcement
triggered when Sound=1.
(Added in 1.78)
NoAnnounce=1
When Sound=1, IMGSOUND.EXE is loaded,
564
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
and if Text-To-Speech Services are available,
IMGSOUND will announce this fact by
speaking "Text-To-Speech is available". In the
commercial products, this can be annoying,
since the sound is primarily only uesd for
key-click audible feedback. Set
NoAnnounce=1 to skip this announcement. If
NoAnnounce=0, then this "Text-To-Speech is
available" announcement will be spoken.
(OnScreen only)
TopOffset=2
This is a setting used to help position
OnScreen without affecting the Taskbar. This
allows the Taskbar to be placed on top of the
screen with the Auto-Hide option enabled, and
let the user have enough "space" to trigger the
Taskbar display.
(OnScreen only)
TTSAvailable=0
565
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This is the main option to enable the
Text-To-Speech (TTS) functionality.
TTSAvailable=1 is required to enable TTS in
OnScreen, but also requires that the
appropriate classes & supporting TTS software
is installed on the system. Forcing this setting
on a system without the appropriate TTS
software installed & configured properly will
not accomplish anything. The supporting
process IMGSOUND.EXE is required to
handle the TTS requests within OnScreen.
When TTSAvailable=1 is set in OnScreen, it
enables the internal processing within
OnScreen to hand-off the speech request to the
IMGSOUND process. The setting handles the
Speak Key Text under pointer processing. If
IMGSOUND cannot find, establish the
interface, and communicate with the TTS
speech components, the TTS option will not
operate. IMG has repackaged the required
Microsoft Speech Components in
566
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
MSSPEECH.MSI (which requires the
Windows Installer). The file & the support
Windows Installer for early versions of
Windows 98 and NT 4 can be found in the
Speech folder on the distribution media, or on
the IMG WebSite. Note that IMGSOUND will
play "Text to Speech is Available" when
OnScreen starts to indicate this capability. If
the all OnScreen TTS options are disabled, this
will still occur at startup of OnScreen - to
disable this action, remove the Speech
Components - Start Menu | Settings | Control
Panel | Add/Remove programs, Speech
Components. Note that for discrete pointing
devices (touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover
well, this setting may not operate in a desirable
fashion.
(OnScreen only)
TTSRepeat=0
This setting handles the option of repeating the
567
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
same key text for constantly when over a key.
The TTSRepeat=1 will cause a constant stream
of speech requests, based on the TTSDelay
(see below). To disable the repeat function, set
TTSRepeat=0.
(OnScreen only)
TTSDelay=20
This is the delay time (in 50 ms increments) the default 20 corresponds to about 2 seconds
between speech requests. Increase the setting
to stretch out the delay between speech
requests, or decrease the number to make the
repeats quicker. Note that not all speech events
are of the same length, so modifying this may
cause incoherent speech events. If you have
repeating speech events overlapping, increase
this setting - this may occur if you have a slow
rate set for the voice. This setting is also affects
how long you must be over a specific key
before the key will be spoken.
568
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
TTSSpeakWord=0
This setting defines whether OnScreen will
speak the word upon selection in the
WordComplete panel (Speak Word on Click).
TTSSpeakWord=1 means the word will be
spoken when clicked. TTSSpeakWord=0
means no speech event will occur on selection
in the WordComplete panel.
(OnScreen only)
TTSSingleCharKey=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will
determine how Text-To-Speech reacts when the
key to be spoken has just a single character.
TTSSingleCharKey=1 will speak the single
character key, and 0 will disable single
character key speech. For intermediate &
advanced user, there is no need to hear the
"normal" keys, and this can be used to disable
569
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
speech for the common keys.
(OnScreen only)
TTSWordsKey=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will
determine how Text-To-Speech reacts when the
key to be spoken has a word. TTSWordsKey=1
will speak the description (or the word) on the
key (any key with 2 or more characters).
TTSWordsKey=0 will disable speech for keys
with 2 or more characters.
(OnScreen only - special meaning when
CrossScanner in use)
TTSWordComplete=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting will
determine how Text-To-Speech reacts when
over the WordComplete words. Since these are
dynamic, this third subset of keys may be
selected independently. Set
570
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
TTSWordComplete=1 to speak the
WordComplete words, set
TTSWordComplete=0 to disable.
CrossScanner: When enabled, and
CrossScanner is running, CrossScanner will
step through the available words and speak
them (delay handled in CrossScanner with
Menu Speed setting) The CrossScanner user
may select the word when it is highlighted. The
sequence may be restarted by clicking on the
buffer key in the WordComplete panel.
(OnScreen only)
TTSScanWordComplete=0
When TTSAvailable=1 is set, and
TTSWordComplete=1, this optional setting
will perform what CrossScanner would do if
CrossScanner was running - scan the the
WordComplete panel, highlighting each word,
speaking each word, and if there is a mouse
click, type the highlighted word. Use
571
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
TTSScanWordComplete=1 to enable the
automatic scan of WordComplete candidates
each time the list is updated. This feature is
driven by the process IMGSOUND.exe and
monitors mouse clicks via the
WINEVENT.DLL. Added for a user using a
non-standard pointing device, and the
implementation expects the selection using the
left-mouse click, and cancel using the
right-mouse click. There are several instances
where the hardware events are coded for the
device, and a non-standard configuration will
not work with this option. This option should
be set to TTSScanWordComplete=0 if
CrossScanner is in use.
(Originally OnScreen only, supported in
slightly different ways in all releases)
ExpandAKey=0
This setting defines whether the "Zoom"
window will appear If ExpandAKey=1, then a
572
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
separate window will appear to magnify the
key under the mouse pointer, if
ExpandAKey=0, this option is disabled.
The size of the Windows is defined by the
factor (see ExpandAKeyFactor below). Internal
logic is used to decide if the window is above
or below the pointer. If part of the key is
off-screen, the key will not be displayed. Note
that for discrete pointing devices
(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, this
setting may not operate in a desirable fashion.
For Touchscreens, and other arbitraty point
input devices, the HideZoomWindow option
should be enabled.
(OnScreen only)
ExpandAKeyFactor=3
This setting is handled automatically within
OnScreen Setup: Large is 3, Larger is 5, and
Largest is 7. This setting can be modified
573
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
directly, but if you run setup, and select OK on
the Enhance dialog, the setting will be
overwritten. Valid values are 2-20, but anything
over 10 will probably be too large for actual
use. Larger windows (settings) will work better
on faster systems, faster video sub-systems.
(Originally OnScreen only, supported in
slightly different ways in all releases)
HideZoomWindow=0
Added for Touchscreen support for
ExpandAKey (Key Zoom),
HideZoomWindow=1 will hide the magnified
key when a key click occurs.
HideZoomWindow=0 results in no reaction to
any clicks - the mouse cursor will need to be
off OnScreen window to remove the Zoom
window. In Windows Vista / 7, when this
setting is HideZoomWindow=1, the Zoom
window will automatically fade away on its
own.
574
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
MouseOverHiLite=0
This setting indicates whether the key under
the pointer will be highlighted or not.
MouseOverHiLite=1 will enable the highlight,
MouseOverHiLite=0 will disable any highlight
action. This setting can be used separately or in
conjunction with the ExpandAKey (Zoom).
The internal operation uses the invert option
within the BitBlt API call, so different color
settings will cause different highlight views.
The WordComplete panel is handled separately
(it was an add-on to the original design, so
there may be artifacts upon resize paints) these will resolve themselves in normal
operation, or slide the pointer off the OnScreen
window.
Note that for discrete pointing devices
(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, this
setting may not operate in a desirable fashion.
575
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(OnScreen only)
ControlPanelToggleButtons=1
This setting indicates whether the control panel
(Tool Button Opens & Closes Control panel)
will display "latched" keys or not. When
ControlPanelToggleButtons=1 the buttons will
display as "latched" - visually down. The
ToolTextIn and ToolTextOut colors will still be
used (see below, [Colors]). For original
operation, set ControlPanelToggleButtons=0.
Note: This setting is not available in OnScreen
Setup, it is only available here.
(Versions later than 1.75, OnScreen)
EnableMouseScroll=1
When EnableMouseScroll=1, and OnScreen is
larger than the screen display, and a portion is
not displayed, by holding the mouse pointer at
the edge of the screen where OnScreen scrolls
576
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
off the display, the OnScreen window will be
moved back onto the display, in increments set
by the ScrollMovePixels (see below). In
operation, it is more intuitive than the
description - by moving the mouse toward the
portion of OnScreen you wish to access &
holding at the display edge, OnScreen will
scroll into view. To disable this action, set
EnableMouseScroll=0
EnableScreenScroll=0
This setting has been added for CrossScanner
& touchscreen users. Since the ability to hold
the mouse pointer at a particular location, e.g.
the screen edge is difficult with various
pointing devices (see EnableMouseScroll
above), when EnableScreenScroll=1 (Enable
Scroll Window - OnScreen Setup | Appearance
| Size) a scroll Window will appear with a
slider, and buttons to move the OnScreen
window. Because this takes screen real-estate,
577
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
and OnScreen may be moved by dragging, and
not all users operate OnScreen in a
configuration that is larger than the display
size, it is default off (EnableScreenScroll=0).
ScrollMovePixels=6
This is the amount of move that will occur for
EnableMouseScroll / EnableScreenScroll
settings (see above). For quicker movement,
increase the number. Because the purpose of
this scroll is to access portions of OnScreen not
visible, smooth scrolling may not be as
high-priority as speed of operation. Note that
as the number of pixels get larger, the choppier
the scroll onto the display will appear. Note
that speed of the system and video sub-system
will affect the actual operation.
CenterOversize=1
This setting handles the position of OnScreen
when sized, and the resultant size is wider than
578
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
the screen width. If CenterOversize=1,
OnScreen will be centered, leaving an equal
portion off the left side of the screen & off the
right side of the screen. If CenterOversize=0,
then the left side of OnScreen will be aligned
with the left side of the screen display, leaving
the right-hand portion of OnScreen off the
screen. CrossScanner users may prefer setting
CenterOversize=0.
(OnScreen with CrossScanner only)
CrossScanner=1
This is an internal setting set by CrossScanner
to handle different interface settings required
by CrossScanner (different from the standard
interface settings for OnScreen). The
communication between OnScreen and
CrossScanner is handled automatically, and
this setting should not be modified manually.
The following section will be created to handle
the reset of OnScreen when CrossScanner is
579
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
asleep or closed:
[CrossScanner]
MinimizeToButton=0
NoHooksEver=0
ForceUnHook=0
These settings track the original settings of
OnScreen and are handled dynamically by
CrossScanner and OnScreen. They should not
be modified manually. If there are any
problems with interface settings when
OnScreen is run independent of CrossScanner,
use OnScreen Setup to re-configure
(OnScreen only)
LetterAssist=1
This setting controls the look-ahead and letter
selection processing when using the
WordComplete panel. When LetterAssist=1,
based on the currently typed letters and the
580
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
lookup word list, only possible next letters will
be available to the user. When LetterAssist=0,
no additional look-ahead processing will occur,
and no modification to the keys available to the
user will be done.
(OnScreen only)
ShowAsGrayed=1
This setting is only available when
LetterAssist=1. When ShowAsGrayed=1,
letters not possible (based on the current letters
typed and the current word list) will be shown
as grayed out letters. When ShowAsGrayed=0,
for any letter that is not possible (based on the
current letters typed and the current word list),
the entire key will not be shown and will not be
available to the user.
(OnScreen only)
AllowGrayedKey=1
581
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This setting is only available when
LetterAssist=1 and ShowAsGrayed=1. When
AllowedGrayedKey=1, the user will still be
able to select and type with grayed out keys
(those that will not build words based on the
current letters typed and the current word list).
When AllowedGrayedKey=0, the grayed keys
will not be selectable.
(OnScreen only)
KeysOnlyAssist=0
The setting is referred to as WC-Assist, or
WordComplete Assist. When
KeysOnlyAssist=1, the top row of number keys
on the keyboard panel turns into 2 sets of 1-5
selection buttons when WordComplete
candidates are available (colored the same as
the WordCompletion candidate buttons). When
KeysOnlyAssist=0, no action occurs.
(OnScreen only)
582
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=0
This setting is only relevant when
KeysOnlyAssist=1, and this is only available in
the INI file. When KeysOnly
AssistNumbers=1, the function key row is
replaced by number keys (to replace the
number keys overtaken by the WordComplete
candidate selection buttons) when
WordComplete candidates are available. In
most typing situations, function keys are not
used very often, and this provides number keys
as an alternative to temporarily disabling the
WC-Assist function to access the number keys.
(Added in 1.75a)
NumPadAlways=0
This is an option available only in the INI file,
requested by a customer. By default, the
Numeric keypad acts exactly like a physical
keyboard, and responds to the state of the Num
583
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Lock setting. When NumPadAlways=1, the
Numeric keypad (Num Panel), will always act
as if the Num Lock is on & type numbers,
ignoring the actual state of the Num Lock
toggle / light / keyboard state. This was
requested to ensure proper operation if the user
accidentally toggles the Num lock, or another
application modified this keyboard state.
(Added in 1.75d)
Win2000ShutDown=1
During the shut down sequence in Windows
2000, OnScreen is still enabled, and can cause
painting problems if moved or configured. Set
Win2000ShutDown=1 to disable OnScreen
during this ShutDown dialog. If you wish
OnScreen to operate during the Shut Down
sequence (or any similar dialog in Windows),
set Win2000ShutDown=0. This problem is not
seen in Windows XP. When
Win2000ShutDown enabled, OnScreen
584
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
monitors for a Dialog as Topmost, with
DS_FIXEDSYS, DS_CENTER styles. If this
type of dialog found, then special internal
handling occurs - If opened or minimized to
button, moving and the window is disabled, for
other minimized options
(Added in 1.75F)
DisplayChangeEnabled=1
This setting determines how OnScreen
responds to the Display Change Window
message when the resolution is changed (e.g.
rotation, changing color depths, or screen
appearance). When DisplayChangeEnabled=1
OnScreen will reposition in an analogous
position on the new display configuration.
OnScreen will reposition itself on screen if any
portion was positioned off screen. If
DisplayChangeEnabled=2, then the attempt to
preserve an analogous position will be
maintained - if using rotation software (portrait
585
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
/ landscape), then this setting is not
recommended, as it could result in positioning
OnScreen off screen after a rotation.
(Added in 1.78)
SessionChangeEnabled=0
This setting determines how OnScreen
responds to the Session Change Window
message when the session is changed (e.g. Fast
User Switching). When
SessionChangeEnabled=1, OnScreen will
automatically open from a minimized state (if
necessary) and restore settings. With the user
specific settings (ConfigPath=1 or
ConfigPath=2), this is not relevant, but if
ConfigPath=0 or ConfigPath=3, then this
option could still be required, especially in
Windows XP. When there are shared settings,
one user can modify settings, and then a
session change event can occur. To prevent
synchronization issues between the saved
586
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
settings and active configuration, when the
session change event occurs (and the Session
Change Message is sent), OnScreen will
restore settings from the current saved settings.
(Added in 1.76)
ReadOnlyOK=0
This setting was added for the Windows NT
based platforms to address some security
concerns. If ReadOnlyOK=1, then files will be
opened as Read Only, and Saving
configurations / options, etc. from with
OnScreen will not occur. When
ReadOnlyOK=0, the KEYBOARD.KBF file
will be opened with Read/ Write access, and
Read/Write access will be expected for
ONSCREEN.INI. In secure situations where
users will be granted Read / Read & Execute
permissions, this setting allows operation of
OnScreen in a Read Only mode. Note that
reconfiguring is possible during operation
587
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(unless the Operator Mode is enabled), but
OnScreen will always open with the "original"
settings from KEYBOARD.KBF &
ONSCREEN.INI. 1.77 Note - to use this
option, AllowReadOnlyOperation must be 0
There is a slight distinction between the 2
settings. If AllowReadOnlyOperation=0 and
ReadOnlyOK=1, then the configuration files
will always be opened in a read-only mode,
and the configuration cannot be updated. If
AllowReadOnlyOperation=1 (ReadOnlyOK
ignored), then files will be opened as
read/write UNLESS this fails because of user
rights, then they will be opened as read-only.
To prevent operation of OnScreen if user has
read-only rights, set both ReadOnlyOK=0, and
AllowReadOnlyOperation=0
(Added in 1.77)
AllowReadOnlyOperation=1
This setting is an override for the ReadOnlyOK
588
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
setting to address limited rights users in
Windows NT based platforms. In 1.77 it is
default On, bypassing the error message when
the KEYBOARD.KBF & ONSCREEN.INI
files are Read Only, and running OnScreen as
if ReadOnlyOK was set on
(Added in 1.77)
ManualToolControl=0
The tool bar can be turned off in 1.77, and this
setting determines if there is any manual
interface available to toggle the tool bar. The
original design of the software used the tool
bar as the anchor & always visible element so
the user would be able to manipulate the
configuration as desired. Developers requested
that this panel be removed so the user has
limited options with the software when it is
tightly integrated into an application. In earlier
versions, the operator mode / custom logo
options allowed some control over this panel.
589
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Refer to the Developer’s Kit for tools to
manipulate this panel programmatically. This
setting allows manual control by the user when
enabled. When ManualToolControl=1, a
3-click approach can be used to toggle the tool
bar. By clicking 3 times (1-2-3) in the same
spot (border or non-key areas only), the tool
bar panel will close if opened, or open if
closed. When ManualToolControl=0, this
action is ignored. For touchscreens (& other
less accurate pointing devices), you may set
ManualToolControl to a larger value. If more
than 1, then the number indicates the number
pixels of "jitter" that will be allowed to count
the click as part of the 1-2-3 sequence. For
example, ManualToolControl=5 enables the
3-click tracking, and allows a +/- 5 pixel range
from the 1st click to count as the second &
third clicks.
(Added in 1.77)
590
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
WindowsKeysGraphics=1
This setting controls whether the graphics are
displayed on the Windows Key and
Applications key on the 104-key layouts.
When WindowsKeysGraphics=1, bitmap
images are overlaid onto the keys. For smaller
sizes, these may be unclear, since a StretchBlt
operation is performed. Set
WindowsKeysGraphics=0 to disable this
option - the text label for the Windows key is
"Wnds", and the Application key is "App"
(Added in 1.77)
WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1
This setting affects the operation of the
Windows key on the 104 key layouts. When
WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1, the key will latch
in a down position, allowing it to modify the
next key typed. This is for Windows functions
such as Win-E or Win-F (Search for Files, etc.)
591
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
- this is the default setting. If
WindowsKeyWndsLatch=0, the key will not
latch, and operate as a simple key, sending a
down/up release on down/up press. By default,
this will open the start menu. You will not be
able to operate the Windows shortcut option
with this setting, since the key will not latch
down. However, macros can still be used with
this setting at 0.
(Added in 1.77)
TabletPCEnabled=1
This setting affects operation within Windows
XP, Tablet PC edition. When
TabletPCEnabled=1, Pnlwatch.exe will be
executed, which monitors if the Tablet PC
Input Panel. PanelWatch monitors the request
for the Tablet PC Input Panel, and coordinates
display of OnScreen. When enabled,
Pnlwatch.exe is placed in the All Users Startup
Group as OnScreen Tablet PC Interface.
592
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
PanelWatch can also be controlled manually.
When run normally PanelWatch does not show
a window or create any display for the user.
When PNLWATCH.EXE is run directly (or the
OnScreen Tablet PC Interface is run from the
StartUp Menu), PanelWatch will display an
icon in the System Tray (notification area next
to the clock). So if PanelWatch is already
running, running it again will toggle the
display of a notification icon. When Enabled
from the menu, the TabletPCEnabled=1 is set
PanelWatch is run, and the StartUp icon is
created in the All Users group (as long as user
has sufficient rights to create this shortcut file).
When disabled, TabletPCEnabled=0 is set,
PanelWatch is closed, and the StartUp group
icon is removed.
(Added in 1.77)
MenuForceForeground=0
This is a setting that determines how the
593
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OnScreen menu is handled in Windows
2000/XP. In order to handle input focus issues,
by default the opening the menu does not bring
OnScreen to the foreground as the input
window - this causes some interface issues
(menu falls behind other windows, does not
clear if click on other windows, etc.). These
user interface issues may be undesirable to
some users, and this option allows for user
preferences If MenuForceForeground=0, menu
issues may result, but window with current
keyboard input focus will remain - typing on
OnScreen will type into current foreground
window. If MenuForceForeground=1, menu
issues will not occur, but OnScreen will
become foreground window - user must
reselect typing window before typing on
OnScreen.
(Added in 1.78)
SaveAfterMove=0
594
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
SaveAfterChange=0
SaveAtClose=0
SaveAtEndSession=0
These settings are used to trigger an automatic
save of the current settings and position of the
keyboard window, after the appropriate event.
SaveAfterMove=1, means that after any
keyboard window move, the settings and
position will be saved. If SaveAfterChange=1,
then the settings and position will be saved
after any panel is opened or closed, or sized up
or down. If SaveAtClose=1, then the settings
and position will be saved when the OnScreen
is closed. If SaveAtEndSession=1, and if the
user logs off or shuts down the system, then the
settings and position will be saved. Note that
SaveAtClose and/or SaveAtEndSession
effectively override SaveAfterMove and
SaveAfterChange, since eventually OnScreen
will be closed, or the user will shut down / log
595
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
off, and the current settings will be saved.
Also, OnScreen can’t be restarted (to use the
current settings and position without being
closed at some point.
(Added in 1.78)
TerminalServerConsoleEnable=0
This setting allows a non-server based product
to run in the context of the server console. In
general, only My-T-Soft TS should be used on
a server where Terminal Services are available.
However, there have been times when (for
various reasons) customers run a server based
operating system as a stand-alone machine.
When TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1 for the
non-server based products, the normal
licensing will enable these products to run on a
server, in the context of the server console (i.e.
at the display monitor for the server, but NOT
as a remote terminal). By default, the
non-server products sense this operation, ask if
596
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
this desired, and save
TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1
automatically.
(Added in 1.78)
EnableScan=0
When EnableScan=1, keyboard scanning is
enabled, and a transparent overlay is used to
indicate the current scanning area within
OnScreen. The following settings ONLY apply
when EnableScan=1. When EnableScan=0,
keyboard scanning is disabled. Only in
OnScreen does the user have access to this
setting from OnScreen Setup, but keyboard
scanning is available for all 1.78 versions.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanSound=1
This setting controls the sound for each
discrete scanning step. When ScanSound=0,
597
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
there is no sound used. When ScanSound=1, a
"scan" sound is used. When ScanSound=2,
Text-To-Speech is used, announcing panels,
rows/columns, and individual keys based on
settings for Text-To-Speech announcements for
the scan groupings (see below). For
ScanSound=1, the wave file is
"scan-sound.wav" in the SOUNDS folder.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanEnableDisableSound=1
When ScanEnableDisableSound=1 is set, a
special "Enabled" and "Disabled" sound
(scan-enable.wav and scan-disable.wav in the
SOUNDS folder) is played when scanning is
enabled or disabled. This is helpful if Alt-X is
used to toggle scanning (e.g. a trainer working
with a user).
(Added in 1.78)
ScanColor=0
598
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
If ScanColor=0, an inverted color display of
the current scan area is used within the
scanning overlay If ScanColor=1 a black
overlay is used during scanning, and if
ScanColor=2, then a white overlay is used.
Depending on the transparency setting,
OnScreen colors, the display itself, and the
user, one color setting may be easier to
distinguish over the other.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanTransparencyLevel=255
This setting can take on values between 1 and
255. In the Scanning Settings dialog, this is
translated into percentage, where 100% is 255.
Technically this is an "opaqueness" setting, as
larger numbers make the transparent overlay
more opaque. Low values may make the actual
overlay impossible to see, and high values will
prevent seeing through the overlay, making it
ineffective. Suggested values range between 50
599
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
and 150, with the default at 70 for black and
white, and invert is at the fully opaque 255.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanTime=1200
This is a setting in milliseconds that defines the
amount of time spent at each scan step. The
default of 1200 relates to a 1.2 second delay
between each successive scan step. From the
Scanning Settings dialog, values can be set
between 50 and 5000. Values below 500 are
not recommended. This setting is also used as
the Timeout After setting when Step Scan is
selected as the right-click mode, but it is used
at three times the current setting, so a 1200
setting results in a timeout waiting period of
3600 milliseconds, or 3.6 seconds.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanRightClickMode=2
600
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
There are 8 different right-click settings:
•
ScanRightClickMode=0 means that the
right-click is not used at all. This should be
set if the user cannot use, or does not have
access to a right-click event (second button).
Note that even when set this way, a
right-click can still result in a reset of the
cursor clipping that is engaged during active
scanning. Also note that if this is set to 0, it
is critical that the
ScanReverseAfterNumScans be set to some
value other than 0, otherwise the user will
always be forced to fully complete a scan, or
be forever stuck at a scan level with no way
to revert up a scan level.
•
ScanRightClickMode=1 corresponds to a
full reset to the top level Panels scan, so a
right-click during any scan level will reset
and begin at a top level Panels scan.
601
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
•
ScanRightClickMode=2 is the default, and
acts as the reverse of the left-click, meaning
the current scan level goes up to the previous
level. So a right-click during a Key scan will
go to the Panel scan. A right-click during a
Panel scan goes to the Panels scan, and a
right-click during a Panels scan will Stop
scanning (while leaving the scanning overlay
at the current panel). At this stopped level, a
left-click will re-engage scanning again.
•
ScanRightClickMode=3 means that a
right-click will stop scanning at the current
scan level, leaving the scan overlay
untouched. A left-click will re-engage
scanning at the same level.
•
For ScanRightClickMode=2 &
ScanRightClickMode=3, when stopped
(paused), an additional right-click will move
the scan overlay off of OnScreen and display
"Left Click Here to Start Scanning", which
602
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
will engage the scanning process. This
allows a trainer or assistant to fully access
OnScreen and still be able to quickly
re-enable scanning.
•
ScanRightClickMode=4 results in a
right-click advancing the scan (rather than
the timer advancing the scan). This step scan
allows the right-click to advanced & move
forward the scan at the user’s speed, rather
than a fixed timer rate. This also enables
several changes - instead of scan speed
setting, this value is used as a timeout after
rate (multiplied by 3), which will revert up
one level if the timeout period expires. Also,
the physical keyboard is monitored, and
when both the Control key and Alt keys are
held down (e.g. [Ctrl]-[Alt]) on the physical
keyboard, this scan mode will stop
(right-click on OnScreen to restart the scan
process).
603
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
•
ScanRightClickMode=5 results in a
right-click aborting the current scan, and
acts as though the scan was fully completed
(i.e. all the way to key selection), and then
resets based on the Next scan setting. This
allows quick resets using the right button
while scanning.
•
ScanRightClickMode=6 results in a
right-click cancelling scanning completely.
Only returning to OnScreen Setup &
re-enabling scanning again will scanning be
made available.
•
ScanRightClickMode=7 results in a
right-click acting like a left-click. This
setting allows either click to trigger a scan
step/selection.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanLeftClickMode=0
There are 4 different left-click settings (3
604
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
effective) that affect what happens after the
left-click action occurs. In general, the
left-click steps down to the next scanning level.
If stopped, scanning begins at the Panels scan,
scanning individual panels. During the Panels
scan, a panel is selected by the left-click, and
the panel scan commences. While scanning
groups of keys (as defined for the panel), a
left-click will begin an individual key scan.
Finally, during a key scan, a left-click will
select the key, and act as a a "type" event for
the key (e.g. selecting the key). The
ScanLeftClickMode affects what happens after
this final key selection (i.e. Post Action) These
are the 4 possible settings:
•
ScanLeftClickMode=0 is the default setting,
and means that the internal handling is not
modified in any way, which is to revert up to
the current panel scan (e.g. the middle level).
So during a keyboard scan, and a subsequent
605
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
key selection, the keyboard panel will
continue to be scanned.
•
ScanLeftClickMode=1 corresponds to the
same group of keys being scanned, e.g. the
scan remains at the key scan level.
•
ScanLeftClickMode=2 means that the
current panel will be scanned at the panel
scan. Although this is handled slightly
differently internally, the effective result is
the same as ScanLeftClickMode=0 (or the
default setting). Because the internal coding
is different, the setting is here to address this
different implementation.
•
ScanLeftClickMode=3 results in a revert to
the top level Panels scan after a key
selection.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanReverseAfterNumScans=2
606
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
This setting determines how many times a
particular level will be scanned, before
automatically returning to the next higher
level. At the Panels scan level, if the count is
reached, the scanning will stop, leaving the
current panel highlight by the scan overlay (a
left-click will restart the scan). If
ScanReverseAfterNumScan=0, there is no
maximum, and a scan will continue at the same
level until a user selects a scan highlight with a
left-click, or performs a right-click action.
Because this setting is potentially problematic
if there is no right-click available, this setting
cannot be set to No Maximum if the
Right-Click mode is set as None (or not
available). In other words, never set
ScanReverseAfterNumsScans=0 and
ScanRightClickMode=0. Any positive number
for ScanReverseAfterNumScans results in an
internal count, that will revert up one level
after the count is passed. In Scanning Settings,
607
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
values of 1-6 are available, but this value can
be any positive number (e.g. 1, 10, 20, etc.)
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanShowAllOptions=0
This setting indicates whether all options will
be shown for the "Next Scan" and "Right-Click
(2nd Button) Mode". As the scanning options
became more complex, it was suggested that
we default to a limited number of options that
address the majority of scanning usage. When
ScanShowAllOptions=1, then all possible
options are listed and shown in the drop down
lists for these 2 settings. When
ScanShowAllOption=0, a limited set of options
are shown. The order of some of the items will
change based on this setting.
(Added in 1.78 R2)
ScanOpenPanels=1
608
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
When ScanOpenPanels=1, the customized
panel options are not available, and during
scanning, all open panels will be scanned,
left-to-right. When ScanOpenPanels=0, then
the ScanOrder setting determines the panels
that are scanned and their order.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha
The ScanOrder determines the order of the
Panels scan level. The order is left to right as
listed. Panels should not be duplicated. This
list can be easily manipulated and generated
from the Scanning Settings.
The complete list of panels available (9 total) is:
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha,Keyb
and the naming should be self-describing of the
actual panels in OnScreen Note that in the
commercial versions, the WordComplete panel
corresponds to the Magnifier panel.
609
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Here are various examples & scanning orders
for the panels:
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calcul
ScanOrder=Calculator,ControlPanel,Toolbar,Mac
ScanOrder=Calculator,KeyboardNum,KeyboardA
ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calcul
ScanOrder=Calculator,Controlpanel,Toolbar,Keyb
ScanOrder=KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,Keybo
ScanOrder=ControlPanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,
For each panel in ScanOrder, there needs to be
a corresponding Scan[Panel] entry below that
lists key groupings for the corresponding
panel. In all cases, the keys are numbered from
1 to the maximum number of keys on the
panel. Groupings are separated by semi-colons
(;), and individual keys are separated in the
group with a comma (,). It is important that
only valid key numbers are used, otherwise the
610
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
bounding scan overlay may be incorrect, and
potentially cause other problems because of
internal table lookups. It is also important that
no spaces be used, or any other characters or
punctuation. Also, there is an internal
maximum of 25 groupings allowed - if this is
exceeded, the additional groupings will not be
used. In order to provide additional examples
(showing alternative groupings and row vs.
column scans) and the correct entries, the
following lists various examples for each
panel, along with the default settings.
Text-To-Speech announcements can be
embedded within these groupings, so each row
or column can be named, and announced when
Text-To-Speech is enabled within the Sounds
section. All that is required is that the word or
phrase be included prior to the keys listing,
enclosed in square brackets (examples below).
This is stripped out prior to processing the key
611
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
sequence. It is important that the square
brackets be opened and closed correctly, and
that there be no punctuation outside the square
brackets (spaces, etc. are allowed within the
square bracket set, but no other square brackets
can be used). The panel descriptions are
currently fixed internally.
(Added in 1.78)
ScanWordComplete=1,4,7,10,13;2,5,8,11,14;3,6
There are 15 keys on the WordComplete panel.
The default scan settings scans the
WordComplete setting as columns, which is
more effective for accessing the
WordComplete candidate column.
;;This is a row scan of the WordComplete panel
ScanWordComplete=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;1
;;This is the column scan of the WordComplete
panel with Text-To-Speech announcements
612
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ScanWordComplete=[Options]1,4,7,10,13;[Word
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70
There are 72 keys on the Keyboard (Alpha)
panel (101 layouts) and 75 keys for the 104
layouts. The default scanning is in rows.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom with
Text-To-Speech Announcements
ScanKeyboardAlpha=[Function
Keys]1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13; [Numbers]14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
[Q
row]28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
[Home
row]41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
613
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
[Shift
row]55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
[Final row]68,69,70,71,72
;;This for 101 layout
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,1
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
68,69,70,71,72
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,69,70,71,72;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13
614
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
;;This for 104 layout
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,1
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
68,73,69,70,71,74,72
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,73,69,70,71,74,72;
55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;
41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;
28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;
14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,1
There are 13 keys on the Keyboard (Edit)
615
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
panel. The default scan settings scans in rows,
with the cursor arrow keys as one block.
;;This is row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;
;;This is row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardEdit=10,11,12,13;7,8,9;4,5,6;1,2,3;
;;This is column scan left
ScanKeyboardEdit=1,4,7,11;2,5,8,10,12;3,6,9,13;
;;This is column scan right
ScanKeyboardEdit=3,6,9,13;2,5,8,10,12;1,4,7,11;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13
There are 17 keys on the Keyboard
(Numpad/numeric) panel. The default scan
settings scans in rows, with special handling
for the elongated buttons on the right.
616
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,1
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanKeyboardNum=8,15;16,17;12,13,14;9,10,11
(Added in 1.78)
ScanToolBar=1;
There are 3 keys on the Toolbar panel. The
default scan settings only highlights the top
tool button. Note that this means the panel scan
and the key scan are the same, meaning 2
left-clicks are required to select the key.
;;This scans all three buttons (but not
recommended for the scanning user)
ScanToolBar=1;2;3;
;;This scans all three buttons in an overlapping
group
ScanToolBar=1,2;2,3;
617
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
(Added in 1.78)
ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;
There are 12 keys on the control panel. The
default scan settings highlights the 6 rows of 2
buttons.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanControlPanel=11,12;9,10;7,8;5,6;3,4;1,2;
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanControlPanel=1,3,5,7,9,11;2,4,6,8,10,12;
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanControlPanel=2,4,6,8,10,12;1,3,5,7,9,11;
(Added in 1.78)
ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15
618
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
There are 16 keys on the Macro panel. The
default scan settings highlights the top button
and the 5 rows of 3 buttons.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,1
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanMacro=14,15,16;11,12,13;8,9,10;5,6,7;2,3,4
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanMacro=1;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;4,7,10,13,1
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanMacro=1;4,7,10,13,16;3,6,9,12,15;2,5,8,11,1
(Added in 1.78)
ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,
There are 18 keys on the Windows Controls
panel. The default scan settings highlights the
6 rows of 3 buttons.
619
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanWindowsControls=16,17,18;13,14,15;10,11,
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanWindowsControls=1,4,7,10,13,16;2,5,8,11,1
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanWindowsControls=3,6,9,12,15,18;2,5,8,11,1
(Added in 1.78)
ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;1
There are 25 keys on the Calculator panel. The
default scan settings highlights the rows, and
handles the elongated buttons on the right
separately.
;;This is for row scan top to bottom
ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15
620
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
;;This is for row scan bottom to top
ScanCalculator=9,20;21,22,23,24,25;15,16,17,18
;;This is for column scan left to right
ScanCalculator=1;2;3;4,10,15,21;5,11,16,22;6,12
;;This is for column scan right to left
ScanCalculator=3;2;1;9,20;8,14,19,25;7,13,24,18
(Added in 1.79)
ShiftLock=0
When ShiftLock=1, the role of the Shift key
changes - when the Shift key is pressed, it will
stay in the Shift state until the Shift key is
pressed again. ShiftLock=0 means the Shift
state will clear when another key is pressed this is the default operation. Note when
Multi-Touch is enabled, the Shift key can be
held down by a constant pressed down input.
(Added in 1.79)
621
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ControlLock=0
When ControlLock=1, the role of the Control
key changes - when the Control key is pressed,
it will stay in the Control state until the Control
key is pressed again. ControlLock=0 means the
Control state will clear when another key is
pressed - this is the default operation. Note
when Multi-Touch is enabled, the Control key
can be held down by a constant pressed down
input.
(Added in 1.79)
AltLock=0
When AltLock=1, the role of the Alt key
changes - when the Alt key is pressed, it will
stay in the Alt state until the Alt key is pressed
again. AltLock=0 means the Alt state will clear
when another key is pressed - this is the default
operation. Note when Multi-Touch is enabled,
the Alt key can be held down by a constant
622
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
pressed down input.
(Added in 1.79)
AltGrLock=0
When AltGrLock=1, the role of the AltGr key
changes - when the AltGr key is pressed, it will
stay in the AltGr state until the AltGr key is
pressed again. AltGrLock=0 means the AltGr
state will clear when another key is pressed this is the default operation. Note when
Multi-Touch is enabled, the AltGr key can be
held down by a constant pressed down input.
The selected keyboard layout must
present/support the AltGr key for this setting to
have any affect.
[Settings]
(Added in 1.79)
The Settings section contains shared settings
between the 1.x and 2.x software in preparation
623
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
for a future comprehensive KBF (KeyBoard
File) data structure that contains all settings
associated with a specific user’s configuration.
XParallax=0
YParallax=0
The XParallax and YParallax settings allow for
situations and touchscreen hardware where the
X/Y appearance is not in sync with system
display - i.e. not a calibration issue, but a
physical configuration or device setup situation
where the perceived touch location is
somewhat offset from the hardware/driver
established touch location. For example, when
there is a noticeable physical separation
between the display surface and the touch
sensitive glass surface. To accommodate these
situations, X or Y (or both) parallax settings
may be entered (positive or negative), and
these values are used as an offset to calculate a
modified location within the software to
624
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
balance the difference between the user’s
viewpoint and its corresponding X/Y touch
point. Note these settings are used only for
location values within the area of the OnScreen
window. These settings should only be used in
situations where the user and device are
consistently located, as these settings will
make the software appear to operate
incorrectly if the user’s approach to the device
is varied. Use XParallax=0 and YParallax=0 to
bypass these settings.
KeyBlockTime=0
The KeyBlockTime is a per key blockout time
in milliseconds where any additional key press
via click event is ignored (blocked). The setting
is implemented per key, but is global in nature.
For each processed key, the particular key is is
"blocked" during the blockout time specified.
However, another key press will clear the
current blockout, and start a new blockout time
625
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
for the new key. Use KeyBlockTime=0 to
bypass this setting. KeyBlockTime=100 means
100 milliseconds key block time out.
KeyBlockTime=500 means 500 milliseconds
(1/2 second) key block time out.
AllowThemeChange=1
The AllowThemeChange setting provides an
enable/disable setting for theme changes either
via the Touch Panel, the OnScreen menu, or
the 2-touch Rotate gesture. If
AllowThemeChange=1, then these Theme
Change events are processed, otherwise if
AllowThemeChange=0, then user triggered
theme changes are not allowed.
Theme=ROUNDED_SLATE
The Theme entry is the current theme in use.
This entry must correspond to a folder in the
ThemesFolder specified folder, and the folder
must have appropriate Theme settings and
626
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
files. The Change Theme event
(AllowThemeChange) will rotate the theme
based on the ThemeList, and update this entry,
then reload the current theme.
ThemeList=ROUNDED_SLATE,ROUNDED_B
This must be a comma delimited list of folders
that exist as sub-folders in the the specified
ThemesFolder location. When the Change
Theme event occurs (AllowThemeChange), the
next item in the list will be used as the new
current theme, or the list will start over from
the first entry.
ThemesFolder=%PRODDIR%\THEMES
The ThemesFolder setting must correspond to
a valid folder that has at least 1 theme
sub-folder. The default is
%PRODDIR%\THEMES, which expands to
the current installed folder, with a sub-folder of
THEMES. A valid Theme folder (in the
627
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
THEMES folder) will have a THEME.INI,
which contains replacement entries for specific
items the current ONSCREEN.INI file. When
the Theme is applied (at OnScreen start or due
to Change Theme event), the THEME.INI is
read and applied to the current
ONSCREEN.INI file. For example themes, the
PaintDLL overrides are used to change the
painting of the keys, background, etc. Refer to
the Example Themes and the IMG Developer’s
Kit for more details.
InitTouchPanel=1
This setting is used at the first run-time to
determine if multi-touch hardware capabilities
are present, and if they are, the
WantTouchPanel setting will be set to 1 to
show the Touch Panel. The logic used requires
that the RegisterTouchWindow API call is
successful (Multi-touch capable hardware),
and the WantMultiTouch or WantGestures is
628
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
set to 1, and InitTouchPanel=1. This allows the
WantTouchPanel setting to sync up with
available hardware and initial default settings,
so the Touch Panel is shown if the system can
support it, while preserving the meaning of
WantTouchPanel based on user preferences.
The setting is always set to InitTouchPanel=0
after starting OnScreen.
WantTouchPanel=0
If WantTouchPanel=1, then the Touch Panel
will be displayed (Windows Vista / 7). The
external MultiTouchDLL.DLL must be present
for support (see IMG Developers’ Kit), and
either WantMultiTouch or WantGestures must
be set to 1. If WantTouchPanel=0, the Touch
Panel will not be shown. If the Touch Panel is
shown on a system without Multi-Touch
capabilities, the Theme & Dismiss buttons will
still operate, but gestures and multi-touch
buttons will not be enabled.
629
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
WantMultiTouch=0
To select the multi-touch interface, use
WantMultiTouch=1. If this value is set, the
WantGestures setting will not be used.
WantGestures=1
To select the gesture interfaces, use
WantGestures=1. To use gestures,
WantMultiTouch=0 must be used.
FlicksMode=2
During run-time, if both multi-touch and the
gesture interface are off, then normal operation
will occur, and flicks will be processed. The
MultiTouchDLL.DLL must be present, and the
Touch Panel must be available. FlicksMode=0
will disable flick processing. FlicksMode=1
means the keyboard window will be sent to the
screen location relative to the flick, i.e. up
(north) means top center, down-left
(south-east) means bottom left, etc.
630
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
FlicksMode=2 means the keyboard window
will move in the horizontal/vertical directions,
and minimize on a diagonal direction.
ReturnOnScreen=0
The ReturnOnScreen setting controls how the
keyboard window is positioned when recalled
from its off-screen position (when dismissed
by the Touch Panel’s Clear/Dismiss/Recall
button). If ReturnOnScreen=0, then the left
position of the keyboard window is recorded
when dismissed, and returned to that original
position when recalled. (Note: If using
gestures, and the keyboard window is panned
off-screen to the left, then it will return at the
left edge, and if panned off-screen to the right,
then it will return at the right edge). If
ReturnOnScreen=1, then the keyboard window
is returned to the center of the screen (or
primary monitor in a multi-monitor system). If
ReturnOnScreen=2, then the keyboard window
631
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
is returned to the center of the entire virtual
space (in a multi-monitor system). If there is
only 1 monitor, then ReturnOnScreen=2 will
operate the same as ReturnOnScreen=1.
TouchFadeAway=1
The TouchFadeAway setting indicates how the
"on-screen" Touch Panel portion will react
when the keyboard window if "off-screen". If
TouchFadeAway=1, then after a preset amount
of time (a few seconds), the visible portion of
the Touch Panel (green section when keyboard
window off-screen) will fade away. A
click/touch/mouse event is required to reset
and make the window visible. If
TouchFadeAway=0, then the fade away action
is disabled, and the Touch Panel will always be
visible.
(Added in 1.79)
[Region]
632
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The [Region] section is used to create a region
mask that can change the shape of the visible
window. For some versions, this section
replaces the external REGION.INI file.
RoundedCorner=0
When RoundedCorner=0, region masks are not
applied to round the corners of the keyboard
window. When RoundedCorner=1, 4 ellipses
(circles), and 2 rectangles are summed to
create a rounded corner effect for the keyboard
window. The circle size (affecting the rounded
corner) is calculated based on the current Size
setting. If the Region setting UseFixedArea is
set, it will override the RoundedCorner setting.
Be sure to set UseFixedArea=0 when
RoundedCorner=1.
UseFixedArea=0
Set UseFixedArea=1 to enable the use or
specified areas to create a region mask that
633
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
affects the visible portion of the keyboard
window. To disable these appearance options,
set UseFixedArea=0. Also reference
RoundedCorner for a special case of these
appearance settings.
Area1=
Area2=
Area3=
Area4=
Area5=
Area6=
Area7=
Area8=
Up to 8 different Areas can be specified when
UseFixedArea=1. For validly specified areas,
the different regions will be summed (logically
OR’ed) to create more complex regions. These
634
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
regions must be set in sequential order, and
each must be valid to properly create a
complex region. The Area entries must be of
the form "[Type],left,top,right,bottom" where
[Type] can be "Rect" or "Ellipse", and left, top,
right, bottom are 0,0 based entries from the
top/left of the keyboard window. The Rect type
region is defined by the rectangle area
specified, where the Ellipse type results in the
ellipse that will fit within the rectangle area
specified. (Example: Area1=Rect,3,5,271,109)
The areas are not required to be contiguous.
The entries are coordinates using the top/left of
the window as 0,0, and for practical use, the
right value must be larger than the left value,
and the bottom value must be larger than the
top value. Note these entries are not
width/height, but absolute coordinates.
635
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Warning
Be careful when using
these settings, since the
software can be made
unusable or
inaccessible if the
region area specified
does not map in a
functional/usable way to
the current keyboard
window configuration.
Also, these are pixel
settings based on a
current
size/configuration changing the size
and/or configuration of
OnScreen may result in
an unacceptable display.
[MouseButtons]
636
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
LeftButton=0
RightButton=2
MiddleButton=3
ShiftDisplay=1
The MouseButtons settings are used to track
which actions are triggered by the Mouse
Button. LeftButton or RightButton must be set
to 0 indicating the button that will press a
OnScreen button. The valid settings are 1-63,
referenced as follows:
1=Ignore Button Press, 2=Move OnScreen
3=Look-Through OnScreen, 4=Open
OnScreen Menu, 5=Minimize OnScreen,
6=Enter Key, 7=Escape Key, 8=Tab Key,
9=Space Bar, 10=BackSpace Key,
11=Up-Arrow, 12=Down-Arrow,
13=Left-Arrow, 14=Right-Arrow, 15=Insert,
16=Delete, 17=Home, 18=End, 19=Page Up,
20=Page Down, 21=F1 (Help), 22=F2, 23=F3,
637
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
24=F4, 25=F5, 26=F6, 27=F7, 28=F8, 29=F9,
30=F10 (Menu), 31=F11, 32=F12, 33=Shift
Key, 34=Ctrl Key, 35=Alt Key, 36=Ctrl-Ins
(Copy), 37=Shift-Ins (Paste), 38=Shift-Del
(Cut), 39=Ctrl-Del (Clear), 40=Alt-Backspace
(Undo), 41=Alt-F4 (Close Window),
42=Alt-Tab (Next App), 43=Alt-Esc (Find
App), 44=Alt-Space (System Menu), 45=Alt-Y
(Yes), 46=Alt-N (No), 47=Shift-Tab,
48=Shift-F4 (Tile), 49=Shift-F5 (Cascade),
50=Ctrl-F4 (Close Child), 51=Ctrl-Tab (Select
Child), 52=Ctrl-Esc (Task List),
53=Ctrl-Space, 54=Ctrl-Backspace,
55=Ctrl-Enter, 56=Ctrl-Home, 57=Ctrl-End,
58=Ctrl-Page Up, 59=Ctrl-Page Down,
60=Ctrl-Up, 61=Ctrl-Down, 62=Ctrl-Left,
63=Ctrl-Right
The ShiftDisplay is included for those users
who use the Shift key as one of their buttons OnScreen repaints the shifted keys when the
638
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Shift state is on (Shift-Key Down), and there is
a slight delay on slower systems. To alleviate
this delay, you may set ShiftDisplay=0.
[StartUp]
QuickHelp=1
Magnifier=1
Calc=0
Alpha=1
Edit=1
Numeric=1
Window=1
Info=1
MacroBrd=0
MytCtl=1
(Added in 1.77)
MyTMPanel=1
639
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The StartUp settings are used to indicate which
OnScreen Panels will open at OnScreen
startup. If these are changed, OnScreen
configuration will change and then open in the
new configuration from then on.
These settings can be manipulated thru the
CONFGMTS utility (ConfigureMTS), the
following indicates the relationship to the
available panels in OnScreen:
Alpha - Keyboard panel (letters, function keys)
Edit - Edit Panel (arrow keys, edit keys)
Numeric - Numeric Keypad panel
Window - Windows Controls panel
MacroBrd - Macro panel
Magnifier - Magnifier panel
Calc - Calculator panel
QuickHelp - QuickHelp panel
640
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Info - System Information panel
MytCtl - Control panel
MyTMPanel - Tool bar panel
[SysInfo]
Time=1
Date=1
CurPos=1
FreeDsk=1
FreeMem=1
FreeRes=1
Order=TDMSRC
The settings Time, Date, CurPos, FreeDsk,
FreeMem, FreeRes indicate if the display is
shown.
The Order indicates which order the
information is displayed.
641
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
The relationships are as follows:
Time, Order T, Current System Time.
Date, Order D, Current System Date.
CurPos, Order C, Current Cursos Position.
FreeDsk, Order S, Free Disk Space.
FreeMem, Order M, Free System Memory.
FreeRes, Order R, Free System Resources.
(Added in 1.77)
TimeDisplayNoSeconds=0
This setting was requested by a OnScreen TS
user to reduce network traffic when using the
time display on the System Information panel.
When TimeDisplayNoSeconds=1, instead of
hours, minutes & seconds (HH:MM:SS), the
display is hours & minutes (HH:MM), and the
update occurs only once 1 minute, instead of
once a second.
642
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
[CalculatorTape]
CalcTapeActive=1
OpenTapeWithCalc=0
CalcSendWithCR=0
CalcSendWithEXE=0
Program=
DecimalDigits=6
CalcTapeActive=1 indicates that the Calculator
Tape can be activated from the Calculator
Panel. When the Calculator Panel opens, the
Back Space is changed to indicate "Tape." If
clicked, the Calculator Tape will open. At any
time, by clicking on the Display, the Calculator
Tape will open, or if already open, will close.
When the Calculator Panel is closed, the
Calculator Tape will automatically close. If
CalcTapeActive=0, these features will not be
available. As an alternative, if
643
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OpenTapeWithCalc=1, the Calculator Tape
will open when the Calculator Panel is open. If
CalcSendWithCR=1, the [Enter] Key will be
appended to the keystrokes sent when the SD
(Send) button is clicked on the Calculator
Panel. If CalcSendWithEXE=1, the application
specified with the Program= setting will be
launched when the SD (Send) button is clicked
on the Calculator Panel. Program= is used to
specify the path & file name of the executable
program to launch when
CalcSendWithEXE=1. Only short file names is
recommended for maximum compatibility.
DecimalDigits sets the number of digits that
the OnScreen calculator will display to the
right of the decimal place. Valid settings are 1
through 6.
[Colors]
Display3DKeys=1
If Display3DKeys=1, then the shaded bitmap is
644
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
used as a background for the keys - this is
recommended for 16-bit color or higher (256
colors is not sufficient) Set Display3DKeys=0
to disable the high-resolution display.
Note for sizes smaller than 8, the high-res is
not supported because there are not enough
pixels to create an acceptable look.
SystemColors=0
If SystemColors=0, then the following section
defines the colors available for the different
panels. If SystemColors=1, then the colors are
retreived from the Windows System, as setup
in Display Properties, Appearance.
Colors are RGB values, listed RRR,GGG,BBB.
If your monitor displays more than 16 colors,
you may adjust these values here & avoid the
Colors Options in OnScreen Setup.
ToolTextIn=0,0,0
645
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Color of the Control Panel text if the Panel
indicated is not displayed
ToolTextOut=0,0,255
Color of the Control Panel text if the Panel
indicated is displayed
Text1=0,0,0
Face1=192,192,192
High1=255,255,255
Shadow1=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Magnifier Panel.
Text2=0,0,0
Face2=192,192,192
High2=255,255,255
Shadow2=128,128,128
646
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Keyboard Panel.
Text3=0,0,0
Face3=192,192,192
High3=255,255,255
Shadow3=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Edit Panel.
Text4=0,0,0
Face4=192,192,192
High4=255,255,255
Shadow4=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Numeric Panel.
Text5=0,0,128
Face5=192,192,192
647
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
High5=255,255,255
Shadow5=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Windows Controls
Panel.
Text6=128,0,0
Face6=192,192,192
High6=255,255,255
Shadow6=128,128,128
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Macro Panel.
Text7=0,0,0
Face7=192,192,192
High7=255,255,255
Shadow7=128,128,128
648
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,
Button Shadow of the Calculator Panel.
SysT=255,255,255
System Information: Time
SysD=0,255,255
System Information: Date
SysC=255,255,0
System Information: Cursor Position
SysS=255,0,0
System Information: Disk Space
SysM=255,0,255
System Information: System Memory
Available
SysR=0,255,0
System Information: System Resources
SysQ=0,255,0
649
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Quick Help Display
Sys#=0,255,0
Calculator Display
CalcMem=255,255,0
Calculator Memory indicator
[Help]
This is a lookup section to map internal help
topics to various external help manifestations.
During the 20 years of releases, various help
formats have been introduced and then made
obsolete. Currently HTML and PDF are in use,
as the most flexible and platform independent,
in hopes that they might last a bit longer than
Windows only help formats. This is used by
the HelpInterface function in IMGVERS.DLL,
and should not be modified by the user. Note
that the INI file in the same folder as
IMGVERS.DLL is used for this lookup. If help
650
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
reports a problem with the help file, verifying
the INI in the installation folder and this
section may be helpful.
THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFIC
APPLICATIONS IN WHICH OnScreen
REQUIRES SPECIAL SETTINGS
Certain Windows Applications may be affected
by OnScreen because of the way they were
written. You may set OnScreen to act normally
for any application by setting the Configuration
in OnScreen Setup or editing the
ONSCREEN.INI file.
[Special]
MyTSpcl0000=Command Prompt
MyTSpcl0001=CMD.EXE
IMPORTANT: Because of the revised interface
approach, and the general improvement in
quality of all windows software, many of these
651
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
capabilities & settings are no longer necessary.
In fact, the settings included are for example
purposes only and they are not required for
proper operation of the windowed command
prompt. Because these advanced special
handling capabilities add a great deal of
flexibility to the software, all documentation
and notes remain.
The Special area designates which applications
require special consideration by OnScreen.
These are used internally and should not be
modified by the user here. Refer to OnScreen
Setup to add, remove, or modify these settings.
The following MyTSpcl????= lists the
application name that OnScreen will check in
the application section below for any special
settings. This application name is the Window
Text (Caption Heading) for the Window. To
add an application to this list, it must be
assigned the next sequential number for
652
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
MyTSpcl????.
ADVANCED NOTES:
The Special settings are used internally by
OnScreen to handle the vagaries of different
Windows applications - they are documented
here in case of similar problems with other
Windows applications.
SPECIAL SETTINGS
Special=1 - is used to track internal window
child controls for Edit, Buttons, List boxes,
Scroll bars, etc. - No application should set
Special=1.
Special=2 - this is for Paintbrush and the fact
that it loses the input focus and DOES NOT
regain it if another application is activated
while text is being entered. This may not be
useful in any other application because of the
specific internal windows messages handled
with this setting - if, however, an application is
653
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
written in the same way, and OnScreen is
unable to send keystrokes to that application,
the user may wish to try this setting for that
application. NOTE: This only applies if
InterfaceApproach=0
Special=3 is used internally to handle the
differences between Help in version 3.0 and
3.1.
Special=4 was used to handle the edit areas in
the PIF editor for the main window. This
setting is specific to the PIF editor, and will not
work in any other cases. The
InterfaceApproach=1 setting has eliminated the
need for this special action. PIF editor will not
act properly if InterfaceApproach=0.
Special=5 is used to bring the Task Window
over OnScreen in version 3.0 and handle
special screen repaint issues - this is specific to
the Task List.
654
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Action Settings:
Action=0 - ignore
Action=1 - minimize to button
Action=2 - minimize to icon
Action=3 - hide OnScreen behind Window as
an icon
Action=4 - move OnScreen off of Window
Action=5 - resize Window, move OnScreen off
Action=6 - Dialog Type Window - Move
OnScreen to bottom
Action=7 - Popup Type Window (Help) - Move
Window off of OnScreen
Flags=1 - Window receives Focus
Flags=2 - Window does not get Input Focus
Action=8 - Screen Saver - OnScreen floats
Action=9 - Screen Saver - OnScreen bounces
655
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Action=10 - OnScreen hides
Action=11 - 29 (RESERVED)
Action=30 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.0
Only
Action=31 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.1
Only
Action=32 - Use Secondary Strategy Always
The Flags entry is also checked for allowing a
Button Move to a particular class of windows.
For example, if Action=0 and Flags=1 for a
particular class, this class will be ignored,
AND the button will not move to this class of
window. Essentially the Flags setting should
only be used for Action=7 as outlined above,
or set Flags=1 to prevent the button from
moving to this class of window.
[Command Prompt]
Contention=1
656
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Action=4
[CMD.EXE]
Contention=1
Action=4
[Classes]
MyTClass0000=#32770
MyTClass0001=bordlg
MyTClass0002=Dialog
MyTClass0003=MS_WINNOTE
MyTClass0004=tutor
MyTClass0005=tutprogman
MyTClass0006=tutwrite
MyTClass0007=ListBox
MyTClass0008=ComboBox
MyTClass0009=ComboLBox
657
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
MyTClass0010=WFS_Drives
MyTClass0011=WFS_Drive
MyTClass0012=WindowsScreenSaverClass
MyTClass0013=Sleep
MyTClass0014=FXPopup
MyTClass0015=C_TurboType
MyTClass0016=bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word
6.0
MyTClass0017=bosa_sdm_XL
MyTClass0018=LOGON
MyTClass0019=Blank Screen Saver
MyTClass0020=My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del
MyTClass0021=tooltips_class32
MyTClass0022=Button
[#32770]
658
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Action=6
[bordlg]
Action=6
[Dialog]
Action=6
[MS_WINNOTE]
Action=7
Flags=1
[tutor]
Action=10
[tutprogman]
Action=10
[tutwrite]
Action=10
[ListBox]
659
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Action=31
[ComboBox]
Action=32
[ComboLBox]
Action=31
[WFS_Drives]
Action=30
[WFS_Drive]
Action=30
[WindowsScreenSaverClass]
Action=10
[Sleep]
Action=10
[FXPopup]
Action=10
660
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
[C_TurboType]
Action=7
Flags=2
[bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word 6.0]
Action=6
[bosa_sdm_XL]
Action=6
[LOGON]
Action=10
[Blank Screen Saver]
Action=10
[My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del]
Action=6
[tooltips_class32]
Action=0
661
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Flags=1
[Button]
Action=0
Flags=1
ADVANCED NOTES:
The Classes listed here are the classes that
OnScreen must act in special ways. Primarily
this list is referenced internally during
OnScreen operation against the active window.
If a match is found, the action OnScreen will
take is given by the action.
IMPORTANT: Each Class on this list will
affect the system memory that OnScreen
requires, and will affect the system operation
speed within Windows since this list must be
checked against the active window. There is no
reason to remove any of the entries on this list,
and if you do, proper operation of OnScreen
662
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
cannot be ensured.
If OnScreen does not act the way you want it to
act, cross check the OnScreen actions listed
above, and if applicable, add the class and
action to the list, as documented below in the
example for screen savers.
NOTE: Screen Savers.
The main reason to add to this list would be to
add a screen saver that you use which is not
currently on the list. To add an entry: Add the
Next sequential entry to the [Classes] section.
e.g.
MyTClass0028=MyScreenSaver
and then add an entry below it as:
[MyScreenSaver]
Action=10
This will result in OnScreen hiding behind the
663
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
screen saver when the screen saver becomes
active.
NOTE: Reference the actions above for
alternate screen saver actions.
Reference the ClassWatch setting in the
[Configuration] \section to find out the class of
the active window.
[MenuClasses]
MyTClass0000=#32768
MyTClass0001=BaseBar
MyTClass0002=MsoCommandBarPopup
MyTClass0003=DV2ControlHost
These settings have been added to allow
additions of application defined menus.
Windows 98 added to the original Popupmenu
class with the BaseBar, and Office 97 added
the MsoCommandBarPopup. Since these
menus work better when displayed above
664
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
OnScreen, internal settings & action allow the
classes of windows in this list to appear above
OnScreen. There is a maximum of 10 classes
that can be entered in this list.
[StayBehindClasses]
MyTClass0000=The Magnifier
MyTClass0001=CrossScanner FingerScan
MyTClass0002=CrossScanner Desktop
MyTClass0003=Defer:WordComplete
These settings have been added to provide
more flexibility for handling other windows in
the system. Because the MenuClasses setting
are used for Menus and can affect focus issues,
an additional setting for other interface
windows that affect the windows display order
has been added. OnScreen will not position
above (visibly on top) of these windows. The
"Defer:" prefix indicates a modified logic
665
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
approach internally, so that when the mouse is
positioned in the overlap between the keyboard
window and the indicated deferred window, an
override state occurs. When the mouse slides
onto the keyboard window in this state, the
keyboard will then stay above the indicated
window class. This lasts until the mouse
pointer goes off the keyboard window. This
allows a flexible approach, designed
specifically for the WordComplete window,
which stays topmost, unless the user wants to
type a letter, which can be accomplished by
sliding off the deferred window onto the
keyboard, bringing the keyboard on top of the
(otherwise) topmost window. There can be
only 1 Defer entry in this list.
Important Note: The StayBehindClasses
area ONLY refers to other windows that
have the Topmost attribute in the system.
This cannot be used for normal type
666
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
windows. The Window manager sorts
multiple Topmost windows, which in all
cases will be above other non-topmost
windows. The StayBehindClasses is used
to help sort these topmost windows. In
order to position the topmost OnScreen
window below some application window,
the application window must also have the
Topmost attribute. For application level
control of the keyboard window, refer to
IMG’s Build-A-Board.
(OnScreen only)
[DoNotArrangeClasses]
maximum 32 characters
MyTClass0000=CrossScanner
MyTClass0001=MyTSetup
MyTClass0002=Shell_TrayWnd
667
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
MyTClass0003=Calculator Tape
MyTClass0004=The Magnifier
MyTClass0005=The Right Touch
MyTClass0006=TouchRight Utilities
MyTClass0007=ScrlCtrl
MyTClass0008=DV2ControlHost
MyTClass0009=SmartClick
MyTClass0010=WorkerW
MyTClass0011=SysListView32
MyTClass0012=ImlWinCls
MyTClass0013=CrossScanner Cursor Park
These settings have been added to allow
additions of applications that the user does not
want to be Auto-arranged when
AutoArrange=1 - (see above for this setting).
Because certain OnScreen & CrossScanner
windows should not be affected by
668
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Auto-Arrange when enabled, this list provides
the list of window classes that will not be
arranged.
[MacroPanelsToOpen]
The default setting is to have no panels
automatically open. The list that would appear
here is appended to the Window Names in the
special MyTSpcl????= list above.
NOTE: If MacroPanelsToOpen includes one of
the Special settings windows names, only the
Special Settings will work & the Macro Panel
will not open.
IMPORTANT: Each Panel on this list will
affect the system memory that OnScreen
requires, and will affect the system operation
speed within Windows since this list must be
checked against the active window.
The list is built from
OpenPanel????=MAC?????.KMF entries.
669
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
Example:
OpenPanel0000=MAC00032.KMF
OpenPanel0001=MAC00002.KMF
OpenPanel0002=MAC00008.KMF
where OpenPanel???? entries must be in
sequential order starting at 0000. The numbers
must be sequential. The Macro File name with
ID embedded in the name must be the entry.
Since there is no easy way to view the Macro
Panel at the file level, these settings should be
handled within OnScreen Setup.
[Keys]
MyTKeys0000=78,16384
The [Keys] section lists a sequential list of key
IDs and enhanced settings code. The first
number in the list is the key ID for each
MyTKeys???? entry, and the second number
(after the comma) lists the enhanced settings
670
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
ID. See BUILD-A-MACRO notes above for
the Key IDs list.
The MyTKeys???? must be sequential starting
at MyTKeys0000. e.g. Additional entries to the
above would be
MyTKeys0001=1,1
MyTKeys0002=12,64
The Enhanced setting is a binary code
(decimally displayed) that is set as follows:
Enable/Disable is 1-128
Launch is 256-32768
For any particular key, the bits are "or"-ed, or
summed as follows
0 - Key enabled
+1 Disable Keystroke
+2 Disable Shift + Keystroke
+4 Disable Ctrl + Keystroke
671
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
+8 Disable Alt + Keystroke
+16 Disable Alt-Shift + Keystroke
+32 Disable Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+64 Disable Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke
+128 Disable Alt-Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+256 Launch with Keystroke
+512 Launch with Shift + Keystroke
+1024 Launch with Ctrl + Keystroke
+2048 Launch with Alt + Keystroke
+4096 Launch with Alt-Shift + Keystroke
+8192 Launch with Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke
+16384 Launch with Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke
+32768 Launch with Alt-Ctrl-Shift +
Keystroke
The above setting for MyTKeys0000 is for the
Delete Key (with Ctrl and the Alt key pressed)
672
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
to launch the Key EXE below (for Key0078).
The utility will force Windows to restart, so
Ctrl-Alt-Delete on the keyboard will result in a
warm reboot. When the Logon Utilities are
enabled in Windows 2000 / XP, a Ctrl-Alt-Del
will perform the same result as if done on a
physical keyboard, e.g. show a dialog in the
secure WinLogon desktop. In Windows
Vista/7, a separate set of buttons will be
displayed on the user desktop, allowing similar
functionality to the WinLogon options shown
if a Ctrl-Alt-Del is performed by a physical
keyboard (the GINA interface has been
dropped by Microsoft in Windows Vista/7, so
transferring to the secure WinLogon desktop
does not occur). Options include: Lock
Workstation/Switch User, Log Off, Restart,
Shutdown, and the Task Manager.
[Key0078]
Program=%PRODDIR%\CTALTDEL.EXE
673
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
NOTE: This assumes the default install on a
normal windows setup - it is included primarily
for example. Each Key ID can have 1 Key EXE
associated with it, and 1 or more key
combinations can launch this EXE based on
the MyTKeys???? setting above in [Keys].
Note that the Enable/Disable portion of a
keystroke is independent of its Launch setting.
The Keystroke should be initiated prior to the
launch of the EXE, but system & Windows
issues may affect this timing. The path & file
name conform to "short" file names for
backwards compatibility. Make sure you do not
use Long file names in the path.
Developer’s Kit Notes: The following
sections are NOT in the default INI as
shipped with the product, but since they
are valid & available entries, they are
briefly listed here for reference. For
complete coverage, entry information, and
674
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
further details on these sections, please
refer to the Developer’s Kit documentation.
AddOnDLL sections
There are 3 possible sections available [AddOnDLL1], [AddOnDLL2],
[AddOnDLL3]. Only a single section is listed
here. The Developer’s Kit covers a sample
AddOnDLL, along with a Logging Log DLL
using these capabilities.
[AddOnDLL1]
DLLName=%PRODDIR%ADDONDLL\ADDON
InitializeFunctionName=InitFuncType7
InitializeFunctionType=7
TimerFunctionName=TimerFuncType9
TimerFunctionType=9
TimerDelay=1000
675
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
CleanupFunctionName=CleanupFuncType8
CleanupFunctionType=8
Value1=1
Value2=201
Value3=3302
PaintDLL section
The Paint DLL allows an external DLL to
handle certain painting tasks within OnScreen,
allowing customization to the panel
background, and the keys (both key
background image and key label) Refer to the
Developer’s Kit for details and a sample DLL
that shows some custom painted images.
[PaintDLL]
DLLName=%PRODDIR%\PaintDLL\Release\Pa
PaintFrame=1
PaintFrameFunc=PaintDLLPaintFrame
676
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
PaintKey=0
PaintKeyFunc=PaintDLLPaintKey
PaintKeyBackground=1
PaintKeyBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyBa
PaintKeyModBackground=0
PaintKeyModBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintK
PaintKeyLabel=1
PaintKeyLabelFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyLabel
WordsDLL section
The Words DLL allows an external DLL to
handle Word List functionality when the
WordComplete panel is available. Refer to the
Developer’s Kit for details and a sample DLL
that shows the integration.
[WordsDLL]
DLLName=%PRODDIR%\WordsDLL\Release\W
677
Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI)
WordsGetWordListFunc=GetWordList
WordsTypedWordFunc=TypedWord
678
Chapter 11. Error
Messages and Numbers
OnScreen Errors & Notes are listed is this
section describing details and possible
resolutions.
OnScreen Error Messages
OnScreen Errors & Notes are listed below
alphabetically with the following information:
Internal Error Codes
Explanations
Possible Solutions to resolve the problem
If you are unable to resolve the problem and
require technical support please write down the
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
error code and refer to the Customer Support
section of this manual.
OnScreen is Already Open! Cannot Open
Another...
Internal Code: 1
Explanation: OnScreen is already running.
Solutions: OnScreen should be visible
somewhere on your screen display - it may be
minimized to a button or icon.
If using the Developer’s Kit, if is possible that
OnScreen is open, but off-screen, and not
accessible - you can try going to a higher
resolution (Control Panel | Display | Settings,
and raise the resolution (e.g. 800x600 to
1024x768)). You can also use the
CLOSEMTS.EXE from the Developer’s Kit to
force OnScreen to close. If you have
configured OnScreen to open off-screen, you
may run OnScreen Setup | Configuration |
680
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Special Options | Return to Installation
Defaults. You may also try MOVEWMTS.EXE
to move back on the visible screen, then Save
Settings & Save Position. Refer to Developer’s
Kit notes for further details.
OnScreen Initialization Error! Cannot
access OnScreen Initialization File:
ONSCREEN.INI
Internal Code: 39
Explanation: OnScreen could not access the
ONSCREEN.INI file.
Solutions: The OnScreen Initialization file is
not in the Installation directory. You can run
OnScreen Setup from the Program Manager
OnScreen group, select
Configuration-Special-Return To Installation
Defaults, and select Yes, then retry OnScreen.
OnScreen Initialization Error! Cannot
access OnScreen Keyboard File:
681
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
KEYBOARD.KBF
Internal Codes: 4, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90,
91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97
Explanation: OnScreen could not access the
KEYBOARD.KBF file.
Solutions: If OnScreen cannot access the
KEYBOARD.KBF file located in the
OnScreen Installation Directory, OnScreen
cannot be run. You may wish to exit Windows,
restart, and retry. If this does not work, you
will have to re-install OnScreen from diskette.
Internal Codes: 84, 89, 96
Explanation: The KEYBOARD.KBF file is
corrupt.
Solutions: You can try to restore the original
files by going into OnScreen Setup |
Configuration (Appearance [Advanced]) |
Special Options and select Return to
682
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Installation defaults, or you will need to
re-install OnScreen.
OnScreen File Error! Cannot access
OnScreen Macro File: MAC?????.KMF or
Keyboard Macro file KYBD????.KMF
Internal Code: 98, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112,
113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118
Explanation: OnScreen could not access the
file listed in the Error message.
Solutions: You may have deleted the Macro
File listed, and the Macro Panel is not
available. Check all Macro Key assignments to
verify that none are attempting to open a
non-existent Macro Panel. There may be some
system or permissions issue that is preventing
access to the file - you can try as an
Administrator to see if results are different.
You should verify the installation (or
re-install).
683
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
There is not enough System Memory
Available for OnScreen to run in this
Configuration. Consult Your Manual.
Internal Code: 103
Explanation: There is not enough Windows
Global Memory available to operate OnScreen
in the current configuration.
Solutions: You may try to increase System
Memory available to all applications within
Windows, or operate OnScreen in a smaller
configuration and/or size. OnScreen requires
more System Memory as the screen display
area increases. As you open Panels or go to a
larger size, the demand increases. You may try
to increase the system memory by increasing
the Windows Swap File (see Virtual Memory
under 386 Enhanced in the Windows Control
Panel), or physically adding more memory to
your system.
684
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
This is a Single User Version of OnScreen.
Please Contact Innovation Management
Group, Inc. for Multi-User Licensing.
Internal Code: 101
Explanation: This is a Single User Version.
Solutions: Contact Innovation Management
Group, Inc. regarding Multi-User and Site
Licensing of OnScreen.
Too many clocks or timers! Close Some
Windows or Stop Animations, then Retry.
Internal Code: 3
Explanation: There is not a System Timer
available
Solutions: You can close some windows, or
stop any animations, or try exiting Windows
and restart.
Window Creation Error! Cannot continue!
Check System and Try again.
685
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Internal Code: 1
Explanation: Windows could not create a
Window for OnScreen
Solutions: You may have too many windows
open, and there are not enough resources, or
the Windows Environment may have been
corrupted, or some other system error. Either
Close other windows and try again, or exit
Windows, and restart.
Window Tracking Error. Close OnScreen
and Restart.
Internal Code: 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005
Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 in
ONSCREEN.INI and there has been an
internal error in OnScreen.
Solutions: Close OnScreen, and reset the
InterfaceApproach in the ONSCREEN.INI to
1, then restart OnScreen.
686
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
Windows Internal Controls Are Active in
Active Window! Cannot Remove OnScreen!
Close Active Window or Switch to Another
Window, then Retry.
Internal Code 1000:
Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 in
ONSCREEN.INI, and Windows Internal
Controls have been subclassed
Solution: Close Active Window, or Switch to
Another Window and retry.
Windows Global Memory Allocation Error!
Close OnScreen and Restart.
Internal Codes: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,
27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
40, 99. 100, DLL
Explanation: OnScreen attempted to Lock or
Allocate Global Memory, and received an error
687
Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers
code from Windows.
Solutions: See Solutions under "There is not
enough System Memory..." above.
Windows Local Memory Allocation Error!
Close OnScreen and Restart.
Internal Codes: 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49,
50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61,
62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73,
74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 102, 104, 105,
106, 107, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123
Explanation: OnScreen is unable to access
Local Memory to OnScreen. You should never
see this error.
Solutions: Close OnScreen and Restart. If that
is not successful, Exit Windows and Restart.
688
Index
Symbols
101
Keyboard, 79
104
Keyboard, 79
2-Button
Mouse, 320
2037 / 2038
year
limitation,
428
3-Button
Mouse, 320
3D Key
Display, 188
A
ABC
Keyboard,
258
About this
product, 383
Action
Button, 316,
319
Action Button
Move, 199
ActionPanel INI setting,
553
ActionPanelEnab
- INI setting,
560
Activate
Keystroke
Macro, 290
Index
Active
Application
(Active
Window), 79
Allow Action
Button Move,
199
Add A Panel,
285
AllowFrameMov
- INI setting,
526
Add/Remove
Programs, 5,
26
AllowGrayedKey
- INI setting,
581
Additional
Keyboard
Notes, 261
AllowReadOnlyO
- INI setting,
588
addresses, 284
AllowThemeCha
- INI setting,
626
Administrator,
27, 114
Administrator
Rights, 330,
332
Advanced
User Notes,
362
Alt Key
operation, 80
Alternate
Virtual
Interface, 199
AltGr, 260
690
Index
AltGr Key
operation, 80
AltGrLock INI setting,
623
AltLock - INI
setting, 622
Application
(Launch from
Macro Key),
301
Application
Notes, 375
Area
(Area1,Area2,Area3,etc.)
- INI setting,
634
Auto-Arrange
Active
Window, 194
Auto-Arrange
Windows, 194
Auto-Open
(Macro
Panel), 97
Auto-Save
Position, 195
AutoArrange INI setting,
557
AutoArrangeAct
- INI setting,
557
Auto Logon,
355
AutoCapI INI setting,
556
Auto Logon
Options, 333
Automatic
Keystrokes,
691
Index
196
Automatic
Logon, 332,
355
Automatic
Typing, 196
Automatically
go to Desktop,
335
AutomaticU INI setting,
554
B
background,
71
Background
(Keyboard),
228, 234
BackgroundColo
- INI setting,
504
Basic Colors
Dialog, 226
AutoSaveMove
- INI setting,
558
BIOS, 59
AutoSpace INI setting,
555
BorderNoHit INI setting,
528
AutoSpaceDisable
- INI setting,
555
Build-ABoard,
434
Border - Key,
201
692
Index
Build-ABoard layout
support, 467
Build-AMacro,
284
Build-AMacro Notes,
435
Button
(Minimize to
button)
Position
Options, 498
Button
Display, 470
ButtonIgnoreWindowXY
- INI setting,
503
ButtonOffsetX
- INI setting,
497
ButtonOffsetY
- INI setting,
497
ButtonOverrideH
- INI setting,
498
ButtonOverrideW
- INI setting,
498
ButtonOverrideX
- INI setting,
501
ButtonOverrideY
- INI setting,
501
ButtonSingleMo
- INI setting,
503
693
Index
C
Calc
(Calculator
panel), 76
calculator
display, 99
Calculator
Panel, 98
Calculator
section [CalculatorTape]
(INI file), 642
Calculator
Tape, 99
CaptionWatch
- INI setting,
497
Caret (text
cursor), 79
Catalog, 63
CD
(CD-ROM or
DVD), 1, 22
Center - INI
setting, 507
CenterOversize
- INI setting,
578
Caps Lock
setting, 537
Certificate of
Authenticity,
1, 22
CapsLockMode
- INI setting,
540
Change
Theme
(menu), 115
694
Index
CheckFloppies
- INI setting,
513
CheckMinMax
- INI setting,
514
Classes
section
[Classes] (INI
file), 657
ClassWatch INI setting,
514
Clear Key
(Macro), 302
Click (Sound
feedback),
474
Close
(Calculator
Tape), 99
Close (Child
Window), 90
Close (Exit),
111
Close (Exit)
(Quit), 76
Close
(OnScreen),
111
Close
(Panels), 76
Close (Tool
bar), 73
CLOSE
(Window), 90
Close a panel,
76
Colors
Dialog, 229
Colors section
[Colors] (INI
695
Index
file), 644
Command
Line Options,
450
Commonly
Asked
Questions, 51
ConfigPath INI setting,
486
Configuration
- Special, 471
Configuration
section [Configuration]
(INI file), 486
Configure
Automatic
Logon, 355
Configure
your Mouse
Buttons, 316,
318
Contacting
IMG, 382
Contention INI setting,
489
context menu,
371
Control Key
operation, 80
Control Panel,
76
ControlLock INI setting,
621
ControlLogo INI setting,
521
ControlPanel INI setting,
696
Index
524
ControlPanelKeyboard
- INI setting,
524
ControlPanelToggleButtons
- INI setting,
575
Copy (Macro
editing), 310
Copy
(Windows
Control
Panel), 90
Copy Key
(Macro), 302
Copyrights, 9
Create
Keystroke
Macro, 290
CrossScanner
- INI setting,
579
CrossScanner
section
[CrossScanner] (INI file),
580
CTRL+ALT+DE
Logon Utility,
342
Current
Settings, 108
Cursor (display/selecting),
325
Cursor - INI
setting, 493
Cursors, 325
Customer
Service, 61
Customer
Suggestions,
697
Index
389
Customer
Support, 61
Cut (Macro
editing), 310
Cut (Windows
Control
Panel), 90
D
Date (System
Information
panel), 101
Debugging
Options - ONSCREEN.INI,
514
Default Logon
Name, 356
Default
Password, 356
Default User
Name, 356
DefaultDrive INI setting,
513
Delete (Macro
editing), 310
Delete Macro
Panel, 294
Delete Panel,
285
Deployment
Information,
420
Desktop Automatically
go to, 335
Developer
Utilities, 403
698
Index
Developers,
382
Dialogs (react
to), 195
Display, 52
Post to
Clipboard,
296
Save to
File, 296
Display
Notes, 470
Document
Panel, 285
Display
Options, 188
Documentation
File Save, 298
DisplayChangeEnabled
- INI setting,
585
DoNotArrange
section
[DoNotArrange] (INI
file), 667
Document All
Macro Panels,
297
Document All
Panels, 285
Document
Macro Panel,
296
DOS
Windows, 432
DragMode INI setting,
541
Drivers, 60
699
Index
DriveTypesToCheck
- INI setting,
513
DVD
(CD-ROM or
DVD), 1, 22
Dvorak
layout, 258
DwellTime INI setting,
562
Editing
Macros, 291
Editor - INI
setting, 524
EGA Users,
427
Enable Auto
Logon, 356
Enable
Keyboard at
Start Screen,
335
EnableDwell INI setting,
561
E
Edit (edit
(keyboard)
panel), 76
Edit
(Keyboard
Panel), 79
EnableMouseScr
- INI setting,
576
EnableOperator
- INI setting,
520
700
Index
EnableScan INI setting,
597
Example
Macro Panels,
97
Exit (Close),
111
Exit (Close)
(Quit), 76
ExpandAKey
- INI setting,
572
ExpandAKeyFac
- INI setting,
573
EnableScreenScroll
- INI setting,
577
Enhance Visual Enhancements,
236
Enhance
Button, 189
Enhance
Dialog, 236
equipment, 22
Error
Messages and
Numbers, 679
Evaulation
License, 36
F
Fast User
Switching,
473
Features, 17
701
Index
File Notes,
392
Files Product Files
Installed, 392
Final Release
Notes, 364
Find (Child
Window), 90
FIND
(Window), 90
Flicks, 101
FlicksMode INI setting,
630
focus (active
window), 79
Fonts, 240
ForceUnHook
- INI setting,
529
four function
calculator, 98
G
Gestures, 101
Guide
(Using), 10
H
hard disk
space, 22
hardware
requirements,
22
Help, 108
702
Index
Help (Quick
Help panel),
76
Help section
[Help] (INI
file), 650
Hide Keys
(Show &
Hide), 189
HideZoomWindow
- INI setting,
574
HoldShiftCtrl
- INI setting,
542
325
Icon - INI
setting, 495
Icons, 326
IgnoreSystemCap
- INI setting,
537
IMG, 29, 31
Important
User
Information,
10
incompatibilities
371
Info (System
Information
panel), 76
I
Icon (display/selecting),
Information
Display
(System
703
Index
Information
Panel), 224
Information
Panel, 100
Information
panel
(display), 188
INI - File
Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI),
484
Initialization
File Documentation
(ONSCREEN.INI),
484
InitTouchPanel
- INI setting,
628
Innovation
Management
Group, Inc.,
61
input device,
371
Input Device
options, 200
Install
Installing,
4, 25
Installing /
UnInstalling,
22
Install Silent, 413
Installation
Information,
413
704
Index
InstallPath INI setting,
525
553
Invisible
(Cursor), 325
Interface
Settings, 202
Internal Error
Codes, 679
J
International
(keyboard)
operation, 80
International
(word list),
134
Joysticks, 60
K
International
keyboard, 260
KBF Files,
434
International
Keyboard
Layouts and
Windows, 266
Key Border,
201
IntlWordComplete
- INI setting,
Key Display,
470
Key Click,
474
705
Index
Key EXE, 211
Key Options,
187, 206
KeyBlockTime
- INI setting,
625
Keyboard
Physical
Keyboard,
59
Keyboard INI setting,
509
Keyboard
Background,
228, 234
Keyboard
display
(Fonts), 240
Keyboard
Layouts, 257
Keyboard
Layouts and
Windows, 266
Keyboard
Logon, 340
Keyboard
Notes, 430
Keyboard
Panel, 79
Keyboard
Panels (alpha/edit/numeric
79
Keyboard
Scanning Settings, 158
Keyboard
Select dialog,
257
Keyboard1SizeA
- INI setting,
706
Index
534
Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge
- INI setting,
534
Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardCharSetBase
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardCharSetLarge
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardCharSetMedium
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardEnabled
- INI setting,
561
KeyboardFile
- INI setting,
551
KeyboardFontBa
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardFontLa
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardFontMe
- INI setting,
534
KeyboardUpdate
- INI setting,
533
KeyDelay INI setting,
492
Keys
AltBackspace,
90
Alt-Esc, 90
707
Index
Alt-F4, 90,
189
Shift-F10,
90, 430
Alt-Space,
90
Sys-Rq,
430
Alt-Tab,
430
ControlTab,
90
Ctrl-AltDel,
430
Ctrl-Break,
430
Keys - special
keyboard
keys, 430
Keys section
[Keys] (INI
file), 670
KeysOnlyAssist
- INI setting,
582
Pause Key,
55, 430
KeysOnlyAssistN
- INI setting,
582
Print
Screen
Key, 55,
430
Keystroke
(sequence,
down and up),
197
708
Index
Keystroke per
single click,
197
Keystroke
script
(macro), 284
Keystroke
sequence
(macro), 96,
284
Keystrokes
(Automatic),
196
KeyWatch INI setting,
514
KMF Files,
434
Korean
Windows IME
Usage, 473
Kybd
(Keyboard
panel), 76
L
language
(Keyboard
layout), 259
Launch
Application
(Macro Key),
301
Launch Key
EXE, 209
Layout
(international
keyboards),
80
709
Index
Layouts
(keyboards),
257
Left Button
(action
button), 316,
319
Left-Hand
(cursor), 180,
325
LetterAssist INI setting,
580
letters, 284
License Key,
1, 22, 31
License
Manager, 31
Licensing, 31
Licensing
Information,
29
Logo
(Custom), 187
Logon Automatic,
355
Logon Automatic
Logon, 333
Logon Setup/Configure
Logon, 333
Logon - Start
Screen
Options, 333
LOGON
Folder, 345
Logon
Options - Start
Screen, 335
710
Index
Logon
Utilities, 191
340
My-T-Soft
2 Technical
Notes, 345
Administrator
Rights,
330, 332
Windows
8, 331
Build-ABoard
Layouts,
341
Windows
Vista / 7,
331
CTRL+ALT+DEL
Logon
Utility, 342
LowerCaseDispl
- INI setting,
537
LOGON
Folder, 345
My-T-Soft
2 - small,
medium,
large, 341
My-T-Soft
2
Keyboard,
M
Macro
Build-AMacro,
284
711
Index
Macro (Macro
panels), 76
Document
Panel, 285
Macro Key,
299
Macro Zoom
Dialog, 307
Macro Panel
Description,
293
MacroPanelsToO
section
[MacroPanelsToOpen]
(INI file), 669
Macro Panel
Dialog, 303
Macro Panel
ID, 292
Macro Panels,
96
Macros
Activate
Keystroke
Macro, 290
Add A
Panel, 285
Clear Key,
302
Delete
Panel, 285
Copy Key,
302
Document
All Panels,
285
Create
Keystroke
Macro, 290
712
Index
Delete
Macro
Panel, 294
Panel Description,
293
Document
All Macro
Panels, 297
Panel ID,
292
Document
Macro
Panel, 296
Editing
(Advanced),
291
Launch
Application,
301
Open
Macro
Panel, 301
Paste Key,
302
Mag
(Magnifier
panel), 76
Main Macro
Panel, 96,
285, 295
ManualToolCont
- INI setting,
589
MAX
(Windows
Control
Panel), 90
Memory, 449
713
Index
MenuClasses
section
[MenuClasses] (INI
file), 664
MenuForceForeground
- INI setting,
593
MenuOffset INI setting,
543
Menus Windows
menu
operation
notes, 429
messaging
information,
382
MIN
(Windows
Control
Panel), 90
Minimize
(opening
minimized) Command
Line, 450
Minimize at
start screen,
335
Minimize
Options, 107
Button, 107
Icon, 107
Taskbar
Icon (tray),
107
MinimizeToButto
- INI setting,
497
714
Index
Motion
Dialog Box,
218
Mouse
Physical
Mouse, 59
Required,
59
Touchscreen
/ Pen /
Pointing
Device, 59
Mouse Drivers, 60
Mouse
Buttons, 316,
318
Mouse
Buttons - 2 or
3-Button
Mouse, 320
Mouse
Buttons - Left
Button (action
button), 316,
319
Mouse Driver
- 2 or
3-Button
Mouse, 320
Mouse pointer
(cursor), 325
MouseButtons
section
[MouseButtons] (INI
file), 636
MouseOverHilite
- INI setting,
574
MSI Install,
413
715
Index
Multi-Touch,
101
Panel), 79
Num (numeric
(keyboard)
panel), 76
NumPadAlways
- INI setting,
583
N
New Macro,
290
New Macro
Panel, 288
NoAnnounce
- INI setting,
564
NoHooksEver
- INI setting,
532
NoSplash INI setting,
492
Num
(Keyboard
O
Off-Screen Screen-Edge
Scroll, 107
ONSCREEN.INI
File Documentation,
484
Button
Position,
498
716
Index
Debugging
Options,
514
Opaque, 111
Open a panel,
76
Open Macro
Panel, 301
OpenAbout INI setting,
490
OpenCentered
- INI setting,
491
OpenFirst INI setting,
490
Operation
General, 71
Operation
Notes, 427
Operation
Options, 186,
193
OperatorNoMin
- INI setting,
521
P
Panel Colors,
226, 231
Panel Motion,
218
Panel
Selection, 192
Panels
Calculator
Panel, 98
Closing, 76
717
Index
Control
Panel, 76
Keyboard
Panel, 79
Macro
Panels, 96
Opening,
76
Quick Help
Panel, 100
Selection,
192
System Information
Panel, 100
Tool Bar
Panel, 73
Touch
Panel, 101
Window
Control
Panels, 90
PanelWatch,
114
Parallax
Settings - INI
setting, 624
Parameters (to
EXE) Command
Line, 450
Password INI setting,
520
Paste (Macro
editing), 310
Paste
(Windows
Control
Panel), 90
Paste Key
(Macro), 302
718
Index
Patents, 9
Pause Key, 55
Pens, 60
Physical
Keyboard
BIOS
settings,
booting, 59
Caps Lock
operation,
537
Ctrl-AltDel,
670
layout, 259
mechanical
emulation,
527
Numeric
Keypad
operation
option, 583
operation,
197
Pointing
Devices
Joysticks,
60
Mouse, 60
Pens, 60
Touchscreens,
60
Position, 110
Print Screen
Key, 55
Product
Catalog, 63
Programming
Information,
382
719
Index
R
Q
Questions
Commonly
Asked
Questions,
51
Quick Help,
108
Quick Help
Panel, 100
Quick Start, 1
Quit (Exit)
(Close), 76
QWERTY
(Keyboard
Layout), 257
React to
Dialogs and
other
Windows, 195
ReadOnlyOK
- INI setting,
587
Region
section
[Region] (INI
file), 632
Regional
(International)
settings
(Keyboard
Layouts and
Windows),
266
Release
720
Index
Information,
4, 25, 413
Release
Notes, 364
reposition, 71,
110
requirements,
22
resolutions,
181
restart, 670
Restart Developer
Utilities, 403
Restore
Position, 110
Restore
Settings, 108
RestorePosition
- INI setting,
507
Return to
Installation
Defaults, 217
ReturnOnScreen
- INI setting,
631
right click,
371
Right Mouse
Button, 316,
318
Right-Hand
(cursor), 180,
325
RoundedCorner
- INI setting,
633
721
Index
S
Save Current
Settings, 108
ScanColor INI setting,
598
Save Position,
110
ScanControlPane
- INI setting,
617
SaveAfterChange
- INI setting,
594
ScanEnableDisab
- INI setting,
598
SaveAfterMove
- INI setting,
594
ScanKeyboardAl
- INI setting,
613
SaveAtClose INI setting,
594
ScanKeyboardEd
- INI setting,
615
SaveAtEndSession
- INI setting,
594
ScanKeyboardNu
- INI setting,
616
ScanCalculator
- INI setting,
620
ScanLeftClickMo
- INI setting,
604
722
Index
ScanMacro INI setting,
618
ScanSound INI setting,
597
Scanning
Settings, 158
ScanTime INI setting,
600
ScanOpenPanels
- INI setting,
608
ScanOrder INI setting,
609
ScanReverseAfterNumScans
- INI setting,
606
ScanRightClickMode
- INI setting,
600
ScanShowAllOptions
- INI setting,
608
ScanToolBar INI setting,
617
ScanTransparenc
- INI setting,
599
ScanWindowsCo
- INI setting,
619
ScanWordCompl
- INI setting,
612
Screen-Edge
Scroll, 107
723
Index
Screen-Saver
options, 653
Select Key,
206
script Keystroke
macro, 284
Select Key
Modifier, 207
Scroll
(ScreenEdge),
107
ScrollMovePixels
- INI setting,
578
SecondSpace
- INI setting,
556
Select
Keyboard
Background,
228, 234
Select
Keyboard
Layouts, 257
sequence of
keystrokes,
284
See Through,
111
Serial
Number, 1,
22, 31
Select All
(Macro
editing), 310
SessionChangeE
- INI setting,
586
724
Index
Set Position,
110
SetActiveWindowWatch
- INI setting,
514
Settings
section
[Settings] (INI
file), 623
Setup, 4, 44
Installation
Options,
413
Product
Installation,
413
Quiet
Install, 413
Setup
(Product), 46,
108
Setup/Configure
Logon, 333
SetupMode INI setting,
551
SetupSaveSetting
- INI setting,
518
Shift Key
operation, 80
ShiftLock INI setting,
621
Short-Cut, 17
short-cuts menu, 429
Show & Hide
Keys, 189
ShowAsGrayed
- INI setting,
581
725
Index
ShowKeys INI setting,
525
Silent
Installation,
413
SingleKeyPerClick
- INI setting,
527
Size, 106
Size 12,
107
Size Down,
106
Size Up,
106
Size - INI
setting, 505
Size
Selections,
220
SizeMax - INI
setting, 506
SizeMin - INI
setting, 506
SkipTopMostAct
- INI setting,
514
Slide-Out
Panels, 218
SlideOption INI setting,
505
Snap-Out
Panels, 218
Sound - INI
setting, 562
Sounds, 244
Sounds - Key
Click, 474
Special
Handling, 212
726
Index
Special
Options, 187,
212, 471
settings, 42
Special
section
[Special] (INI
file), 651
Start
Minimized,
335
Splash
(disable
opening
splash) Command
Line, 450
Splash Screen
(opening
OnScreen),
492
standard
configuration,
42
standard
Start Menu,
335
Start Screen
Options, 333,
335
StartDelay INI setting,
492
StartUp
group, 113
Startup of
OnScreen,
492
StartUp
section
[StartUp] (INI
file), 639
727
Index
StayBehindClasses
section
[StayBehindClasses] (INI
file), 665
Suffixes - INI
setting, 553
Suggestions,
389
Supervisor/Operator,
187
Support
Customer
Support, 61
website, 61
SysInfo
section
[SysInfo] (INI
file), 641
System
Colors, 230
System
Information
Display, 224
System
Information
Panel, 100
System
requirements,
22
T
Tablet PC
Input Panel,
113, 473
TabletPCEnabled
- INI setting,
592
Tape key
(Calculator
728
Index
Tape), 99
Taskbar
button, 185
Technical
Documentation Section,
362
Technical
Notes, 374
Terminal
Server /
Terminal
Services, 5
TerminalServerConsoleEnable
- INI setting,
596
Text-ToSpeech,
244
Text-ToSpeech - no
announcing,
564
Theme - INI
setting, 626
ThemeList INI setting,
627
Themes, 101
ThemesFolder
- INI setting,
627
three-button
mouse, 320
Tile
(Windows),
90
Time (System
Information
panel), 101
Tool Bar
Control
729
Index
(Manual), 112
Tool Bar
Panel, 73
TopOffset INI setting,
565
Touch Panel,
101
Touch Panel
(menu), 114
TouchFadeAway
- INI setting,
632
touchscreens,
60
Track
Pointing
Device Input
at all times,
200
Trademarks, 9
Transparency,
111
Transparency
- INI setting,
544
TransparencyLev
- INI setting,
544
TrapDialAKeyCu
- INI setting,
495
Tray Icon, 185
TTSAvailable
- INI setting,
565
TTSDelay INI setting,
568
TTSRepeat INI setting,
567
730
Index
TTSScanWordComplete
- INI setting,
571
two-button
mouse, 320
TwoButtonMous
- INI setting,
508
TTSSingleCharKey
- INI setting,
569
TypeMatic INI setting,
492
TTSSpeakWord
- INI setting,
568
Typematic
Operation,
196
TTSWordComplete
- INI setting,
570
TTSWordsKey
- INI setting,
570
Tutorial, 6,
108
Tutorial
and
Standard
Settings, 42
U
Un-Install, 27
Undo (Macro
editing), 310
Undo
(Windows
731
Index
Control
Panel), 90
V
Upper Case
Characters
Always
(Keyboard),
201
Version
(history), 364
view the
cursor, 54
UseFixedArea
- INI setting,
633
Virtual
Machines Technical
Notes, 374
UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo
- INI setting,
540
Virtual
Pointer in
Use, 198
User Notes,
371
VirtualPointer
- INI setting,
526
user-defined
panels, 284
Using this
guide, 10
Visual Enhancements,
236
732
Index
W
What You
Need, 22
WantATVersion
- INI setting,
550
Why Do I
Need
OnScreen?, 15
WantGestures
- INI setting,
630
Win
(Windows
Controls
panel), 76
WantMultiTouch
- INI setting,
629
WantTouchPanel
- INI setting,
629
Wave File sound
integration,
474
website, 61
What is
OnScreen, 13
Win2000ShutDo
- INI setting,
584
Window
(minimize),
186
Window
Contention
(reaction), 195
Windows
Applications,
51
733
Index
Windows
Control
Panels, 90
WindowsKeyWn
- INI setting,
591
WindowWatch
- INI setting,
514
without a
keyboard, 59
Word List
Assistant, 138
WordComplete
- INI setting,
552
Windows
Controls
panel, 76
Windows
Developers,
382
Windows
Installer, 413
Windows
Logon, 340
Windows
Menus, 429
Windows
Notes, 473
WindowsKeysGraphics
- INI setting,
590
X
XParallax INI setting,
624
734
Index
Y
YParallax INI setting,
624
Z
Zoom Keystroke
Macro, 290
735
Download PDF